6ES7133-1BL11-0XB0 - SIEMENS

Preface, Contents

Product Overview 1

Installation 2

Wiring 3

Commissioning 4

Diagnostics 5

General Technical Data 6

Terminal Blocks and Supplemen-

tary Terminals – Technical Data 7

ET 200L Electronics Blocks –

Technical Data 8

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks –

Technical Data 9

SC Digital Electronic Modules –

Technical Data 10

SC Analog Electronic Modules –

Parameters 11

SC Analog Electronic Modules –

Technical Data 12

SC 1COUNT40kHz Counter

Module 13

Order Numbers A

Type and Device Master Files B

Configuration Frame and

Parameterization Frame C

ESD D

Glossary, Index

Edition 04

EWA 4NEB 780 6009-02c

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Distributed I/O Device

Manual

SIMATIC

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009 02

This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as

well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the

manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:

!Danger

indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper

precautions are not taken.

!Warning

indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper

precautions are not taken.

!Caution

indicates

that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not

taken.

Note

draws

your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or

to a particular part of the documentation.

The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified

persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,

equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Note the following:

!Warning

This

device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the

catalog or the

technical

description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers

which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.

This

product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed

correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

SIMATIC

and SINEC are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.

Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the own-

er’s rights may be violated if they are used be third parties for their own purposes.

have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with

the

hardware

and software described. Since deviations cannot be pre

cluded

entirely

, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However

, the

data

in this manual

are reviewed regularly and any necessary cor

rections

included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improve

ment

are welcomed.

echnical data subject to change.



Siemens

AG 1996

Disclaimer of Liability



Siemens

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.

Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights

created

by patent grant

or registration of a utility model or design, are

reserved.

Siemens

Automation Group

Industrial Automation Systems

.O. Box 4848,

D-90327 Nuremberg

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Order No. 6ES7 130-1AA00-8BA0

Safety

Guidelines

Qualified Personnel

Correct Usage

Trademarks

이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.

iii

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Preface

The

information in this manual will enable you to run the ET

200L distrib

uted I/O device and Smart Connect SC in the ET

200 distributed I/O system

as a DP slave.

Order number 6ES7 130-1AA00-8AA0 comprises the manual

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Distributed I/O Device, Release 4



User information on the ET

200L,

200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC

(SC = Smart Connect)

Appendices

This manual is valid for the components of the ET

200L distributed I/O de

vice and Smart Connect SC specified in Appendix A.

It describes the components valid at the time of publication. W

e reserve the

right to attach current product information on new and updated components.

Changes have been made since the previous version of this manual, order

number 6ES7 130-1AA00-8AA0, Release 3, as regards the following:



ET 200L-SC IM-SC (fine-step modular I/O device)



ET 200L: AC terminal block and electronics blocks



ET 200L-SC: High-speed SC analog input modules and counter module

Purpose of the

Manual

Contents of the

Manual

Applicability of the

Manual

Changes Since the

Previous Manual

iv ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

ET 200L and Smart Connect SC meet the requirements and and criteria

of IEC 1

131, Part 2 and are based on the EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS

standard. They meet the requirements for the CE marking, and have CSA,

UL and FM certification.

ou will find detailed information on certification and standards in Sec

tion 6.1.

The ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC are environment-

friendly products. They are exceptional for the following:



Development in accordance with the guidelines for environment-friendly

products: SN 36350



Laser inscriptions (i.e. no labels)



Plastics identification in accordance with DIN 54840



Fewer materials used due to size reduction; fewer parts due to integration

in ASICs

The ET

200L and Smart Connect SC are recyclable due to their low contami

nant content.

o recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an environment-friendly

manner

, contact:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Anlagenbau und T

echnische Dienstleistungen

TD TD3 Kreislaufwirtschaft

Postfach 32 40

D-91050 Erlangen

Phone: +49 91 31/7-3 36 98

Fax: +49 91 31/7-2 66 43

The people there will adapt their advice to suit your situation and provide a

comprehensive and flexible recycling and disposal system at a fixed price.

After disposal you will receive information giving you a breakdown of the

relevant material fractions and the associated documents as evidence of the

materials involved.

In addition to this manual, you will require the manual for the relevant

master

The whole of the ET 200 documentation is also available as a collection on

CD-ROM.

Standards and

Certification

Recycling and

Disposal

Other Manuals

CD-ROM

Preface

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

enable you to access the information you require as quickly as possible,

the manual contains the following aids:



At the beginning of the manual you will find a complete table of contents

and lists of all the figures and tables in the manual.



In the left-hand mar

gin in each chapter you will find headings that pro

vide you with an overview of the contents of the various sections



Following the appendices you will find a glossary

, which contains defini

tions of important terms used in the manual.



At the end of the manual you will find a

detailed index, which gives you

rapid access to the information you require.

If you have technical questions, please get in touch with your Siemens repre

sentative or of

fice. Y

ou will find the address in the manuals of the DP mas

ters (e.g. in the appendix entitled “Siemens W

orldwide” of the

S7-300 Pr

grammable Contr

oller; Har

dwar

e and Installation

manual) in catalogs and in

CompuServe (

GO AUTFORUM).

A hotline is available on +49 (91

1) 895-7000

(fax: 7001).

If you require the type file or device master file, you can download it by mo

dem. Dial +49 (91

1) 737972.

If you have questions or comments about the manual itself, please fill in the

form at the end of the manual and send it to the specified address. Please give

us your personal assessment of the manual on the form.

o make things easier for those new to the ET

200 distributed I/O device, we

fer the ”KO-ET

200” workshop. If you are interested, please contact your

regional training center or the central training center in D-90327 Nurember

(tel. 091

1 895 3154).

Aids to Using the

Manual

Additional Support

Preface

vi ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

can get constantly updated information on SIMA

TIC products:



On the Internet at http://www

.ad.siemens.de/



On the fax polling no. +49 8765-93 00 50 00

In addition, SIMA

TIC Customer Support provides you with current informa

tion and downloads that can be useful to you when using SIMA

TIC products:



On the Internet at http://www

.ad.siemens.de/support/html_00/index.shtml



At the SIMA

TIC Customer Support mailbox on +49 (91

1) 895-7100

o access the mailbox, use a modem of up to V

.34 (28.8 kbps) with the

following parameter settings: 8, N, 1, ANSI. Alternatively

, use ISDN

(x.75, 64 kbps).

ou can contact SIMA

TIC Customer Support by phone on

+49 (91

1) 895-7000 and by fax on +49 (91

1) 895-7002. Y

ou can also send

queries by e-mail on the Internet or to the above mailbox.

Constantly

Updated

Information

Preface

vii

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Contents

Preface

Contents

1 Product

Overview

1-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 What

Is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System?

1-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 What

Is the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device and Smart Connect?

1-3.

. . . . . .

1.2.1 What

Is the ET 200L Block I/O Device?

1-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.2 What

Is the ET 200L-SC Modular I/O Device?

1-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.3 What

Is the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Fine-Step Modular I/O Device?

1-13.

. . . . . . .

2 Installation 2-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Installing

the ET

200L TB 16L/TB 32L T

erminal Block and Supplementary T

er-

minal 2-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Installing

and Disassembling the ET 200L Electronics Block

2-6.

. . . . . . . . . .

2.3 Installing

the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block

2-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Connecting

Smart Connect Electronic Modules to the TB

16IM-SC/TB 16SC

erminal Block

2-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 Installing

the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module on the TB 16IM-SC T

erminal

Block 2-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 Setting

the ET 200L PROFIBUS Address

2-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 Installing

a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the TB 16IM-SC/

TB 16SC terminal block

2-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Wiring 3-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 General

Rules and Regulations

3-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Configuring

the Electrical Installation

3-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Wiring

Rules

3-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 Wiring

the ET

200L TB 16L/TB 32L T

erminal Block

3-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 Wiring

the Smart Connect TB 16SC T

erminal Block

3-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 Wiring

the ET 200L TB

16IM-SC T

erminal Block

3-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 Wiring

the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module

3-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 Using

the Supplementary T

erminal for the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC

3-22.

. . . . . .

3.9 Connecting

Shielded Lines to the Shield T

erminal of the Supplementary T

ermi-

nals 3-23.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10 Connecting

the Smart Connect SC to the ET

200L-SC/TB 16IM-SC

3-24.

. . .

viii

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

4 Commissioning 4-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Configuration

Software

4-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Commissioning

the ET 200L and Smart Connect

4-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Replacing

SC Electronic Modules

4-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Diagnostics 5-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Diagnostics

Using the LEDs

5-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Slave

Diagnostics

5-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 General

Remarks on Diagnostics

5-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.2 Structure

of the Slave Diagnosis

5-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.3 Structure

of Station Statuses 1 to 3, Master Station Number and Manufacturer

Identification 5-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.4 Structure

of the Module Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC

5-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.5 Structure

of the Station Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC

5-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.6 Structure

of Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-Up of ET 200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC

5-15.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 General T

echnical Data

6-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Standards

and Certification

6-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 Electromagnetic

Compatibility

6-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Shipping

and Storage Conditions

6-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Mechanical

and Climatic Environmental Conditions

6-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Details

of Insulation T

esting, Safety Class, and Degree of Protection

6-8.

. . .

6.6 Rated

oltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

6-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-1.

. . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 Terminal

Block TB 16L –

6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0

7-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Terminal

Block TB 32L –

6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0

7-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Terminal

Block TB 16L

AC 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0

7-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Terminal

Block TB 16SC

7-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 Terminal

Block TB 16IM-SC

7-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6 Supplementary T

erminals for the TB 16L and TB 32L

7-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 Supplementary T

erminals for the TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC

7-20.

. . . . . . . . . .

8ET

200L Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

8-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1 Electronics

Block L 16 DI DC 24 V – 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0

8-3.

. . . . . . . . .

8.2 Electronics

Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A – 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0

8-6.

. . .

8.3 Electronics

Block L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0

8-9.

. . . . . . . . . . .

8.4 Electronics

Block L

32 DO DC 24 V/0.5

–6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0

8-12.

. . . .

Contents

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.5 Electronics

Block L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A – 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0

8-15

8.6

Electronics Block L 16 DI AC 120 V – 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0

8-18.

. . . . . . . .

8.7 Electronics

Block L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A – 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0

8-21.

. .

8.8 Electronics

Block L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0

A –

6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0

8-24.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9 Electronics

Block L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A – 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0

8-28

8.10

Electronics Block L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0

A –

6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0

8-31.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9ET

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.1 Interface

Module IM-SC

9-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2 Electronics

Block L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V – 6ES7 131-1BH1

1-0XB0 9-4.

. . . . . .

9.3 Electronics

Block L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A – 6ES7 132-1BH1

1-0XB0 9-7.

9.4 Electronics

Block L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V – 6ES7 131-1BL1

1-0XB0 9-10.

. . . . . .

9.5 Electronics

Block L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A –

6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0

9-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 SC

Digital Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

10-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1 Digital

Electronic Module 2DIDC24V

10-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 Digital

Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A

10-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 Digital

Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A

10-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.4 Digital

Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V

10-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.5 Digital

Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A

10-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.6 Digital

Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V

, DC 24 V to 120 V

10-17.

. . . . . . . . .

11 SC

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1 Parameters

of the Analog Input Modules

11-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.2 Notes

on the Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

11-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.3 Default

Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

11-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.4 Behavior

of the Analog Input Modules

11-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.5 Conversion

and Cycle T

imes of the Analog Input Channels

11-8.

. . . . . . . . . . .

11.6 Connecting

Thermocouples

11-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.7 Connecting

Non-Isolated V

oltage Sensors

11-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.8 Connecting

Current Sensors

11-15.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.9 Connecting

resistance thermometers and resistors

11-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.10 Floating

Measuring Sensors

11-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.11 Wiring

Unused Inputs of Analog Input Modules

11-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.12 Parameters

of the Analog Output Modules

11-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.13 Notes

on the Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

11-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.14 Default

Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

11-22.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.15 Behavior

of the Analog Output Modules

11-23.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.16 Conversion,

Cycle, Settling and Response T

imes of the Analog

Output Modules

11-24.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.17 Connecting

Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs

11-26.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.18 Wiring

Unused Analog Output Modules

11-28.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.19 Analog

alue Representation in S7 Number Format

11-29.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.20 Analog

Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S7 Number Format

11-30.

11.21 Analog

alue Representation for Analog Input Modules in S7 Number

Format 11-32.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.22 Analog

Output Ranges for Output Channels in S7 Number Format

11-37.

. . . .

11.23 Analog

alue Representation for Output Modules in S7 Number Format

11-39.

11.24 Analog

alue Representation in S5 Number Format

11-41.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.25 Analog

Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S5 Number Format

11-43.

11.26 Analog

alue Representation for Analog Input Modules in S5 Number

Format 11-45.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.27 Analog

Output Ranges for Output Channels in S5 Number Format

11-50.

. . . .

11.28 Analog

alue Representation for Output Modules in S5 Number Format

11-52.

12 SC Analog Electronic Modules – Technical Data 12-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.1 Analog

Electronic Module 2

AI U

12-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.2 High-Speed

Analog Electronic Module 2

AI HS U

12-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3 Analog

Electronic Module 2

AI I (...123-1GB00...)

12-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.4 Analog

Electronic Module 2

AI I (...123-1GB10-...)

12-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5 High-Speed

Analog Electronic Module 2

AI HS I (0/4-20 mA,

4-Wire Measuring T

ransducer) 12-26.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.6 High-Speed

Analog Electronic Module 2

AI HS I

(4–20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring T

ransducer) 12-32.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.7 Analog

Electronic Module 2

TC 12-38.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.8 Analog

Electronic Module 1

AI R

TD 12-44.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.9 Analog

Electronic Module 1

AO U

12-50.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.10 Analog

Electronic Module 1

AO I

12-54.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.1 Front

and Side Elevations

13-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.2 Block

Diagram

13-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3 Functions

of the Counter Module

13-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.1 24V

Pulse Initiator With/Without Direction Indicator

13-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.2 Gate

Functions

13-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.3 Digital

Output

13-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.4 Wiring

the Counter and Putting the Counter into Operation

13-14.

. . . . . . . . . . .

13.4.1 Wiring

the Counter

13-15.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.4.2 Putting

the Counter into Operation

13-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.5 Parameters

of the Counter Module

13-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.6 Subdivision

of the Data Areas

13-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.7 Application

Examples

13-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.8 Technical

data

13-25.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A Order

Numbers

A-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1 Order

Numbers for ET 200L Components

A-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.2 Order

Numbers for Smart Connect SC Components

A-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3 Order

Numbers for PROFIBUS Accessories

A-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B Type

and Device Master Files

B-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-1.

. . . . . . . . .

C.1 Identifiers

for the ET 200L

C-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.2 Types

of ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up

C-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.3 Configuration

Frame for the ET 200L-SC

C-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.3.1 Identifiers

for the ET 200L-SC

C-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.3.2 Identifiers

for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

C-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.3.3 Configuration

Frame Example

C-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.4 Parameterization

Frame for the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC

C-14.

. . .

C.4.1 Standard

Section and Parameters for the Status

C-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.4.2 Parameters

for the Smart Connect Section

C-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.4.3 Data

Record 0

C-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.4.4 Data

Record 128

C-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.4.5 Data

Record 130

C-22.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.4.6 Parameterization

Frame Example

C-27.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.5 Default

Start-up

C-31.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.5.1 Default

Start-up with Digital Smart Connect Modules

C-32.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.5.2 Default

Start-Up with Analog Smart Connect Modules

C-36.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D Guidelines

for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

D-1.

. . . . . . . . .

D.1 What

is ESD?

D-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.2 Electrostatic

Charging of Persons

D-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.3 General

Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge

Damage D-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glossary

Index

Contents

xii

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figures

1-1 A T

ypical PROFIBUS-DP Installation

1-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 View

of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

1-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 ET

200L-SC IM-SC

1-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1 Installing

the T

erminal Block

2-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 Disassembling

the T

erminal Block

2-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-3 Installing

the Electronics Block

2-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4 Snapping

the T

erminal Block onto the Rail

2-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5 Sliding

the Labeling Strip into the T

erminal Block

2-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-6 Positioning

the Coding Slide Switches

2-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7 Using

the Screwdriver

2-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-8 Designation

Plate with Labeling Strips (Reduced in Size)

2-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9 Connecting

the Electronic Modules to the T

erminal Block

2-15.

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-10 Installing

the IM-SC Interface Module

2-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-11 Securing

a Supplementary T

erminal to the T

erminal Block

2-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12 Connecting

a Shield T

erminal to the Supplementary T

erminal 2-20.

. . . . . . . . .

3-1 Operating

the ET

200L from a Grounded Supply

3-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 Power

Supply of the T

erminal Block

3-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3 How

the Spring T

erminal W

orks 3-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4 Terminal

Connections on T

erminal Block TB 16L

3-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5 Alternative

ays of Connecting the V

oltage Supply

3-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6 Front

iew of the T

erminal Block

3-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-7 Connections

of the TB 16IM-SC T

erminal Block

3-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-8 Connection

Alternatives for the Power Supply

3-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-9 Connections

of the IM-SC Interface Module

3-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-10 Length

of Insulation Stripped

3-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-11 Wiring

the PROFIBUS-DP Screw-T

ype T

erminal 3-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-12 Connecting

the Power Supply

3-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-13 Functioning

of the Bus T

erminating Switch

3-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1 Structure

of the Slave Diagnosis

5-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2 Structure

of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Software for

the ET 200L-SC

5-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3 Structure

of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Software for

the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

5-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4 Structure

of the Module Diagnosis with any Configuration Software for the

200L-SC, ET

200L-SC IM-SC

5-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5 Structure

of Station Diagnosis

5-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6 Slave

Diagnosis for Default Start-up of the ET 200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC

5-15.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1 The

TB 16L T

erminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension

Drawing 7-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2 The

TB 32L T

erminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension

Drawing

7-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3 The

TB 16L

AC T

erminal Block with the Electronics Block Mounted, Dimension

Drawing (mm)

7-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4 Front

Elevation of the T

erminal Block

7-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5 Block

Diagram of the TB16 SC T

erminal Block.

7-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-6 The

TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block with the IM-SC Interface Module Mounted,

Dimension Drawing

7-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-7 Block

Diagram of the TB 16IM-SC T

erminal Block

7-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-8 TB

16L/TB 32L Supplementary T

erminals, Dimension Drawing

7-19.

. . . . . . . .

7-9

TB 16SC/TB

16IM-SC Supplementary T

erminals, Dimension Drawing

7-20.

Contents

xiii

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8-1 View

of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

8-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2 Block

Diagram of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

8-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3 View

of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

8-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-4 Block

diagram of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

8-7.

. . . . . . .

8-5 View

of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

8-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-6 Block

diagram of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

8-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-7 View

of the L 32 DO Electronics Block DC 24 V/0.5

A 8-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-8 Block

Diagram of the L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

8-13.

. . . . . . .

8-9 View

of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

8-15.

. . . . . . . . . . .

8-10 Block

Diagram of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

8-16.

. .

8-11 View

of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronics Block

8-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-12 Block

Diagram of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronic Block

8-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-13 View

of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A Electronics Block

8-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-14 Block

Diagram of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A Electronics Block

8-22.

. . . . . .

8-15 View

of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A Electronics Block

8-24.

. . . . . . .

8-16 Block

Diagram of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A Electronics Block

8-25

8-17 V

iew of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A Electronics Block

8-28.

. . . . . . . . . . . .

8-18 Block

Diagram of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A Electronics Block

8-29.

. . .

8-19 View

of the L 8DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 2.0A Electronics Block

8-31.

8-20 Block

Diagram of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A Electron

ics Block

8-32.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1 IM-SC

Interface Module

9-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2 Block

Diagram of the IM-SC Interface Module

9-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-3 View

of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

9-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-4 Block

Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

9-5.

. . . . . . . . . .

9-5 View

of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

9-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . .

9-6 Block

diagram of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

9-8.

. . . .

9-7 View

of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

9-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-8 Block

diagram of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

9-11.

. . . . . . . . . .

9-9 View

of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

9-13.

. . . . . . .

9-10 Block

Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A Electronics Block

9-14

10-1

Front and Side Elevations of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module

10-2.

. .

10-2

Block Diagram of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module

10-3.

. . . . . . . . . . .

10-3 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic

Module 10-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-4 Block

Diagram of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic Module

10-6.

. . . . . .

10-5 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module

10-8

10-6

Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module

10-9.

. . . . . . . .

10-7 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic

Module 10-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-8 Block

diagram of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic Module

10-12.

. . . . . . .

10-9 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic

Module 10-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-10 Block

Diagram of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic Module

10-15.

. . .

10-11 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic

Module 10-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-12 Block

Diagram of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic Module

10-18.

. . . . . .

11-1 Structure

of Thermocouples

11-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-2 Connecting

Insulated Thermocouples Without Compensation, With Internal

Compensation, or Use of the Reference T

emperature

(Example TB 16SC)

11-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

xiv

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11-3 Connecting

Insulated Thermocouples of the Same T

ype with External Com

pensation, via a Resistance Thermometer Connected to the Resistance Mea

surement Module, to Slot

A of the T

erminal Block (Example TB 16SC)

11-13.

11-4 Connecting

oltage Sensors (Example TB 16SC)

11-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-5 Connecting

4-Wire Measuring T

ransducers (Example TB 16SC)

11-15.

. . . . . .

11-6 Connecting

2-wire measuring transducers (Example TB 16SC)

11-16.

. . . . . . .

11-7 4-Conductor

Connection for Resistance Thermometers and Resistors (Exam

ple TB 16SC)

11-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-8 Response T

ime of the Analog Output Channels

11-25.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-9 Connecting

Loads/Actuators to a Current Output (Example TB 16SC)

11-26.

. .

11-10 Connecting

Loads/Actuators to a V

oltage Output via a 4-Wire Circuit (Example

TB 16SC)

11-27.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-1 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

AI U Analog Electronic Module

12-2.

. . . . .

12-2 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI U Analog Electronic Module

12-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-3 Jump

response

12-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-4 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

AI HS U High Speed Analog Electronic

Module 12-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-5 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI HS U High-Speed Analog Electronic Module

12-9.

12-6 Jump

response

12-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-7 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

AI I Analog Electronic Module

12-14.

. . . . . .

12-8 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI I Analog Electronic Module

12-15.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-9 Jump

Response

12-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-10 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

AI I Analog Electronic Module

12-20.

. . . . . .

12-11 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI I Analog Electronic Module

12-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-12 Jump

Response

12-23.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-13 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Mod

ule (0/4–20mA, 4-Wire Measuring T

ransducer) 12-26.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-14 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module

(0/4–20mA, 4-Wire Measuring T

ransducer) 12-27.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-15 Jump

Response

12-29.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-16 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Mod

ule (4–20mA, 2-Wire Measuring T

ransducer) 12-32.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-17 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (4–20mA,

2-Wire Measuring T

ransducer) 12-33.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-18 Jump

response

12-35.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-19 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

TC Analog Electronic Module

12-38.

. . . .

12-20 Block

Diagram of the 2

TC Analog Electronic Module

12-39.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-21 Jump

Response

12-41.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-22 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1

AI R

TD Analog Electronic Module

12-44.

. .

12-23 Block

Diagram of the 1

AI R

TD Analog Electronic Module

12-45.

. . . . . . . . . . . .

12-24 Jump

Response

12-47.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-25 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1

AO U Analog Electronic Module

12-50.

. . . .

12-26 Block

Diagram of the 1

AO U Analog Electronic Module

12-51.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-27 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1

AO I Analog Electronic Module

12-54.

. . . . .

12-28 Block

Diagram of the 1

AO I Analog Electronic Module

12-55.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1 Front

and Side Elevations of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-2.

. . . . .

13-2 Block

Diagram of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-3 Continuous

Upward Counting

13-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-4 Continuous

Downward Counting

13-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-5 Single-Pass

Upward Counting

13-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-6 Single-Pass

Downward Counting

13-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-7 Single-Pass

Counting with Loaded V

alue and Gate Function

13-5.

. . . . . . . . . .

Contents

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13-8 Periodic

Upward Counting

13-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-9 Periodic

Downward Counting

13-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-10 Signals

of a 24V Pulse Initiator with Direction Indicator

13-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-11 Opening

and Closing of a Gate

13-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-12 Example

1: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison V

alue to

Overflow 13-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-13 Example

2: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Un

derflow 13-12.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-14 Example

3: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the “Pulse Duration on Reaching

the Comparison V

alue Counting Upward”

13-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-15 Example

4: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the “Pulse Duration on Reaching

the Comparison V

alue Counting Downward”

13-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-16 Example

5: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the “Pulse Duration on Reaching

the Comparison V

alue Counting Upward/Downward”

13-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-17 Connecting

a Pulse Initiator with a Direction Signal (Example TB 16SC)

13-15.

13-18 Example

13-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-19

Example 1,

Continued

13-22.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-20

Example 2

13-23

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-21

Example 2,

Continued

13-24.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1 Labeling

Strips 6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0

A-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2 Labeling

Strips 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0

A-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-3 Labeling

Strips for Smart Connect

A-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1 Structure

of the Parameterization Frame of the ET 200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC

C-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-2 Standard

Section of the Parameterization Frame

C-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-3 Parameters

for the Status

C-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-4 Structure

of Data Record 0

C-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-5 Structure

of the Header of Data Record 128

C-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-6 Structure

of Data Record 128, Bytes 7 to 62

C-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-7 Structure

of the Header of Data Record 128

C-22.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-8 Structure

of Data Record 130 for Single-Channel Modules

C-23.

. . . . . . . . . . .

C-9 Structure

of Data Record 130 for T

wo-Channel Modules

C-23.

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-10 Structure

of Data Record 130 for the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

C-24.

C-11 AI

Parameters in Byte 12 or 17 of DS130

C-25.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-12 1COUNT40kHz

Counter Module – Purpose of Bytes 1

1 to 17 of Data Record

130 C-26.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-13 Structure

of the Parameterization Frame

C-34.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-14 Default

Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET

200L-SC

C-34.

. . . . . . . . . .

C-15 Default

Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

C-35.

. . . .

C-16 Structure

of the Parameterization Frame

C-37.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-17 Default

Setting for Analog Smart Connect Modules

C-38.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1 Electrostatic

oltages which can Build up on a Person

D-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

xvi

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Tables

1-1 General

Components for the ET

200L, ET

200L-SC, ET

200L-SC IM-SC

1-6

1-2

Components of the ET

200L Distributed I/O Device

1-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 Components

of a ET 200L-SC

1-11.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4 Components

of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC

1-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

DIN VDE

Regulations for Installation of a Controller

3-5.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 Pinout

of the PROFIBUS-DP T

erminal Connection

3-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3 Pinout

of the PROFIBUS-DP T

erminal Connection

3-13.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4 Assignment

of the PROFIBUS-DP Connection at the IM-SC

Interface Module

3-19.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5 Assignment

of the Power Supply

3-21.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1 Diagnostics

Using the LED Display

5-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2 Diagnostics

Using the LEDs of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC

5-3.

5-3 Function

Blocks for Slave Diagnosis

5-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-4 Structure

of Station Status 1 (Byte 0)

5-8.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5 Structure

of Station Status 2 (Byte 1)

5-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6 Bytes

13 to 16 for the Diagnostic Interrupt

5-14.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 Rated

oltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

6-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1 Pinout

of the TB 16L T

erminal Block

7-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-2 Pinout

of the TB 32L T

erminal Block

7-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3 Pinout

of the TB 16L

AC T

erminal Block

7-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-4 Supplied

ersions of the Supplementary T

erminals

7-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5 Supplied

ersions of the Supplementary T

erminals

TB16SC/

TB 16IM-SC 7-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1 Assignment

of the ET 200L Electronic Blocks to the T

erminal Blocks

8-1.

. .

8-2 Service

Life of the Contacts

8-27.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-3 Service

Life of the Contacts

8-34.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1 Assignment

of the Interface Module/ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks to the T

er-

minal Blocks

9-1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1 Switching

capacity and lifetime of the contacts

10-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-1 Default

Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

11-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-2 Effect

of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply V

oltage L+ on the

Analog Input V

alues 11-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-3 Compensation

of the Reference Junction T

emperature 11-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-4 Parameters

of the Analog Output Modules

11-20.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-5 Output T

ypes/Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules

11-21.

. . . . . . . . . .

11-6 Default

Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

11-22.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-7 Effect

of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply V

oltage L+ on the

Analog Output V

alues 11-23.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-8 Bipolar

Input Ranges

11-30.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-9 Unipolar

Input Ranges

11-30.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-10 Life-Zero

Input Ranges

11-31.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-11 Bipolar

Output Ranges

11-37.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-12 Unipolar

Output Ranges

11-37.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-13 Life-Zero

Output Ranges

11-38.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-14 Representation

of the Measurement Ranges for Analog Inputs

11-41.

. . . . . . . .

11-15 Representation

of the Measurement Rangesfor Analog Outputs

11-42.

. . . . . . .

11-16 Bipolar

Input Ranges

11-43.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-17 Unipolar

Input Ranges

11-43.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-18 Life-Zero

Input Ranges

11-44.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-19 Bipolar

Output Ranges

11-50.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-20 Unipolar

Output Ranges

11-50.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

xvii

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11-21 Life-Zero

Output Ranges

11-51.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-1 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI U Electronic Module

12-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-2 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI HS U HighSpeed Electronic Module

12-10.

. . . . .

12-3 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI I Electronic Module

12-16.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-4 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI I Electronic Module

12-22.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-5 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI HS I Electronic Module

12-28.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-6 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI HS I Electronic Module (4–20mA, 2-Wire Measur

ing T

ransducer) 12-34.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-7 Static

Parameters of the 2

TC Electronic Module

12-40.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-8 Dynamic

Parameters of the 2

TC Electronic Module

12-40.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-9 Static

Parameters of the 2

AI R

TD Electronic Module

12-46.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-10 Static

Parameters of the 1

AO U Electronic Module

12-52.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-11 Static

Parameters of the 1

AO I Electronic Module

12-56.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1 Displays,

Colour and Functions of the LEDs

13-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-2 Parameter

List

13-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-1 Terminal

Block Order Numbers

A-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-2 Electronics

Block Order Numbers

A-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-3 Supplementary T

erminal Order Numbers

A-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-4 Terminal

Block and T

erminal Order Numbers

A-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-5 Digital

SC Electronic Module Order Numbers

A-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-6 Analog

SC Electronic Module Order Numbers

A-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-7 Function

Modules

A-7.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-8 Accessories

for the ET

200 Distributed I/O Device

A-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-9 Manuals

for STEP 7 and SIMA

TIC S7

A-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-10 Manuals

for ET

200 on SIMA

TIC S5

A-10.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1 Version

der Projektier-Software

B-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-2 Data

for PROFIBUS-DP

B-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-3 Maximum

Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET

200L

B-4.

. . . . . . . . . . .

B-4 Maximum

Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET

200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC

B-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1 DP

Identifiers for the ET

200L

C-2.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-2 Types

of ET 200L-SC of ET

200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up

C-3.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-3 Structure

of the Configuration Frame

C-4.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-4 Identifiers

for the ET 200L-SC

C-6.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-5 Identifiers

for the Smart Connect with Digital ET

200L-SC Modules

C-7.

. . .

C-6 Identifiers

for the Smart Connect with Analog ET

200L-SC Modules

C-7.

. .

C-7 Identifiers

for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC IM-SC Modules

C-9

C-8

Identifiers for the Smart Connect with ET

200L-SC IM-SC

Analog Modules

C-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-9 Data

Records for the ET

200L-SC

C-17.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-10 Data

Records for the ET

200L-SC IM-SC

C-18.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-11 AI

Parameters in Byte 1

1 and 16 of DS130

C-24.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-12 AO

Parameters in Byte 1

1 or 16 of DS130

C-25.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-13 ET

200L-SC IM-SC Example

C-27.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-14 Type

Files for the ET 200L-SC Default Start-up with Digital SC Modules

C-32.

C-15 ET

200L-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Mod

ules

C-36.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-16 ET

200L-SC IM-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect

Modules C-36.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

xviii

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Contents

1-1

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Product Overview

The

product overview provides information about



The role of the ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect within

the ET

200 distributed I/O system.



The components which make up the ET 200L distributed I/O device.



The components which make up the Smart Connect SC.



How the components of the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC can be used

together.

Section Subject Page

1.1 What Is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System? 1-2

1.2 What Is the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device? 1-3

This Chapter

Contents of the

Chapter

1-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

1.1 What Is the ET 200 Distributed I/O System?

When

a system is installed, the input/output modules are normally installed

centrally in the programmable logic controller

If inputs and outputs are made at long distances from the programmable logic

controller

, there may be long runs of cabling which are not immediately com

prehensible, and electromagnetic interference may impair reliability

In such systems, we recommend you to use the ET 200 distributed I/O sys

tem:



The controller CPU is located centrally



The I/O (input/output) system operates locally in a distributed fashion.

The ET

200 high-performance bus system ensures that the CPU and I/O

system communicate with each other without problems owing to its high

data transfer rates.

The ET

200 distributed I/O system consists of active (master) and passive

(slave) nodes that are interconnected via the PROFIBUS-DP

master

slaves

PROFIBUS-DP

S7-300M7-300 S7-400M7-400 PU or PC

200L

200M

200B

S5-95U Other field devices

S5-95U

with IM 308-C

S5-1

15U to 155 U

Figure 1-1 A Typical PROFIBUS-DP Installation

PROFIBUS-DP

(DP means distributed I/O) is an open bus system conform

ing with EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS-DP consists of a

DP master and DP slaves.



DP master

: The link between the controller and the distributed I/O sys

tem is the DP master

. The DP master exchanges data with the distributed

I/O system over the PROFIBUS-DP and monitors the field bus.



DP slave

: The I/O devices are connected as DP slaves. DP slaves process

data locally from the sensors and signal control elements in such a man

ner that they can be transferred over the PROFIBUS-DP field bus.

What Is the

ET 200?

What Does the

ET 200 Consist

Of?

PROFIBUS-DP

Product Overview

1-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

1.2 What Is the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device and Smart Connect?

The

ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect is a DP slave within

the ET 200 distributed I/O system, its degree of protection being IP 20.

Owing to its compact and flat design, the ET

200L distributed I/O device and

Smart Connect is particularly suitable for applications in which space is at a

premium. The ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been

designed for the low-end to medium performance ranges.

The ET 200L and Smart Connect is available in three versions:



The ET 200L block I/O device



The ET 200L-SC modular I/O device



The ET 200L-SC IM-SC fine-step modular I/O device

The ET 200L block I/O device is not expandable.

The ET 200L consists of a terminal block for the wiring, to which an elec

tronics block is connected. The electronics block determines the number of

input/output channels.

The ET 200L block I/O device is available with 16 or 32 channels.

Electronics block

ET 200L

erminal block

TB 16L,

TB 16L

16 channels

erminal block

TB 32L

32 channels

Definition

Applications

ET 200L

Block I/O

Device

Product Overview

1-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

ET 200L-SC modular I/O device can be upgraded with the SIMA

TIC

Smart Connect.

The ET 200L-SC also consists of a terminal block to which an electronics

block is connected. The electronics block has an interface for connecting the

SIMA

TIC Smart Connect.

The Smart Connect (SC) consists of a TB 16SC terminal block and up to

8 SC electronic modules. There are one- and two-channel SC electronic mod

ules for digital and analog inputs/outputs or for count functions.

ET 200L-SC

Electronics block

ET 200L-SC

Terminal

block

TB 16SC

Terminal

block

TB 16SC

16 channels

Terminal

block

TB 16L

16 channels

Terminal

block

TB 32L

32 channels

channels

16 channels

electronic modules

ET 200L-SC

Modular

I/O Device

Product Overview

1-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

ET 200L-SC IM-SC fine-step modular I/O device can be upgraded with

the SIMA

TIC Smart Connect.

The ET 200L-SC IM-SC consists of a TB 16IM-SC terminal block to which

you can connect the IM-SC interface module and up to 8 Smart Connect

electronic modules.

The IM-SC interface module connects the ET 200L-SC IM-SC to the

PROFIBUS-DP.

ou can add the TB 16SC to the ET 200L-SC IM-SC, thus allowing you to

run an additional 8 SC electronic modules.

IM-SC interface

module for

PROFIBUS

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Terminal

block

TB 16SC

16 channels

erminal

block

TB 16 IM-SC

16 channels

erminal

block

TB 16 IM-SC

16 channels

SC electronic

modules

electronic

modules

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Fine-Step Modular

I/O Device

Product Overview

1-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

range of components are available for setting up the ET

200L,

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC. Y

ou will find the components that you

require for all versions of the ET 200L in T

able 1-1.

ou will find other components in Sections 1.2.1 to 1.2.3.

Table 1-1 General Components for the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Component Function Illustration

Rail

(EN 50022, 35



15 or

357.5)

... is the mounting rack for the

200L.

Power supply (PS)

... converts the mains voltage

(120/230

AC) into a 24

V DC operat

ing voltage for supplying the ET

200L.

... is the load current power supply for

the 24

V DC load circuits.

PROFIBUS cables with bus

connector

... interconnect the nodes of a

PROFIBUS-DP installation.

General

Components

for

the ET 200L,

ET 200L-SC,

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Product Overview

1-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

terminal block (TB) is used for mounting the electronics block (EB). It

contains the wiring so that if the electronics block is replaced, leads do not

have to be loosened.

The terminal block is characterized by the following:



It can be pre-wired before the electronics block is mounted.



Depending on the design, wiring can be connected by means of screw-

type or spring terminals.



It has a two-wire termination and can be upgraded to a three- or four

-wire

termination by using supplementary terminals.



It does not contain any active electronic components. The terminal block

cannot therefore be destroyed electrically

Y

ou can insert dif

ferent electronics blocks.



There are 16-channel (TB 16L) and 32-channel (TB 32L) terminal blocks.



The TB 16IM-SC terminal block is used in conjunction with the IM-SC

interface module, of

fers pre-wiring and can be expanded directly by

means of a TB 16SC terminal block of the Smart Connect.

The electronics block contains the logic circuitry and is inserted into the ter

minal block and screwed. It is characterized by the following:



It defines the number of input/output channels.

Y

ou do not have to loosen the terminal lead to replace the electronics

block; you merely have to remove the bus connector



The PROFIBUS-DP is connected via a bus connector to the electronics

block.

Y

ou can set PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99.



There is galvanic isolation between the PROFIBUS-DP and the internal

electronics.



LEDs are used to display: The voltage supply of the electronics block

(ON), bus faults (BF), group errors (SF; not for ET 200L), the status of

inputs and outputs



There is a labeling strip in the electronics block for clear identification of

inputs and outputs. Y

ou can order the labeling strip separately (refer to

Appendix A.1).



A circuit diagram is displayed on the electronics block. The circuit dia

gram is located beneath the labeling strip.



The electronics blocks of the ET 200L-SC can each be be upgraded with

a TB 16SC terminal block of the SIMA

TIC Smart Connect.

The internal processing time is < 1ms.

Terminal

Block

Electronics Block

Processing T

ime

Product Overview

1-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

1.2.1 What Is the ET 200L Block I/O Device?

Figure

1-2 shows you a view of the ET

200L distributed I/O device. It con

sists of a terminal block and an electronics block.

Electronics

block

erminal block

Figure 1-2 View of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

The

modules incorporated in the ET 200L include:



24 V DC digital input and/or output modules



AC digital input and/or output modules

Features of the

ET 200L

ET 200L Modules

Product Overview

1-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

whole range of components is available for installing and commissioning

the ET

200L. The most important components and their functions are listed

in T

able 1-2:

Table 1-2 Components of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

Component Function Illustration

TB 16L, TB 32L, TB 16L

terminal block

... carries the wiring and accepts the

electronics block.

Electronics block ... is mounted on the terminal block. It

defines the function (input or output).

Supplementary terminals

– 1-row

– 2-row

... are an extension for actuators and

sensors with a 3- or 4-wire termination.

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE

Labeling sheet

... allows the labeling strips to be la

beled automatically or printed using a

laser printer

ou will find the technical data for the terminal blocks in Sections 7.1 to 7.3

and the technical data for the electronics blocks in Chapter 8.

ET 200L

Components

Technical

Data

Product Overview

1-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

1.2.2 What Is the ET 200L-SC Modular I/O Device?

The

modules of the ET 200L-SC can be upgraded with a Smart Connect. The

modules of the ET 200L-SC include:



24 V DC digital input modules



24 V DC digital output modules



V DC digital input and output modules

The digital and analog electronic modules of the Smart Connect SC add to

the digital inputs and outputs of the ET

200L-SC.

The Smart Connect SC has the following modules:



24 V 0.5A/2A DC digital input/output modules



120/230

V AC digital input/output modules



230

V AC relay module



Analog input modules (U, I, TC, R

TD)



Analog output modules (U, I)

The Smart Connect

SC consists of a terminal block and various electronic

modules that you can connect to it.

The Smart Connect

SC allows you to fine tune the inputs and outputs to your

process.

ou can connect both analog and digital electronic modules to the terminal

block at the same time.

ou connect the ET 200L to the Smart Connect SC by means of the prefabri

cated connecting cable. Chapter 3.10 describes how to do this.

A number of components are available to you for installing and commission

ing a Smart Connect. T

able 1-3 lists these components and their functions:

200L-SC

Modules

Smart Connect SC

Modules of the

Smart Connect SC

Features of the

Smart Connect SC

Smart Connect

Connecting Cable

Components of the

Smart Connect SC

Product Overview

1-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 1-3 Components of a ET 200L-SC

Component Function Illustration

TB 16L,

TB32L terminal block

–W

ith spring terminal

–W

ith screw-type terminal

...carries the wiring and accepts

the electronics block.

Electronics block for the SC

...is mounted on the terminal

block. It defines the function

and has an interface for connect

ing the Smart Connect.

TB16 SC terminal block

–W

ith spring terminal

–W

ith screw-type terminal

...carries the wiring and the SC

electronic modules.

Digital/analog electronic

modules

...are connected to the TB 16SC

terminal block. Electronic mod

ules define the functions (input/

output...).

Smart Connect connecting cable

(comes with the TB 16SC termi

nal block)

... connects the TB 16SC to the

SC electronic modules.

Supplementary terminal, single-

row

–

Spring terminal

–

Screw-type terminal

...is an add-on module for actua

tors and sensors with 3-conduc

tor connections.

Supplementary terminal, 2-row

–

Spring terminal

–

Screw-type terminal

...is an add-on module for actua

tors and sensors with 4-conduc

tor connections.

Product

Overview

1-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 1-3 Components of a ET 200L-SC, continued

Component IllustrationFunction

Shield

terminal

...connects the shielding of ana

log signal lines with the supple

mentary terminal.

Labeling sheet

...allows the labeling strips to be

labeled automatically or printed

using a laser printer

ou will find the technical data in the following chapters and sections:



TB 16L and TB 32L terminal blocks: Sections 7.1 and 7.2



Electronics blocks for the Smart Connect: Chapter 9



TB 16SC terminal block: Section 7.4



SC electronic modules: Chapters 10 and 12

Technical

Data

Product Overview

1-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

1.2.3 What Is the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Fine-Step Modular I/O Device?

The

ET 200L-SC IM-SC consists of the TB 16IM-SC terminal block, to

which the IM-SC interface module and up to 8 Smart Connect electronic

modules are connected.

IM-SC interface

module

TB 16IM-SC

terminal block

SC electronic modules

SC add-on

Supplementary

terminal

Figure 1-3 ET 200L-SC IM-SC

The

IM-SC interface module connects the ET 200L-SC IM-SC to the

PROFIBUS-DP.



It is tilted onto the TB 16IM-SC terminal block.



It has a connector for the PROFIBUS-DP



The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 can be set.

ou can connect up to 8 SC electronic modules to the TB 16IM-SC terminal

block directly

. The Smart Connect SC modules include:



24 V 0.5A/2A DC digital input/output modules



120/230

V AC digital input/output modules



230

V AC relay module



High-speed analog input modules (U, I)



Analog input modules (U, I, TC, R

TD)



Analog output modules (U, I)



40 kHz counter module

Features of the

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

IM-SC Interface

Module

Modules of the SC

Electronic

Modules

Product Overview

1-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

ET 200L-SC IM-SC can be expanded by means of a TB 16SC terminal

block to connect 8 additional SC electronic modules.

These modules of

fer high-speed measured-value acquisition and data transfer

They are particularly well suited to rapid data acquisition for pressure and

flow measurements.

The high-speed analog input modules can only be used in the TB 16IM-SC

terminal block or in the expanded TB 16SC terminal block.

There are a range of components available for installing and commissioning

a Smart Connect. T

able 1-4 lists the components and specifies their func

tions:

Table 1-4 Components of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Component Function Illustration

IM-SC

interface module

... connects the TB 16IM-SC

terminal block to the

PROFIBUS-DP.

IM-SC

TB 16IM-SC terminal block

–W

ith spring terminal

–W

ith screw-type terminal

...carries the wiring, the IM-SC

interface module and the SC

electronic modules.

TB 16SC terminal block (with

SC connection cable)

–W

ith spring terminal

–W

ith screw-type terminal

... is added to the TB 16IM-SC

and carries the wiring and

8 additional SC electronic mod

ules.

Digital/analog electronic mod

ules/counter module

...are connected to the

TB 16IM-SC and TB 16SC ter

minal blocks. Electronic mod

ules determine the functions (in

put/output...).

Smart Connect connecting cable

(comes with the TB 16IM-SC

terminal block)

... connects the ET 200L-SC

IM-SC to the TB 16SC for con

necting 8 additional SC electro

nic modules.

Expanding the

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

High-Speed

Analog Input

Modules

Components for

the ET 200L-SC

IM-SC

Product Overview

1-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 1-4 Components of an ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Component IllustrationFunction

Supplementary

terminal, single-

tier

–

Spring terminal

–

Screw-type terminal

...is an extension for actuators

and sensors with a 3-wire con

nection.

Supplementary terminal, two-

tier

–

Spring terminal

–

Screw-type terminal

...is an extension for actuators

and sensors with a 4-wire con

nection.

Shield terminal

...connects the shielding of ana

log signal lines with the supple

mentary terminal.

Labeling sheet

...enables automatic labeling or

printing by laser printer

ou will find the technical data for the ET

200L-SC IM-SC in the following

sections and chapters:



IM-SC interface module: Section 9.1



TB 16IM-SC terminal block: Section 7.5



TB 16SC terminal block: Section 7.4



SC electronic modules: Chapters 10 and 12

Counter module: Chapter 13

Technical

Data

Product Overview

1-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Product

Overview

2-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Installation

The ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been designed

for simple installation and wiring. To this end, the label of the ET

200L dis

tributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been made self-explanatory

In this chapter

, you will find additional information on installing and wiring

the ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect.

A number of steps are involved in the installation of the ET

200L distributed

I/O device and Smart Connect. W

e suggest you adhere to the following se

quence:

Procedure Section

Installing the

ET 200L 1. Install the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block and supplementary

terminal 2.1

2. Install and disassemble the ET 200L electronics block 2.2

3. Set the ET 200L PROFIBUS address 2.6

Installing the

ET 200L-SC and

StC t

1. Install the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block and supplementary

terminal 2.1

Smart Connect 2. Install and disassemble the ET 200L electronics block 2.2

3. Install the SC TB 16SC terminal block 2.3

4. Connect the Smart Connect electronic modules to the TB 16SC terminal

block 2.4

5. Set the ET 200L PROFIBUS address 2.6

6. Install a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the TB 16SC

terminal block 2.7

Installing the

ET 200L SC

1. Install the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC terminal block 2.3

ET 200L-SC

IM-SC and

Smart Connect

2. Connect Smart Connect electronic modules to the TB 16IM-SC terminal

block 2.4

mar

onnec

3. Install the SC TB 16SC terminal block 2.3

4. Connect Smart Connect electronic modules to the TB 16SC terminal

block 2.4

5. Set the ET 200L PROFIBUS address on the IM-SC 2.6

6. Install

a supplementary terminal and shield terminal on the

16IM-SC/

TB 16SC terminal block 2.7

Introduction

Procedure

2-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Section Topic Page

2.1 Installing the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block and

Supplementary Terminal 2-3

2.2 Installing and Disassembling the ET 200L Electronics Block 2-6

2.3 Installing the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block 2-7

2.4 Connecting the Smart Connect Electronic Modules to the

TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block 2-13

2.5 Installing the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module on the

TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block 2-17

2.6 Setting the ET 200L PROFIBUS Address 2-18

2.7 Installing a Supplementary Terminal and Shield Terminal on the

TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block 2-19

Contents of the

Chapter

Installation

2-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.1 Installing the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block and

Supplementary Terminal

this section, we describe how you install the terminal block and the sup

plementary terminal.

Install the terminal block on a rail.

Y

ou install the ET

200L distributed I/O device on a rail conforming with

EN 50022 (35



7.5 or 35

15).



The preferred mounting position is horizontal installation on a vertical

wall. All other mounting positions are conceivable.

Y

ou require a free space on a rail of 145 mm (16 channels) or 191 mm

(32 channels).



The minimum installation depth is 82 mm (with an electronics block

installed and an MLFB 6ES7 972-0CA30 0XA0 bus connector connected)

when using a 35



7,5 mm rail.

Y

ou require a free space of 35 mm above the terminal block. Y

ou require

a free space of 20 mm below the terminal block(when using the 42 mm

single-tier supplementary terminal or the 57 mm two-tier supplementary

terminal).

If you add a TB 16SC to the ET 200L, you need a free space of 40 mm

instead of 35 mm above the terminal block.

Introduction

Requirements

Installation

2-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Install

the terminal block in the following order:

Mount the terminal block on the rail.

2. T

ilt the terminal block backwards until you hear both the safety bolts en

gage.

ou can now wire the terminal block (refer to Chapter 3) before you install

the electronics block. If you are using supplementary terminals, you must

install them before you commence wiring.

Figure 2-1 Installing the Terminal Block

Push

the supplementary terminals into the existing guideways on the lower

side of the terminal block until you hear the safety bolt engage.

o disassemble supplementary terminals, proceed as follows:

Pull the safety bolt downwards as far as the stop.

Pull out the supplementary terminals forwards from the guideways.

Installing the

erminal Block

Installing and

Disassembling

Supplementary

Terminals

Installation

2-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Remove

the terminal block in the following order (refer also to Figure 2-2):

1. T

urn of

f the power supply

Remove the electronics block.

–

Remove the bus connector

–

Loosen the fixing screw

–T

ilt the electronics block forwards.

Loosen the wiring.

If you are using supplementary terminals, you must remove them before

disassembling the terminal block (see above).

Press the two safety bolts downwards in succession with a screwdriver

6. T

ilt and remove the terminal block from the rail.

Figure 2-2 Disassembling the Terminal Block

Disassembling the

erminal Block

Installation

2-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.2 Installing and Disassembling the ET 200L Electronics

Block

Attach

the electronics block to the terminal block in the following order:

Insert the electronics block from above into the guideways on the termi

nal block.

2. T

ilt the electronics block backwards as far as the stop.

Secure the electronics block on the terminal block by tightening the

screw:

Figure 2-3 Installing the Electronics Block

disassemble the electronics block, proceed in the reverse order

1. T

urn of

f the power supply

Remove the bus connector

Loosen the fixing screw

4. T

ilt the electronics block forwards.

Installing the

Electronics Block

Disassembling the

Electronics Block

Installation

2-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.3 Installing the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block

The

terminal blocks are intended for installation in a cabinet or in an en

closed casing or operating room.

The TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC terminal blocks can be installed horizontally

Provided temperatures do not exceed 40

C, other installation locations are

also possible.

When working out the space requirements of a terminal block, you must

maintain adequate clearances to other components.

These minimum clearances are necessary at installation and during operation

for the following reasons:

For installing and removing the terminal block and the electronic modules

o guarantee the air flow required for cooling during operation

TB 16IM-SC terminal block: Y

ou require a free space of 40 mm above

the terminal block and 50 mm under the terminal block (when using the

50 mm single-tier supplementary terminal or the 57 mm two-tier supple

mentary terminal).

TB 16SC terminal block: You require a free space of 40 mm above the

terminal block and 20 mm under the terminal block (when using the

42 mm single-tier supplementary terminal or the 57 mm two tier supple

mentary terminal).

If you carry out installation work with AC modules with a 230 V load supply

that involves disconnecting the protective conductor from the TB 16SC or

TB16 IM-SC, you must first switch of

f the 230 V load supply

Installation

Dimensions and

Clearances

Installation Work

Installation

2-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Proceed

as follows:

Mount the terminal block in such a way that suf

ficient clearance remains

for ventilating the terminal block and installing and ventilating the elec

tronic modules.

Screw the rail (35 mm wide) to the cabinet frame or the mounting block

(screw size: M5).

Position the terminal block on the 35 mm rail from above, and swing it

down. The terminal block snaps onto the rail (see Figure 2-4).

Figure 2-4 Snapping the Terminal Block onto the Rail

Installing the

erminal Block

Installation

2-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Proceed

as follows:

Note the assignment between the slot and the module on the labeling

strip.

Slide the labeling strip from the side into the terminal block guide.

Figure 2-5 Sliding the Labeling Strip into the Terminal Block

Sliding the

Labeling Strips

into the Terminal

Block

Installation

2-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

must now position the coding slide switches correctly in accordance with

the configuration of your system so that you can install the electronic mod

ules. Each slot has a coding slide switch. The terminal blocks are supplied

with coding slide switches at position 0.

Electronic Module Position of the 1st

Coding

Slide Switch

DC Modules

Digital electronic module 2DIDC24V (single width) DC position (up)

Digital electronic module 2DODC24V0.5A (single width) DC position (up)

Digital electronic module DODC24V2A (single width) DC position (up)

Counter module 1COUNT40kHz (single width) DC position (up)

AC Modules

Digital electronic module 1DIAC120/230V (single width) AC position (down)

Digital electronic module 1DOAC120/230V1A (single width) AC position (down)

Digital electronic module 1DORel.AC230V (single width) AC position (down)

Analog Electronic Modules

Analog electronic module 2 AI U, 2 AI HS U (single width) DC position (up)

Analog electronic module 2 AI I, 2 AI HS I (single width) DC position (up)

Analog electronic module 2 AI TC (single width) DC position (up)

Analog electronic module 1 AI RTD (single width) DC position (up)

Analog electronic module 1 AO U (double width) DC position (up)

Analog electronic module 1 AO I (double width) DC position (up)

!Warning

There

is a risk of injury and damage to property

Do not attempt to force the coding slide switch.

Forcing the coding slide switch is dangerous and can destroy electronic mod

ules.

Positioning the

Coding Slide

Switches

Installation

2-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Coding slide switches

Figure 2-6 Positioning the Coding Slide Switches

1. Select

a screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm.

Insert the screwdriver into the slot on the coding slide switch (see Fig

ure 2-7).

Apply slight pressure to push the coding slide switch into the required

position.

Figure 2-7 Using the Screwdriver

Installation

2-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Note

your system designations on the enclosed labeling strip for the elec

tronic module.

Labeling

strips for

terminal block and

supplementary termi

nal can be truncated

here

Labeling strips

for

electronic

modules

Separating

edges

Figure 2-8 Designation Plate with Labeling Strips (Reduced in Size)

Noting

the System

Designation

Installation

2-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.4 Connecting Smart Connect Electronic Modules to the

TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC Terminal Block

The

following connection rules apply to the SC electronic modules:

Y

ou can connect up to 10 counter modules in an ET

200L-SC IM-SC

(with TB 16SC).



The slot immediately to the

right

of an AC module/relay module must

either have an AC module/relay module or be free (see the following ex

ample).



Under certain circumstances the number of plug-in SC electronic modules

is limited (see the next page).

Note

If you use the TB 16IM-SC and TB 16SC together, you have a maximum of

16 slots available. This gives you up to 32 digital/analog channels, which

can include a maximum of 12 analog channels.

8 slots (A...H) are available to you on each terminal block.

You Want to Connect the

Following Electronic Modules

to a Terminal Block

A B C D E F G H

Only DC modules DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC

Only analog electronic modules Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog

Only AC modules AC AC AC AC AC AC Relay

DC modules and AC modules AC DC DC AC AC Relay

Analog electronic modules and

AC modules Analog Analog AC AC AC AC AC

Analog electronic modules, DC

modules and AC modules Analog Analog Analog DC DC Analog AC AC

Analog electronic modules and

DC modules Analog DC Analog DC DC Analog DC Analog

The

circuit schematic is shown on the front of every electronic module. Up to

two LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating mode, the

circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible

through the transparent part of the labeling strip.

Connection

Rules

for the Electronic

Modules

Examples

Circuit Schematic

Installation

2-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

number of plug-in analog SC electronic modules is limited in the follow

ing cases:

–

When there is no S7 DP master

–

When they are used in an ET 200L-SC IM-SC with a TB 16SC con

nected

The PROFIBUS-DP standard EN 50 170, V

olume 2, restricts the length of the

parameterization data to a maximum of 244 bytes. This means that when ana

log SC electronic modules are used, the number of plug-in SC electronic

modules may be limited. Y

ou will find a formula below for calculating the

maximum number of SC electronic modules permitted in an

200L-SC IM-SC:

244

10 + [(14 + D

7)]1

+ [(21 + A

9 + K

5 + C

18)]2

Key:

D = total number of digital SC electronic modules plugged in

A = total number of analog SC electronic modules plugged in

K = total number of analog channels plugged in

C = total number of SC counter modules plugged in

[...]1

only necessary if digital SC electronic modules are plugged in

[...]2

only necessary if analog SC electronic modules are plugged in

ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 15

2AE; 1

2DE: ––> D = 1; A = 15; K = 30

10 + (14 + 1

7) + (21 + 15

9 + 30

5) = 10 + 21 + 306 = 337

The result is greater than 244 so this configuration is not possible.

ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 8

2AE; 4

2DE: ––> D = 4; A = 8; K = 16

10 + (14 + 4

7) + (21 + 8

9 + 16

5) = 10 + 42 + 173 = 225

The result is less than 244 so this configuration is not possible.

ET 200L-SC IM-SC: 6

2AE; 3

1COUNT40kHz; 4

2DE:

––> D = 4; A = 6; K = 12; C = 3

10 + (14 + 4

7) + (21 + 6

9 + 12

5 + 3

18) = 10 + 42 + 189 = 241

The result is less than 244 so this configuration is not possible.

Number of Plug-in

Analog SC

Electronic

Modules

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Installation

2-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Slide

the labeling strip down from the top into the electronic module to be

plugged in.

Note

ou will only achieve full operating safety of the electronic modules if you

have inserted the labeling strips on the front of the electronic modules (elec

trostatic dischar

ge on the front of the module, covering the LEDs).

Figure 2-9 Connecting the Electronic Modules to the Terminal Block

!Warning

There

is a risk of injury and damage to property

If you install a combination of AC and DC modules on a terminal block, you

must comply with the rules for doing this. If you do not, injury and damage

can be caused.

Always position the electronic modules in accordance with the connection

rules.

Labeling

Strips of

the Electronic

Modules

Installation

2-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

!Warning

There

is a risk of injury and damage to property

When using AC modules, you must use a supplementary terminal

(screw-

type terminal)

, to which you must connect the protective conductor

When using AC modules, you must use

screw-type

supplementary termi

nals.

Installation

2-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.5 Installing the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module on the

TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block

Before

you install the IM-SC interface module on the TB 16IM-SC terminal

block, note the following:



The screw for fixing the IM-SC interface module is shipped screwed into

the terminal block.

Use a screwdriver to remove the screw



When the IM-SC interface module is installed, a cable lug providing a

connection to chassis ground is fixed at the same time.

Secure the ground cable in the cable lug, and establish a connection to

chassis ground. See Section 3.7.

Secure the IM-SC interface module by proceeding in the following sequence:

Hook the interface module from above into the guides on the terminal

block.

2. T

ilt the interface backward until the stop.

Put the cable lug for chassis ground (with the ground cable) on the screw

and secure the IM-SC interface module on the TB 16IM-SC terminal

block by tightening the screw

IM-SC interface module

Cable lug

TB 16IM-SC

terminal block

Figure 2-10 Installing the IM-SC Interface Module

Requirements

Installing the

IM-SC Interface

Module

Installation

2-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.6 Setting the ET 200L PROFIBUS Address

The

PROFIBUS address defines the address of the ET

200L distributed I/O

device on the PROFIBUS-DP

The two rotary switches for the PROFIBUS address are located on the elec

tronics block beneath the bus connector

Tip:

ou must set the PROFIBUS address before clipping on the bus connec

tor

. When clipped on, the bus connector conceals the two rotary switches.

Rotary switches

for the PROFI

BUS address

Example PROFIBUS ad-

dress 63:

Position 6

Position 3

x10

The two rotary switches are on the right-hand side of the IM-SC interface

module.

Tip:

Set the PROFIBUS address before you wire the TB 16IM-SC terminal

block or before you mount the IM-SC interface module. The rotary switches

are more accessible then.

Rotary switches for the PROFIBUS address

Position 3

x1 x10

Position 6

Example PROFIBUS ad-

dress 63:

ou modify the PROFIBUS address at the two rotary switches by using a

small screwdriver

. PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 are authorized for the

200L distributed I/O device.

PROFIBUS address 0, which is set when the ET

200 distributed I/O system

leaves the works, is reserved for a PU or PC. Any change made to the

PROFIBUS address takes ef

fect when the supply voltage is turned on.

Introduction

Location

of Rotary

Switches

Rotary Switches of

the ET 200L-SC

IM-SC

Modifying the

PROFIBUS

Address

Installation

2-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

2.7 Installing a supplementary terminal and shield terminal

on the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC terminal block

you want to connect a single-tier or two-tier supplementary terminal, pro

ceed as follows:

Hold the supplementary terminal parallel to the terminal block. Use the

right edge as a guide.

Insert the mountings (dovetails) into the grooves on the underside of the

terminal block.

Press the upper side of the supplementary terminal against the underside

of the terminal block, and slide the supplementary terminal to the back.

The supplementary terminal engages.

Figure 2-11 Securing a Supplementary Terminal to the Terminal Block

Securing the

Supplementary

erminal to the

erminal Block

Installation

2-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

analog processing, you insert the cables of the signal lines in the shield

terminal. T

o do this, proceed as follows:

Clip the TB 16IM-SC/TB 16SC terminal block onto the rail.

Connect a 1- or 2-tier supplementary terminal to the TB 16IM-SC/

TB 16SC terminal block.

Connect the metallic shield terminal to the 1- or 2-tier supplementary ter

minal.

Figure 2-12 Connecting a Shield Terminal to the Supplementary Terminal

Shielding

for

Analog Processing

Installation

2-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

4. Secure

the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal by tightening the

screw of the slot with a screwdriver

If you are using a TB 16IM-SC/TB 16 SC (screw-type terminal):

Secure the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal by tightening the

screw of the slot with a screwdriver

If you are using a TB 16IM-SC/TB 16 SC (spring terminal):

Secure the shield terminal in the supplementary terminal by inserting a

screwdriver in the lower opening and the shield terminal in the upper

opening until the stop.

Strip the insulation to bare the conductors.

Secure the bared wire ends in the terminal block, and pull them through

the shield terminal.

Installation

2-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Installation

3-1

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Wiring

The ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect has been designed

for simple wiring. T

o this end, the label of the ET

200L distributed I/O de

vice and Smart Connect has been made self-explanatory

In this chapter

, you will find additional information on wiring the ET

200L

distributed I/O device and Smart Connect.

The wiring of the ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect in

volves several steps. W

e suggest you adhere to the following sequence:

Procedure Section

Important infor-

mation on wiring

1. General rules and regulations 3.1

mation on wiring 2. Configuring the electrical installation 3.2

3. Wiring rules 3.3

Wiring the

ET 200L 1. Wire the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block 3.4

Installing the

ET 200L SC and

1. Wire the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L terminal block 3.4

ET 200L-SC and

Smart Connect 2. Wire the Smart Connect TB 16SC terminal block 3.5

mar

onnec

3. Install a supplementary terminal for the TB 16SC 3.8

4. Connect shielded cables to the shield terminal of the supplementary ter-

minals 3.9

5. Connect the Smart Connect SC to the ET 200L-SC 3.10

Wiring the

ET 200L SC

1. Wire the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC terminal block 3.4

ET 200L-SC

IM-SC and 2. Wire the ET 200L IM-SC interface module 3.7

Smart Connect 3. Wire the Smart Connect TB 16SC terminal block 3.5

Smart Connect

4. Install the supplementary terminal for the TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC 3.8

5. Connected shielded cables to the shield terminal of the supplementary

terminals 3.9

6. Connect the Smart Connect SC to the TB 16IM-SC 3.10

Introduction

Procedure

3-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Section Topic Page

3.1 General Rules and Regulations 3-3

3.2 Configuring the Electrical Installation 3-5

3.3 Wiring Rules 3-9

3.4 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block 3-11

3.5 Wiring the Smart Connect TB 16SC Terminal Block 3-14

3.6 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block 3-16

3.7 Wiring the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module 3-18

3.8 Installing a Supplementary Terminal for the

TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC 3-22

3.9 Connecting Shielded Cables to the Shield Terminal of the Sup-

plementary Terminals 3-23

3.10 Connecting the Smart Connect SC to the

ET 200L-SC/TB 16IM-SC 3-24

Contents of the

Chapter

Wiring

3-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.1 General Rules and Regulations

a component part of a plant or system, the ET

200L distributed I/O device

necessitates observance of special rules and regulations, depending on where

it is to be used.

This section provides an overview of the most important rules which you

have to observe for integrating the ET

200L distributed I/O device in a plant

or system.

Observe the safety and accident prevention regulations – for example, the

machine protection guidelines – for specific applications.

EMERGENCY ST

OP devices conforming with IEC 204 (corresponds to

DIN

VDE 1

13) must remain ef

fective in all the operating modes of the plant

or system.

The following table shows the points you have to take into account upon

start-up of a plant following certain events.

If ...

Then ...

Start-up follows a voltage drop or failure

Start-up of the ET

200L follows an inter

ruption of bus communications

No hazardous operating states

may occur

. Force an EMER

GENCY ST

, if necessary

Start-up follows unlocking of the EMER

GENCY ST

OP device

ET 200L start-up occurs without the DP

master addressing the ET

200L

There must not be an uncon

trolled or undefined start-up.

The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in

respect of the supply voltage.

ith ...

It Is Essential That ...

A permanently installed plant

or system not having an all-

pole supply isolating switch

A supply isolating switch or a fuse be pres

ent in the building installation

Load current power supplies,

power supply modules

The set rated voltage range corresponds to

the local supply voltage

All circuits of the ET

200L

distributed I/O device

The fluctuation or deviation of the supply

voltage from the rated value be within the

permitted tolerance (refer to Section 6.6)

Introduction

Specific

plication

EMERGENCY

OP Devices

Plant Start-up

After Certain

Events

Supply V

oltage

Wiring

3-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the points that you have to take into account in

respect of the 24 VDC supply

ith ... Pay Attention to...

Buildings

Outdoor lightning

protection T

ake lightning protec

tion precautions – for

l lihti

VDC supply lines,

signal lines

Indoor lightning protec

tion

example, lightning

conductors

24 VDC supply

Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage

The following table shows you the items you have to take into account in

respect of protection against electrical phenomena or faults.

ith ...

Pay Attention to:

Any plant or system in

which the ET

200L is

installed

Is the plant or system connected to a protec

tive conductor for diverting electromagnetic

interference?

Connecting leads, signal and

bus lines

Are the wiring arrangement and installation

correct?

Signal and bus lines

Any break of a line or conductor must not

result in undefined states of the plant or sys

tem.

VDC Supply

Protection Against

External Electrical

Phenomena

Wiring

3-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.2 Configuring the Electrical Installation

this section, you will find information on the overall installation of an

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect on a grounded supply

(TN-S system). The specific topics discussed are:

Circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection in accor

dance with DIN

VDE 0100 and DIN

VDE 01

Load current power supplies and load circuits.

ith grounded supplies, the neutral conductor of the system is grounded. A

mere ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section

of the plant causes the protective devices to trip.

Dif

ferent components and protective measures are specified for erecting a

complete plant. The types of component and the degree to which the protec

tive measures are binding depend on the DIN

VDE regulation that applies to

the installation of your plant. The following table refers to Figure 3-1.

Table 3-1 DIN VDE Regulations for Installation of a Controller

Compare ... Ref. to

Fig. 3-1 DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113

Circuit-breaking device for

PLC, sensors and signal con-

trol elements

... Part 460:

Main switch ... Part 1:

Disconnector

Short-circuit and overload-

protection:

Grouped for sensors and sig-

nal control elements

... Part 725:

Single-pole protec-

tion of circuits

... Part 1:

SWith grounded

secondary cir-

cuit: single-

pole protection

SIn all other

cases: all-pole

protection

Load current power supply

for AC load circuits with

more than five electromag-

netic apparatus

Galvanic isolation

by means of a

transformer is rec-

ommended

Galvanic isolation

by means of a

transformer is es-

sential

Note

The

ET 200L and Smart Connect cannot be operated with an ungrounded

supply.

Introduction

Definition:

Grounded

Supply

Components and

Protective Mea

sures

Wiring

3-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

r The

load current power supply feeds input and output circuits (load circuits)

as well as sensors and actuators. The following table lists the characteristics

of load current power supplies that are required in specific applications.

Characteristic of

Load Current

Power Supply

Required for ... Remarks

Safe

(electrical) isola

tion Modules that have to be

supplied with voltages

v 60 VDC or v 25 VAC

Power supply PS 307 and Sie-

mens Series 6EP1 load current

power

supplies

have this charac

teristic

24 VDC load circuits

Output voltage toler-

ances:

20.4 V to 28.8 V 24 VDC load circuits

If the output tolerances are ex-

ceeded,

we recommend that

you

install a back-up capacitor. Rat-

ing: 200 

F per 1

A load current

(with full-wave rectification).

Load

circuits should be grounded.

Fault-free operating reliability is ensured by the common reference potential

(ground). Install a detachable connection to the protective conductor on the

external power supply (terminal L or M) or on the isolation transformer (Fig

ure 3-1,



). This measure makes it simpler for you to locate ground faults in

the power distribution system.

ou will find notes on EMC

compatible installation and wiring in the manual

for the DP master you are using or for the host system.

ake into account the following notes on EMC-compatible installation of the

200L distributed I/O device:

e recommend that you place the cable shield of the PROFIBUS-DP on

both sides of a shield bus.

The chassis ground and the ground terminal are interconnected in the

200L distributed I/O device. Connect the ground terminal of the

200L distributed I/O device using a copper cable of at least 2.5 mm

to the central grounding point in the installation cabinet.

In the case of the ET 200L-SC, connect the ground terminals of the

200L-SC and Smart Connect SC using a short copper cable of at least

2.5 mm

Characteristics of

Load Current

Power Supplies

Rule: Ground Load

Circuits

EMC

Wiring

3-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 3-1

shows the location of the ET

200L in the overall system (load cur

rent voltage supply and grounding philosophy) for supply from a TN-S sys

tem.

Remark: The arrangement of the power supply connections shown in the fig

ure does not correspond to the actual arrangement but was chosen for the

sake of clarity

Ground bus in cabinet

L1 L +

200L

200L-SC

200L-SC IM-SC

Electronics



Load circuit

24 to 230 V

AC for AC modules

5 to 60 VDC load circuit for non-iso

lated DC modules

5 to 60 VDC load circuit for floating DC

modules

Cabinet



Low-voltage distribution system

for example, TN-S system



400 V)





Rail

Figure 3-1 Operating the ET 200L from a Grounded Supply

ET 200L

in Overall

Installation

Wiring

3-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Only

safely isolated low voltage (DC 24

V) can be used as the power supply

Safe isolation from the mains supply can be achieved in accordance with the

requirements in VDE 0100 Part 410 / HD 384-4-41 / IEC 364-4-41 (as func

tional low voltage with safe isolation) or VDE 0805 / EN 60950 / IEC 950

(as safety extralow voltage with safe isolation SEL

V) or VDE 0106 Part 101.

Ground bus in cabinet

PS T

erminal block

Cabinet

Low-voltage distribution, e.g.

TN-S system

Electronic

modules

Rail

L +

Supplementary

terminal

Figure 3-2 Power Supply of the Terminal Block

The

1DIAC120/230V and 1DOAC120/230V1A electronic modules do not

require any auxiliary voltage (L+, M).

A supplementary terminal for connecting the protective conductor is required

when these electronic modules are used.

Smart Connect in

Overall Installation

Special Feature

Wiring

3-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.3 Wiring

Rules

The

table below shows you what you must observe when wiring the terminal

block and the supplementary terminal.

Table 3-2 Pinout of the PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection

Rules for ... Terminal block

Spring Terminal Screw-Type Terminal

Suitable cable cross-sections:

Solid cables 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (for PI connection: 2.5 mm2)

Flexible cables

Without wire end ferrule

With wire end ferrule

0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (for PI connection: 2.5 mm2)

0.14 to 1.5 mm2

Number of cables per connection 1 or combination of 2 cables to a total of 1.5 mm2 in one wire end fer-

rule

Max. diameter of cable insulation ∅3.1 mm

∅3.8 mm for 2.5 mm2

Insulation stripping length of the cables

Without insulation collars

With insulation collars

7 to 11 mm

Wire end ferrule in accordance

with DIN 46228

Without insulation collars

With insulation collars

– 0.25 to 1.0 mm 2

– 1.5 mm2

Shape A; up to 12 mm long

Shape E; up to 12 mm long

Shape E; 12 mm long

Shape A; up to 12 mm long

Shape E; up to 12 mm long*

Shape E; 18 mm long*

Blade width of the screwdriver 3.5 mm (cylindrical design)

Tightening torque for connecting cables

(not applicable to spring terminals) –0.4 to 0.7 Nm

Ground connection up to 6 mm2 in cable lug for M4 screw

wire the terminal block (screw-type terminal), proceed as follows:

Strip the insulation of the wires down to 1

1 mm.

Connect the conductors. Begin on the left under the terminal block.

Screw the ends of the cables onto the terminal block with a tightening

torque of 0.5 Nm. T

ighten the screws on the unwired terminals as well.

Rules

for W

iring

erminal Block

with Screw-T

ype

Terminal

Wiring

3-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

wire the terminal block (spring terminal), proceed as follows:

Strip the insulation of the wires down to 1

1 mm.

Remember to:



Insert the screwdriver in the lower opening.



Insert the cable in the upper opening until the stop.

1. Insert the screwdriver

Insert the cable into the spring

terminal until the stop

3. Remove the screwdriver

. The

cable is clamped to the contact

Figure 3-3 How the Spring Terminal Works

4. Release

the spring terminal of the first connection using a screwdriver

(0.5 x 3.5 mm DIN 5264). Begin at the bottom left of the terminal block.

Push the first wire into the released spring terminal and withdraw the

screwdriver.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all other wires.

!Warning

There is a risk of injury and damage to property

Connecting dif

ferent phases of a three-phase system to a terminal block can

cause injury and damage to property

Connect only one phase to each terminal block.

Terminal

Block

with Spring

Terminal

Wiring

3-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.4 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16L/TB 32L Terminal Block

When

wiring the ET

200L distributed I/O device, we distinguish between the

terminal block with its supplementary terminal and the electronics block.



The terminal block and, if required, the supplementary terminal carry the

wiring.



The electronics block incorporates the PROFIBUS-DP connection.

All terminal connections on the terminal block and supplementary terminals

are located on the front and are clearly marked and readily visible from the

front. Assignment of terminal connections to input/output channels is simple

to perform, without danger of confusion.

Connect the terminal block and the supplementary terminal in accordance

with the configuration. Figure 3-4 shows the terminal connections for termi

nal block TB 16L. Its pinout is described in Chapter 7.

Connection

for

Channel

group A

Channel

group B

Electronics

Power supply

1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+

1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

123 45678910111213141516

193-1CH00-0XA0

X43 2

TB16L

Sensor supply (DI) or

chassis ground (DO)

Signal connections for

sensors or actuators

Figure 3-4 Terminal Connections on Terminal Block TB 16L

Introduction

Wiring the

erminal Block

Wiring

3-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

There

are three dif

ferent ways to connect the voltage supply to the terminal

block.

L+

1st alternative

Shared voltage supply for

electronics and groups of

channels

L+

2nd alternative

Shared voltage supply for

groups of channels

Separate voltage supply for

electronics

L+

3rd alternative

Separate voltage supply for

each group of channels

Separate voltage supply for

electronics

L+L+

1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+

1M 2M 3M 4M 5M

1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+

1M 2M 3M 4M 5M

1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+

1M 2M 3M 4M 5M

M MM

Figure 3-5 Alternative Ways of Connecting the Voltage Supply

The

block diagrams relating to the ET

200L distributed I/O device will be

found in Chapter 7.

A labeling strip is located on the front of the electronics block for noting the

assignment of inputs and outputs.

A terminal connection model showing the terminal connection assignment

and electrical connections is located beneath the labeling strip on the elec

tronics block (refer to Chapter 8).

Clip the bus connector on the electronics block.

Clip the bus connector on the PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection after

setting the PROFIBUS address of the ET

200L distributed I/O device (re

fer to Section 2.6).

2. T

ighten the fastening screws of the bus connector

Connecting the

Voltage Supply

Block Diagram

Label

Terminal

Connection Model

Clipping on the

Bus Connector

Wiring

3-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

table below describes the pinout of the 9-pin PROFIBUS-DP terminal

connection.

Table 3-3 Pinout of the PROFIBUS-DP Terminal Connection

View Pin No. Signal Name Description

1 – –

2 – –

63 RxD/TxD-P Data line B

4RTS Request To Send

5 M5V21Data reference potential (from station)

6 P5V21Supply Plus (from station)

7 – –

8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

9 – –

1For connecting an ET 200 handheld or an optical-fiber module

PROFIBUS-DP

Terminal

Connection

Wiring

3-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.5 Wiring the Smart Connect TB 16SC Terminal Block

The

TB 16SC terminal block and – if required – the supplementary terminal

carry the wiring.

The figure below shows the connections of the TB

16SC terminal block:

Figure 3-6 Front View of the Terminal Block

!Warning

When

installing the following electronic modules



2DODC24V0.5A (6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0)



2DODC24V2A (6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0)

check that the polarity of 1L+ and 1M and 2L+ and 2M on the TB 16SC

terminal block is correct before you switch on the load voltage.

If the polarity is incorrect, any actuators connected may be activated.

The terminal block has one local ground point.

1. Y

ou must provide a low resistance connection between the local ground

point and the rail. For this purpose, use at least a 4mm

conductor with a

maximum length of 0.5 m (cable lug rated size 4-6 in accordance with

DIN 46237).

Provide a low-resistance connection between the rail and foundation

ground. Ungrounded installation is not possible.

Introduction

Wiring the

TB 16SC

Connecting to

Local Ground

Wiring

3-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table contains an example of the assignment of terminals to

slots.

Slot Terminals

1L+; 2L+

1M; 2M

Slot A (on the extreme left) A1;A2;A3;A4

Slot B B1;B2;B3;B4

Slot C C1;C2;C3:C4

Slot D D1;D2;D3;D4

Slot E E1;E2;E3;E4

Slot F F1;F2;F3;F4

Slot G G1;G2;G3;G4

Slot H H1;H2;H3;H4

Not

all electronic modules use all the terminals assigned to the slot.

Unused terminals must not be wired in order to maintain the clearance and

creepage distances.

!Warning

There is a risk of injury and damage to property

Connecting cables to unassigned terminals can cause injury and damage to

property.

Do not connect cables to unassigned terminals.

16SC T

erminal

Designation

Terminal

Assignments

Wiring

3-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.6 Wiring the ET 200L TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block

The

TB 16IM-SC terminal block and – if required – the supplementary termi

nal carry the wiring. The TB 16IM-SC terminal block also has an interface to

the Smart Connect.

The figure below shows the connection of the TB

16IM-SC terminal block:

Connector for the Smart Connect

Slots for SC electronic modules

1L+

2L+ 2M

3L+ 3M

A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2 G1 G2 H1 H2

A3 A4 B3 B4 C3 C4 D3 D4 E3 E4 F3 F4 G3 G4 H3 H4

Figure 3-7 Connections of the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block

!Warning

There

is a risk of injury and damage to property

Connecting cables to unassigned terminals can cause injury and damage to

property.

Do not connect cables to unassigned terminals.

Introduction

Wiring the

TB16 IM-SC

Wiring

3-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

There

are two dif

ferent ways to connect the voltage supply to the terminal

block.

1st

alternative

1L+

2L+

3L+ 3M

L+

Shared

power supply for the IM-SC

and TB 16IM-SC (slots A to H)

5L+

4L+

IM-SC

TB 16IM-SC

2nd

alternative

1L+

2L+

3L+ 3M

L+

Shared

power supply for the TB 16IM-

SC (slots A to H).

Separate power supply for the IM-SC

5L+

4L+

IM-SC

TB 16IM-SC

L+

3rd

alternative

1L+

2L+

3L+ 3M

L+

Separate

power supply for the TB

16IM-SC (slots A to D and E to H)

Separate power supply for the

IM-SC

5L+

4L+

IM-SC

TB 16IM-SC

L+

L+ M

The

bridges between 4L+ and 5L+ and between 4M and 5M are in the screw-type terminal for the power supply (see

able 3-5).

Figure 3-8 Connection Alternatives for the Power Supply

Unused

terminals must not be wired in order to maintain the clearances and

creepage distances.

Terminals Description Load Group

1L+, 1M Power supply slot A to D –

2L+, 2M; 3L+, 3M Power supply slot E to H –

A1;A2;A3;A4 Slot A (extreme left) A

B1;B2;B3;B4 Slot B A

C1;C2;C3:C4 Slot C A

D1;D2;D3;D4 Slot D A

E1;E2;E3;E4 Slot E B

F1;F2;F3;F4 Slot F B

G1;G2;G3;G4 Slot G B

H1;H2;H3;H4 Slot H B

Connecting the

Power Supply

TB 16IM-SC

Terminal

Designation

Wiring

3-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.7 Wiring the ET 200L IM-SC Interface Module

The

IM-SC connects the TB 16IM-SC terminal block to the PROFIBUS-DP

The figure below shows all the connections of the IM-SC interface module:

Bus terminating

switch

Connection for

power

supply

Connection for

PROFIBUS-DP

Connection for

chassis ground

Figure 3-9 Connections of the IM-SC Interface Module

The

chassis ground connection of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC is on the IM-SC

interface module.

1. Y

ou must connect the connection point to the rail with low resistance. T

do this, use at least a 4mm

cable with a maximum length of 0.5 m and a

cable lug with a nominal size of 4-6 (in accordance with DIN 46237).

Place the cable lug on the screw by means of which you attach the inter

face module to the terminal block.

Connect the rail with low resitance to the foundation ground.

Ungrounded installation is not possible.

Attach a strain relief grip approximately 20 – 30 cm from the IM-SC for the

connecting cables for the power supply and PROFIBUS-DP

Introduction

Wiring

the IM-SC

IM-SC Connection

to Chassis Ground

Strain Relief Grip

Wiring

3-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

plug-in, 6-pin screw-type terminal with a shield support connects the

200L-SC IM-SC to the PROFIBUS-DP

. Y

ou can connect the bus lines and

the shield to the screw-type terminal.

The 6-pin screw-type terminal is shipped with the IM-SC interface module.

Table 3-4 Assignment of the PROFIBUS-DP Connection at the IM-SC Interface Module

View Signal Name Designation

Ground Bus line shield

A1 Data line A (IN)

B1 Data line B (IN)

A2 Data line A (OUT)

Cover B2 Data line B (OUT)

Holder Ground Bus line shield

IM-SC

PROFIBUS-

DP Connection

Wiring

3-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

bus lines (see Appendix A) are connected to the plug-in, multipole

screw-type terminal.

Note

When you remove the PROFIBUS-DP screw-type terminal, the subsequent

DP slaves are disconnected from the PROFIBUS-DP

Strip the insulation from the bus line as shown in the figure below

7 mm

6.5 mm

Figure 3-10 Length of Insulation Stripped

2. Connect

the bus line to the screw-type terminal, and screw the cover on

the holder

Cover Holder

Shield

Bus line

OUT

Shield support

IM-SC

Figure 3-11 Wiring the PROFIBUS-DP Screw-Type Terminal

3. Insert

the screw-type terminal in the appropriate socket on the IM-SC

interface module.

Wiring the

PROFIBUS-DP

Connection

Wiring

3-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

connect the power supply for the electronics to the plug-in, 4-pole

screw-type terminal. The 4L+, 5L+ and 4M, 5M terminals are linked inter

nally

. This enables the power supply to be looped through via the 5L+ and

5M terminals. Insert the screw-type terminal in the appropriate socket on the

IM-SC interface module.

Table 3-5 Assignment of the Power Supply

View Signal Name Designation

4L+ DC 24V

5L+ DC 24V (for looping through)

4M Ground

5M Ground (for looping through)

You

connect the 24V DC power supply to the plug- in, 4-pole screw-type

terminal.

Connect the bus line to the screw-type terminal, and press the cover on

the screw-type terminal.

IM-SC

Cover

Figure 3-12 Connecting the Power Supply

2. Insert

the screw-type terminal in the appropriate socket on the IM-SC

interface module.

The bus terminating switch allows you to switch bus terminating resistors on

or of

f. The bus terminating switch is located in a recess on the front of the

IM-SC interface module.

OFF

The bus terminating resistors are activated. The

PROFIBUS-DP terminates at the IM-SC. A data line con

nected to A

OUT

and B

OUT

is separated.

The bus terminating resistors are deactivated. Y

ou can

loop the PROFIBUS-DP through to the IM-SC.

Figure 3-13 Functioning of the Bus Terminating Switch

Power

Supply

Connecting the

Power Supply

IM-SC Bus

Terminating

Resistors

Wiring

3-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.8 Using the Supplementary Terminal for the

TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC

The

terminals are electrically connected to each other internally

. Y

ou can use

the single-tier supplementary terminal for dif

ferent purposes. Y

ou must adapt

the labeling of the supplementary terminal according to the application.

1. Y

ou must use the

screw-type

single-tier supplementary terminal:

Connection of protective conductors when using AC modules or the relay

module for switching circuits that are not safely isolated. The printed la

bel must remain visible.

2. Y

ou can use the single-tier supplementary terminal for the following pur

poses:



Connecting protective ground for BEROs: For this purpose, you must

leave the or

ginal labeling visible.



Multiplying M potentials: For this purpose, select either

–

the labeling strip marked M

–

or leave the original labeling visible.



Multiplying any potentials: For this purpose, you must label the strip

yourself.

All the terminals of a tier are electrically connected to each other internally

ou can use the two-tier supplementary terminal for dif

ferent purposes. Y

must adapt the labeling of the supplementary terminal according to the ap

plication.

1. Y

ou must use the

screw-type

2-tier supplementary terminal:

Lower tier

Connection of protective conductors when using AC modules or the relay

module for switching circuits that are not safely isolated. The printed la

bel must remain visible.

2. Y

ou can use the two-tier supplementary terminal for the following pur

poses:

Upper tier



Multiplying M potentials:

For this purpose, select either:

–

the labeling strip marked M

–

or leave the original labeling visible



Multiplying the potential of any one potential

For this purpose, you must label the blank strip yourself.

Lower tier



Connecting protective ground for BEROs or shield terminals

Possible

Uses of

the Single-Tier

Supplementary

Terminal

Possible Uses of

the Two-Tier

Supplementary

Terminal

Wiring

3-23

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.9 Connecting Shielded Lines to the Shield Terminal of the

Supplementary Terminals

The

shield terminal makes it easy to connect to ground all shielded cables

that lead to or from electronic modules of the Smart Connect.

ou obtain a connection to ground by installing the shield terminal in the

supplementary terminal and connecting it to local ground at low resistance.

The shield terminal is subdivided by function into a connecting lug and a

spring terminal. The connecting lug establishes the electrical contact in the

supplementary terminal. The spring terminal contacts the shield of the signal

line.

o secure the shield terminal, proceed as follows:

Make as short a connection as possible between 2M on the

TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC terminal block and the tier of the supplementary

terminal in which you want to insert the shield terminals.

Insert the shield terminal into the desired position in the supplementary

terminal.

Use a screwdriver with a blade width of 3.5 mm to secure the shield ter

minal.

ou can only connect one or two shielded cables to each shield terminal. Y

connect the cables to the bared cable shield. The bared length of the cable

shield must be at least 20 mm. Cables with cross-sections of 4...7 mm are

connected securely

Application

Structure of the

Shield T

erminal

Mounting the

Shield T

erminal

Connecting Cables

Wiring

3-24 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

3.10 Connecting the Smart Connect SC to the

ET 200L-SC/TB 16IM-SC

The

electronics blocks of the ET 200L-SC and the ET

200L-SC IM-SC can

all be supplemented by means of the Smart Connect:



ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

– 6ES7

131-1BH1

1-0XB0



ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

– 6ES7

131-1BL1

1-0XB0



ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH1

1-0XB0



ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0



ET 200L-SC TB 16IM-SC – 6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0 (screw-type termi

nal), 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Enclosed with every TB 16SC terminal block is a 5 cm long Smart Connect

cable set with which you can connect the Smart Connect.

Insert the sheathed end of the cable set into the Smart Connect interface

of the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC.

One of the connecting cable’

s connectors has a lug. Insert this connector

into the terminal block of the Smart Connect.

Note

All open Smart Connect interfaces must be closed using the accompanying

SC cover before operating the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC. Only

then are the requirements for handling electrostatically sensitive components

met.

When you remove Smart Connect, do it in the following order:

1. T

urn of

f the power supply on the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC and

Smart Connect.

Detach the cable set from the terminal block of the Smart Connect.

Place the SC cover on the Smart Connect interface of the ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC. Only then are the requirements for handling electro

statically sensitive components met.

Introduction

Connecting the

Smart Connect

Removing the

Smart Connect

Wiring

4-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Commissioning

Section Topic Page

4.1 Configuration Software 4-2

4.2 Commissioning the ET 200L and Smart Connect 4-3

4.3 Replacing SC Electronic Modules 4-5

Contents of the

Chapter

4-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

4.1 Configuration

Software

You

configure the ET

200L distributed I/O device and SC using the following

configuration software.



COM ET

200 W

indows as of V

ersion 1.0



COM PROFIBUS as of V

ersion 3.0

STEP

7 as of V

ersion 2.1

ou will find the name of the type file for the various electronics blocks and

the contents of the device master file described in Appendix C.

The following applies to the ET 200L-SC:

DP Master Configuration Software Type Files see Section

SIMATIC S7 STEP 7 as of Version 3.0 See Table C-14 5.2.1 to 5.2.5

IM 308C COM

ET 200 W

indows as of V

ersion 1.0

See Table C-14 5.2.6

C.5

IM 308C COM

ET 200 W

indows as of V

ersion 2.1

See Table C-14

Device master files: See

Table C-2

5.2.1 to 5.2.5

COM PROFIBUS as of Version 3.0 See Table C-14 5.2.1 to 5.2.5

S5-95U with DP

master interface COM

ET 200 W

indows as of V

ersion 1.0

See Table C-14 5.2.6

C.5

Other master COM PROFIBUS Version 3.1 Recommendation: See

Table C-14 and Device

master

files: See

able C-2

5.2.6

C.5

The

following applies to the ET 200L-SC IM-SC:

DP Master Configuration Software Type Files see Section

SIMATIC S7 STEP 7 as of Version V 4.1 See Table C-14 5.2.1 to 5.2.5

IM 308-C COM PROFIBUSas of Ver-

sion V 3.2 See Table C-14 5.2.1 to 5.2.5

S5-95U with DP

master interface COM PROFIBUS as of Ver-

sion V 3.2 See Table C-14 5.2.6

C.5

Other master COM PROFIBUS as of Ver-

sion V 3.2 Recommendation: S. Table C-14 and

Device master files: See Table C-2 5.2.6

C.5

200L

ET 200L-SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Commissioning

4-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

4.2 Commissioning the ET 200L and Smart Connect

Commission

the ET

200L distributed I/O device as follows:

Step Activity Explanation

Install and wire up the ET

200L.

ou will find detailed instructions on instal

ling and wiring in Chapters 2 and 3.

Set the PROFIBUS address of the ET

200L.

The two rotary switches used to set the

PROFIBUS dd l d b th

Clip the bus connector on the electronics

block.

PROFIBUS address are concealed by the

bus connector (refer to Section 2.6).

If you are using an ET

200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC, you can now connect the

Smart Connect.

Use the enclosed Smart Connect cable set

for this purpose.

5 T

urn on the power supply for the ET

200L.

Result

The ET

200L starts up automatically

–

If you are using an ET

200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC, turn on the power supply

of the Smart Connect SC and ET

200L-SC.

Result

The ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC and

Smart Connect SC starts up automatically

The power supply of the Smart Connect

SC must not be turned on after that of

the ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC.

Note

Full operational safety of the electronics blocks is not ensured until you have

applied the labeling strips to the front of the electronics blocks (electrostatic

dischar

ge at the front of the module, LED coverage).

Commissioning

the

ET 200L

Commissioning

4-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect starts up automati

cally when the power supply is turned on. A separate switch is not available.

During start-up, both LEDs (ON and BF =

ault) are on.

The ET 200L distributed I/O device ...



Sets the outputs to ”0”.



Applies the PROFIBUS address from the two rotary switches.



Receives the configuration data from the DP master and evaluates the

details contained in the configuration data. If the configuration agrees

with the installation, the ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Con

nect initiates data exchange, and the BF LED goes of

The ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC behaves as follows when analog SC

modules are connected:



SC modules can only be detected at ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC

start-up after power on. If the 24V supply on the SC terminal block is not

yet connected at start-up, SC modules are not detected.



The ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC starts up when the power supply

is switched on.

This behavior can result in the following errors:



A configured SC module is not detected at start-up. As a result, a diagnos

tic interrupt occurs with a parameterization error for the SC add-on, and

the SF LED on the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC comes on.



ET 200L-SC (as of version 3), ET 200L-SC IM-SC. An SC module or

counter module fails during operation. As a result, a diagnostic interrupt

occurs with a module error for the SC add-on, and the SF LED on the

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC comes on.

After start-up, data exchange is initiated between the DP master and the

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect.

The data exchange is displayed by the ET

200L distributed I/O device as fol

lows:



The green operating LED (ON) is on.



The bus fault LED (BF) is of



The inputs and outputs are enabled.



Conductive inputs and outputs are indicated on the status LEDs by the

corresponding LED flashing.

Start-up

200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

with SC-Modules

Data Exchange

Commissioning

4-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

4.3 Replacing SC Electronic Modules

The

system is running. Y

ou want to change the system configuration of the

Smart Connect.

The system is in RUN mode. Y

ou want to plug in one or more additional

electronic modules.

Set the CPU to ST

OP mode.

Switch of

f the load voltage supply to the ET 200L and Smart Connect.

Extend the process wiring.

Insert the new electronic modules into the terminal block in accordance

with the positioning of the coding slide switches.

Create a new configuration.

Switch on the load voltage supply to the ET 200L and Smart Connect

again.

Expand your user program.

Set the CPU to RUN mode.

Check the actual status of the system

Note

Never connect and disconnect the SC electronic modules during operation.

Starting point

ou W

ant to

Connect

Additional

Electronic

Modules

Commissioning

4-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Commissioning

5-1

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Diagnostics

The ET

200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect was designed to

make working with and commissioning it as simple as possible. If a failure

nevertheless occurs, you can find out what it is by means of LEDs and slave

diagnostics.

Section Topic Page

5.1 Diagnostics Using the LEDs 5-2

5.2 Slave Diagnostics 5-5

Introduction

Contents of the

Chapter

5-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.1 Diagnostics Using the LEDs

The ET

200L distributed I/O device features the following diagnostic op

tions:

LEDs



Slave diagnostics (refer to Section 5.2)

Each input and output of the ET 200L distributed I/O device has a status dis

play

. The status display LED lights up when the input or output is active.

The ET

200L distributed I/O device has two LEDs for displaying statuses.

Table 5-1 Diagnostics Using the LED Display

LED

(Bus Fault)

ON LED

Meaning Err

or Handling

Off Off 

No voltage is being applied to

the ET

200L.



An ET

200L hardware fault has

occurred.



Check the power supply

Switch on the on-of

f switch for

VDC on the power supply

module.



Check whether the electronics

block is properly secured on the

terminal block.

On On ET

200L is in the process of

starting up.

–



The connection to the DP mas

ter has failed.

ET

200L has still not received

any configuration data.



Check the PROFIBUS connec

tion.



Check the DP master



Check the configuration in the

DP master (station type, input/

output, PROFIBUS address).



Check which PROFIBUS ad

dress has been set.

Off On

Data exchange

–

Introduction

Status

Display

ET 200L LED

Display

Diagnostics

5-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC distributed I/O device has three

LEDs for indicating its status.

Table 5-2 Diagnostics Using the LEDs of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC

LED

(Group

Error)

LED

(Bus Fault)

ON LED

Meaning Err

or Handling

Off Off Off 

No voltage is being applied

to the ET

200L-

SC/ET

200L-SC IM-SC



An ET 200L-

SC/ET

200L-SC IM-SC

hardware fault has oc

curred.



Check the power supply

Switch on the on-of

f switch

for 24

V DC on the power

supply module.



Check whether the elec

tronics block is properly

secured on the terminal

block.

Off Off On 

Power supply of the

ET200L-SC/ ET

200L-SC

IM-SC is on (comes on

briefly when the power is

switched on)



Data exchange

–

On 

Incorrect assignment of pa

rameters 

Check whether parameter

assignment for the Smart

Connect configuration

matches the actual Smart

Connect configuration.



Check that the cable to the

Smart Connect is properly

connected.



Check the power supply of

the TB16 SC.



SC communication error

(see byte 15.1, T

able 5-6)



Connection to SC module

with serial data transfer

aborted (analog module,

counter)



24 V power supply of the

SC modules is switched of

(analog module, counter)



Module defective

mean-

ing

On On T

ransmission rate is being

adjusted (max. 4s).



Check the PROFIBUS con

nection.



Check the DP master

LEDs on the

ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Diagnostics

5-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 5-2 Diagnostics Using the LEDs of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC

LED

(Group

Error)

Error

Handling

Meaning

ON LED

BF LED

(Bus Fault)

Off Flashing On ET

200L-SC/ET

200L-SC

IM-SC has still not re

ceived any configuration

data or has received incor

rect data.



Bus protocol incorrect



Check the configuration in

the DP master (station

type, input/output,

PROFIBUS address).



Check the format of the

parameterization frame.

On 

Error in configuration

frame. 

Check the configuration in

the DP master (station

type, input/output,

PROFIBUS address).



Check the configuration of

the configuration frame.

Diagnostics

5-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2 Slave

Diagnostics

You

will find the following topics in this section:

Section Topic Page

5.2.1 General Remarks on Diagnostics 5-6

5.2.2 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis 5-7

5.2.3 Structure of Station Statuses 1 to 3, Master Station Number and

Manufacturer Identification 5-8

5.2.4 Structure of the Module Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC 5-10

5.2.5 Structure of the Station Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC 5-13

5.2.6 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-Up of the

ET 200L-SC 5-15

Diagnostics

is the detection and localization of errors. The diagnostics struc

ture is laid down in EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS. ET 200L diagnostics

complies with this standard. Slave diagnostics is explained in the section that

follows for the ET 200L.

Section 5.2

Definition

Diagnostics

5-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2.1 General Remarks on Diagnostics

you are operating the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC as a DP slave

with a

SIMA

TIC S7/M7

DP master

, the modules behave like S7 300 CPU

modules.

ou read out the diagnosis (data record 0) with SFC 13, ”DPNRM_DG”.

If you are operating the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC as a DP slave

with another DP master for example, with an IM 308-C on a SIMA

TIC S5 –

you will find the slave diagnosis structure in Sections 5.2.2 to 5.2.6.

The ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC supports diagnostic interrupts.

ou can evaluate these types of interrupt with an S7/M7 DP master

. In the

event of an interrupt, interrupt OBs run automatically in the CPU – refer to

the programmer

’

s manual,

System Softwar

e for S7-300/S7-400, Pr

ogram De

sign).

If you are operating the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC with another DP

master

, these interrupts are simulated within station diagnostics.

Note

In order to be able to evaluate diagnostic interrupts by means of a station

diagnosis with another DP master

, you must take the following into account:



The DP master should be able to store diagnostic messages; this means

that diagnostic messages should be stored within the DP master in a ring

buf

fer store. If the DP master cannot store diagnostic messages, only the

latest diagnostic message to be received would always be stored, for

instance.

Y

ou have to poll regularly in your application the corresponding bits in

the station diagnosis. In doing so, you have to take into account the bus

run time of the PROFIBUS-DP so that you poll the bits at least once in

synchronization with the bus run time, for instance.

If the DP master sends an erroneous parameter assignment for the SC exten

sion in the parameterization frame, the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC

responds with a diagnostic message – in the event of diagnostics being en

abled. Owing to an internal processing time, the reply does not immediately

follow the parameterization frame, but there is a delay

. In the start-up OB,

therefore, the diagnosis of the module should be read after a period of

approximately 100 ms to determine whether the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC

IM-SC is operating properly

If the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC is already exchanging data, all the

available SC inputs are supplied as zeros, and all the available SC outputs

remain at zero.

Diagnostics with

an S7/M7 DP

Master

Diagnostics with

Another DP Master

Diagnostic

Interrupt and

Process Interrupt

Diagnosis upon

Erroneous

Assignment of

Parameters

Diagnostics

5-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2.2 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis

The

diagnostics of the ET 200L/ET 200L-SC/ET

200L-SC IM-SC distributed

I/O device comply with EN 50710 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS. The slave diagno

sis is explained below

The slave diagnosis comprises 6 bytes for the ET 200L and not more than

17 bytes for the ET

200L-SC/ET

200L-SC IM-SC:

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 5

Byte 3

Byte 4

Station statuses 1 to 3

Master PROFIBUS address

High byte

Low byte

Manufacturer ID

Byte 6

Byte 7

Byte 8

Module diagnosis

for the ET 200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC

Byte 9

Byte 16

Station diagnosis

for ET 200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC

ET 200L

ET 200L-SC

Figure 5-1 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis

You

can request a slave diagnosis with the following function blocks:

Table 5-3 Function Blocks for Slave Diagnosis

PLC

Family

Number Name

SIMA

TIC S5 with IM 308-C

FB 192 192

FB IM308C

SIMA

TIC S7/M7

SFC 13 13

SFC “DPNRM_DG”

S5-95U with DP master interface

FB 230 230

FB S_DIAG

SIMA

TIC S5 with

CP 5431 DP/FMS

Communication function blocks (see

standard FBs) SEND and RECEIVE

with job number 209

Introduction

Structure of the

Slave Diagnosis

Requesting a

Slave Diagnosis

Diagnostics

5-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2.3 Structure of Station Statuses 1 to 3, Master Station Number and

Manufacturer Identification

Station

statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave (refer

to Figure 5-1, bytes 0 to 2).

Station status 1 provides information about the DP slave and is structured as

follows:

Table 5-4 Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0)

Bit Meaning Action

0 1: The

DP slave cannot be addressed by

the DP master

.

Correct PROFIBUS address set on ET

200L?



Bus connector connected?

V

oltage at DP slave?



RS 485 repeater set correctly?



Supply voltage ON/ OFF performed on

200L?

1 1:

The DP slave is not yet ready to

exchange data.

W

ait, because the ET

200L is just being pow

ered up.

2 1:

The configuration data sent by the DP

master to the DP slave do not agree

with the installation of the DP slave.



Correct station type or correct installation of

the ET

200L entered in the system configura

tion software?

3 1:

An external diagnosis exists.



Check the contents of the external diagnosis.

4 1:

The requested function is not supported

by the DP slave.



Check the configuration.

5 1:

The DP master cannot interpret the

reply from the DP slave.



Check the bus installation.

6 1:

The DP slave type does not agree with

the software configuration.



Correct station type entered in the system con

figuration software?

7 1:

Parameters have been assigned to the

DP slave by a dif

ferent DP master from

that which currently has access to the

DP slave.



The bit is always 1 if you are in the process of

accessing, for example, the ET

200L with the

PU or another DP master

The PROFIBUS address of the parameteriza

tion master is located in the ”master

PROFIBUS address” diagnostic byte.

Definition of

Station Status

Structure of

Station Status 1

Diagnostics

5-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Station

status 2 provides additional information about the DP slave and is

structured as follows:

Table 5-5 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1)

Bit Meaning

0 1: Parameters

have to be assigned again to the DP slave.

1 1:

A diagnostic message has been issued. The DP slave cannot

resume operation until the fault has been corrected (static

diagnostic message).

2 1:

The bit is always set to ”1” if the DP slave having this PROFIBUS

address is present.

3 1:

Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave.

4 1:

The DP slave has received the ”FREEZE” control command

5 1:

The DP slave has received the ”SYNC” control command

6 1:

The bit is always set to ”0”.

7 1:

The DP slave is disabled – that is, it has been removed from the

processing in progress.

1The bit is updated only if another diagnostic message changes too.

Station

status 3 is reserved and is not relevant in as far as the diagnostics of

the ET

200L distributed I/O device are concerned.

The Master PROFIBUS Address diagnostic byte stores the PROFIBUS ad

dress of the DP master which has assigned parameters to the DP slave (refer

to Figure 5-1, byte 3).

The master PROFIBUS address comprises one byte with the PROFIBUS ad

dress of the DP master that assigned parameters to the DP slave and has read

and write access to the DP slave.

A code is stored in the manufacturer identification that describes the type of

the DP slave (refer to Figure 5-1, bytes 4 and 5).

The manufacturer identification of the DP slave comprises two bytes. Y

will find the manufacturer identifications of the dif

ferent electronics blocks

in Appendix C, T

able C-1 and C-4.

Structure of

Station Status 2

Structure of

Station Status 3

Definition of the

Master PROFIBUS

Address

Structure of the

Master PROFIBUS

Address

Definition of the

Manufacturer ID

Structure of the

Manufacturer ID

Diagnostics

5-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2.4 Structure of the Module Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

The

module diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and ET

200L-SC IM-SC (bytes 6

to 8) tells you the slot for which a diagnosis is available.

The structure of the module diagnosis is indicated below

. Y

ou will find an

explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3.

Byte 6

Byte 7

43H

Byte 8

L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 1 to 8

of the on-board device defective (slot 4)

ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 9 to 16

of the on-board device defective (slot 5)

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7)

L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 1 to 8 of the on-board de

vice defective (slot 4)

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 9 to 16 of the on-board device

defective (slot 5)

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 8)

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 17 to 24 of the on-board device

defective (slot 6)

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 25 to 32 of the on-board device

defective (slot 7)

4567

Bit no.

111

11111

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO 24 V/0.5 A

ET 200L-SC: Outputs 1 to 8 of the on-board de

vice defective (slot 4)

ET 200L-SC: Outputs 9 to 16 of the on-board de

vice defective (slot 5)

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 8)

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 1 to 8 of the on-board device

defective (slot 6)

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 9 to 16 of the on-board device

defective (slot 7)

4567

Bit no.

11111

Bit no.

L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO 24 V/0.5 A

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 9)

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 6)

SC modules analog when only analog modules are used

Figure 5-2 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Soft-

ware for the ET 200L-SC

Module Diagnosis

Structure with the

COM/S7

Configuration

Software

Diagnostics

5-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Byte

Byte 7

43H

Byte 8

L-SC IM SC

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 4)

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 5)

Bit no.

L-SC IM-SC

SC modules analog when only analog modules are used

00H

Figure 5-3 Structure of the Module Diagnosis with the COM/S7 Configuration Soft-

ware for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Diagnostics

5-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

module diagnosis is structured as follows. Y

ou will find an explanation of

the slots in Appendix C.3.

Byte 6

Byte 7

43H

L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 1 to 16

of the on-board device defective (slot 4)

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7)

L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

ET 200L-SC: Inputs 1 to 32 of the on-board de

vice defective (slot 4)

Bit no.

111

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO 24 V/0.5 A

ET 200L-SC: Inputs/outputs 1 to 16 of the on

board device defective (slot 4)

Bit no.

111

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 6)

SC modules analog when only analog modules are used

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7)

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 6)

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 7)

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 6)

L-SC IM SC

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 4)

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 5)

Bit no.

Figure 5-4 Structure

of the Module Diagnosis with any Configuration Software for the

ET 200L-SC, ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Structure with any

Configuration

Software

Diagnostics

5-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2.5 Structure of the Station Diagnosis for the ET 200L-SC and

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

The

station diagnosis provides detailed information about a DP slave.

Data record 0, which is typical of the SIMA

TIC S7, is stored in the station

diagnosis (bytes 9 to 16).

The contents of the station diagnosis always refer to the Smart Connect sec

tion.

The station diagnosis contains a maximum of eight bytes. Y

ou will find an

explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3.

01H01H

: Code for S7 diagnosis

Byte 9

Bit no.

Length of station diagnosis

incl. byte 9 (= max. of 8 bytes)

Code for station diagnosis

Byte 10

01H

: Code for S7 diagnosis

Byte 1

Slot for ET 200L-SC

05H

to 9

Byte 12

00HReserved

Byte 13

Byte 16

Station diagnosis

for the ET 200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC

Slot for ET 200L-SC IM-SC

04H,

Figure 5-5 Structure of Station Diagnosis

Transfer

the contents of the station diagnosis to a data block, since the station

diagnosis will be updated periodically

Definition

Structure

Saving the

Diagnosis

Diagnostics

5-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table

5-6 shows the structure and contents of bytes 13 to 16 for a diagnostic

interrupt.

Table 5-6 Bytes 13 to 16 for the Diagnostic Interrupt

Byte Bit Meaning Error Handling

13 0Module malfunction A module malfunction has occurred.

1Internal error An internal error has occurred (see

byte 13.6, byte 13.7 and byte 15.0).

2External error An external error has occurred (see

byte 15.1).

2 to 6 Not applicable ---

7Wrong parameters in module Check the ET 200L-SC parameter

assignment.

14 0 to 3 Module class: 0010 (special

module) ---

4 to 7 Not applicable ---

15 0 User module wrong or miss-

ing Smart Connect incorrect or missing.

1SC communication error

(ET 200L-SC,

as of

version 3)

Connection to the SC module

with serial data transfer aborted

(analog module, counter).

Module defective

24V power supply of the SC

modules is switched off (analog

module, counter).1

15 2 to 7 Not applicable ---

16 0 to 7 Not applicable ---

1After the 24V power supply is connected, the SC module is included in cyclic data

transfer

again with the parameters received at start-up. It is reported that the diagnosis

has been processed and the problem thus corrected.

Bytes

13 to 16 for

the Diagnostic

Interrupt

Diagnostics

5-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

5.2.6 Structure of Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-Up of ET 200L-SC

and ET 200L-SC IM-SC

When

you execute a default start-up (see AppendixC.5), the following slave

diagnosis applies. Y

ou will find an explanation of the slots in Appendix C.3.

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 5

Byte 3

Byte 4

Station status 1 to 3

(see Section 5.2.3)

Master PROFIBUS adress

(see Section 5.2.3)

High byte

Low byte

manufacturer ID (see

Section 5.2.3)

Byte 6

Byte 7

43H

L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

ET 200L-SC: On-board I/O device defec

tive (slot 4)

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 5)

Bit no.

11 L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24V/0.5 A

Byte 8

00H

Module diagnosis:

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 6)

SC modules analog when only analog modules are used

3L-SC IM SC

Smart Connect digital/analog

defective (slot 4)

Smart Connect analog defective (slot 5)

Bit no.

Figure 5-6 Slave Diagnosis for Default Start-up of the ET 200L-SC and

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Default

Start-up

Diagnostics

5-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Diagnostics

6-1

ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

General

echnical Data

The

general technical data consists of the standards and test values with

which the ET

200L conforms and which it fulfills, and the test criteria by

which the ET

200L distributed I/O device was tested.

Section Topic Page

6.1 Standards and Certification 6-2

6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 6-4

6.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions 6-6

6.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions 6-7

6.5 Details

of Insulation T

esting, Safety

Class, and Degree of Protec

tion 6-8

6.6 Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device 6-9

What

Is General

Technical Data?

Contents of the

Chapter

6-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

6.1 Standards and Certification

This

chapter contains information the following for the modules and compo

nents of the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC:



The most important standards complied with by the ET 200L and Smart

Connect SC



The certification of the ET 200L and Smart Connect SC

The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC meet the require

ments and criteria of IEC 1

131, Part 2.

The ET 200L distributed I/O device and Smart Connect SC meet the require

ments and criteria of EN 50 170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS.

Our products fulfill the requirements and safety objectives of the following

EC Directives and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN)

published for stored-program controllers in the of

ficial journals of the Euro

pean Communities:



89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive



73/23/EEC Low V

oltage Directive (for electrical equipment)

The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the relevant authorities

at the following address:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Bereich Automatisierungstechnik

A&D AS E 14

Postfach 1963

D-92209 Amber

The ET 200L has the following PNO certificates:

Product Name Order Number Release PNO Certificate

ET 200L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 1 Z00179

ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 1 Z00210

ET 200L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 1 Z00180

ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 1 Z00212

ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 1 Z00181

ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 1 Z00211

ET 200L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 1 Z00182

ET 200L 16 DI/16

DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 1 Z00183

Introduction

IEC

131

PROFIBUS DP

CE Marking

PNO

General T

echnical Data

6-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Recognition Mark

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to

Standard UL 508, File No. 1

16536

CSA Certification Mark

Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to

Standard C22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323

Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 361

1, Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D.

!Warning

There is a risk of injury and damage to property

In potentially explosive atmospheres, there is a risk of injury to people and

damage to property if you disconnect connectors when a ET 200 is in opera

tion.

Always de-ener

gize the ET 200 in potentially explosive atmospheres before

disconnecting any connectors.

UL Recognition

CSA Certification

FM Approval

General T

echnical Data

6-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Electromagnetic

compatibility is the ability of an electric device to function

satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this

environment.

The ET

200L distributed I/O device also meets the requirements, among oth

ers, of the EMC act of the European inner market. A requirement for this is

that the ET

200L distributed I/O device meets the specifications and direc

tives concerning electrical installation.

The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET

200L

distributed I/O device with regard to pulse-shaped interference.

Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with Corresponds to

Severity

Electrostatic discharge

to IEC 801-2 (DIN VDE 0843, Part 2) 8 kV

4 kV 3 (air discharge)

2 (contact dis-

charge)

Burst impulses in accordance with

IEC 801-4 (DIN VDE 0843, Part 4) 2 kV (supply line)

2 kV (signal line) 3

Surge in accordance with IEC 801-5 (DIN VDE 0839, Part 10)

Only with lightning protection elements (refer to DP master

manual).

Assymmetrical connection 2 kV (supply line)

2 kV (signal line/data

line) 3

Symmetrical connection 1 kV (supply line)

1 kV (signal line/data

line)

Definition

Pulse-Shaped In-

terference

General T

echnical Data

6-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200L

distributed I/O device with regard to sine-shaped interference.

HF Radiation to ENV

50140 (Corr

esponds to

IEC 801-3)

Electr

omagnetic RF Field

RF Coupling to

ENV

50141 (Corr

sponds to IEC 801-6)

Amplitude-Modulated Pulse-Modulated

80 to 1000 MHz

900 MHz

5 MHz

0.15 to 80 MHz

V/m

Vrms

unmodulated

80 % AM (1 kHz)

50 % ED

80 % AM (1 kHz)

200 Hz repetition fre

quency

150

source imped

ance

Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 5501

Limit V

alue Class

A, Group 1 (measured at a distance of 30 m).

Frequency

Emitted Interfer

ence

From 20 to 230 MHz

< 30 dB (

mV/m)Q

From 230 to 1000 MHz

< 37 dB (

mV/m)Q

Sine-Shaped

Interference

Emission of Radio

Interference

General T

echnical Data

6-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

6.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions

The ET

200L distributed I/O device surpasses the requirements of IEC 1

131,

Part 2, with regard to shipping and storage conditions. The following details

apply to modules that are shipped and stored in their original packaging.

Type of Condition Admissible Range

Free fall v 1m

Temperature From – 40 C to + 70 C

Temperature variation 20 K/h

Air pressure From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a

height of -1000 to 3500 m)

Relative humidity From 5 to 95 %, without condensation

Conditions

General T

echnical Data

6-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

6.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions

The

following climatic environmental conditions apply:

Environmen-

tal

Conditions

Operating Ranges Remarks

Temperature From 0 to 60 C

From 0 to 40 CHorizontal wall mounting

All other installation positions

Temperature

variation 10 K/h

Relative hu-

midity From 15 to 95 % Without condensation, corre-

sponds to relative humidity

(RH)

stress rate 2 to

IEC 1

131-2

Air pressure From 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to a height of

-1000 to 2000 m

Contaminant

concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm; rel. humidity

< 60 %,

no moisture

condensation

H2S: < 0.1 ppm; rel. humidity

< 60 %,

no moisture

condensation

Test:

10 ppm; 4 days

1 ppm; 4 days

The

mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in

the form of sinusoidal oscillations.

Frequency Range Permanent Occasional

10 v f v58 Hz 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.075 mm amplitude

58 v f v150 Hz 0.5 g constant acceleration 1

g constant acceleration

The

following table provides information on the type and extent of tests of

mechanical environmental conditions.

Test for ... Test

Standard

Remarks

Oscilla-

tions Oscillation

test

to IEC 68,

Part 2-6

(sine)

Oscillation type: frequency sweeps with a rate of

change of 1 octave per minute.

10 Hz v f v58 Hz, const. amplitude 0.075 mm.

58 Hz v f v150 Hz, const. acceleration 1 g.

Oscillation

time: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in all of

the three perpendicular axes.

Shock Shock test to

IEC 68,

Part 2-27

Type of shock: half sine

Force of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration

Direction of shock: 3 shocks per +/– direction in all of

the three perpendicular axes.

Climatic

Environmental

Conditions

Mechanical

Environmental

Conditions

Testing

Mechanical

Environmental

Conditions

General T

echnical Data

6-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

6.5 Details of Insulation Testing, Safety Class, and Degree of Protection

Insulation

strength is demonstrated in the routine test with the following test

voltage in accordance with IEC 1

131, Part 2:

Circuits with a Rated Voltage Ue to Other

Circuits or to Ground Test Voltage

0 V < Uev50 V 500 VDC

Safety

class II in accordance with IEC 536 (VDE 0106, Part 1) – that is, con

nection to a protective conductor is not necessary

20 degree of protection in accordance with IEC 529 – that is, protection

against contact with standard test fingers.

Furthermore, it is protected against foreign matter having a diameter greater

than 12.5 mm.

No special protection against water

Test

oltage

Safety Class

Protection Against

Foreign Matter and

Water

General T

echnical Data

6-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

6.6 Rated

oltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

The ET

200L distributed I/O device operates with the rated voltage and cor

responding tolerances shown in the following table.

Table 6-1 Rated Voltage of the ET 200L Distributed I/O Device

Rated

oltage T

olerance Range

VDC

20.4 to 28.8

VDC

The ET 200L distributed I/O device bridges voltage drops of the power supply

up to 20 ms long (does not apply to SC electronic modules).

Rated

oltage for

Operation

Bridging V

oltage

Drops

General T

echnical Data

6-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

General T

echnical Data

7-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Terminal Blocks and Supplementary

Terminals – Technical Data

The

product spectrum of ET

200L and Smart Connect includes various termi

nal blocks to which you can connect different electronics blocks. This chap

ter contains the technical data for the terminal blocks and their supplemen

tary terminals.

Section Subject Page

7.1 Terminal Block TB 16L –

6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0 7-2

7.2 Terminal Block TB 32L –

6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0 7-4

7.3 Terminal Block TB 16L AC– 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0 7-7

7.4 Terminal Block TB 16SC

6ES7 120-0AH01-0AA0, 6ES7 120-0BH01-0AA0 7-10

7.5 Terminal Block TB 16IM-SC –

6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0, 6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0 7-14

7.6 Supplementary Terminals for TB 16L and TB 32L 7-18

7.7 Supplementary Terminals for TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC 7-20

Introduction

Contents of the

Chapter

7-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.1 Terminal Block TB 16L –

6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0

The

TB 16L terminal block is available with two types of connection.



Connection by means of a screw-type terminal (Order Number

6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0)



Connection by means of a spring terminal (Order Number

6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0)

ou can connect the following electronics blocks to the TB 16L terminal

block:

Chapter Plug-In Electronics Blocks Order Number

Chapter 9: ET 200L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0

ET 200L Electronics Blocks

Technical Data

ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0

Technical Data ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0

ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0

The

terminal block bears the stationary wiring.

In Figure 7-1 you can see the dimension drawing of the TB 16L terminal

block with the 16 DI 24

V DC electronics block clipped on.

18 19 31292827

1615141312111098764321

30 3220 21

14535.3

69*

100

PROFIBUS-DP

x10

131-1BH00-0XB0

139-1CH00-0XA0

TB16L

1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+

1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 17 22 23 24 25 26

ET200L

DI 16xDC24V

SENSOR

SUPPL

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

1L+

17....

1 ....

2L+

25....

9 ....

47.5 52.5

Rail

support

With bus connector: 82 mm

Figure 7-1 The TB 16L Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension Drawing

Order

Numbers

Plug-In Electronics

Blocks

Characteristics

Dimension

Drawing

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table

7-1 shows the pinout of the TB 16L terminal block.

Table 7-1 Pinout of the TB 16L Terminal Block

Terminal Assignment

Inputs Outputs

to 8 I0: Signals .0 to .7

Q0: Signals .0 to .7

9 to 16

I1: Signals .0 to .7

Q1: Signals .0 to .7

17 to 24

I0: Sensor supply

Q0: Chassis ground (inter

nally jumpered)

25 to 32

I1: Sensor supply

Q1: Chassis ground (inter

nally jumpered)

1L+

Power supply for channel group

A (I0 and Q0)

2L+

Power supply for channel group B (I1 and Q1) internally

3L+

Power

supply

for

channel

group

(I1

and

Q1)

internally

jumpered

4L+

Power supply for electronics internally jumpered

5L+

Power supply for electronics, internally jumpered

Ch i d ti f h l

Ah l

Chassis ground connection for channel group

A, channel

group B, and electronics (all internally jumpered)

group

, an

ectron

(

nterna

umpere

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 145 10040.5

Height with electronics block from top

edge rail (with bus termina-

tor 6ES7 972-0CA30-0XA0)

82 mm

Weight 230 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of channels 16

Pinout

Technical

Data

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.2 Terminal Block TB 32L –

6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0, 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0

The

TB 32L terminal block is available with two types of connection.



Connection via screw-type terminal (Order Number

6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0)



Connection via spring terminal (Order Number 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0)

ou can connect the following electronics blocks to the TB 32L terminal

block:

Chapter Plug-In Electronics Blocks Order Number

Chapter 9: ET 200L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0

ET 200L Electronics Blocks

ThilDt

ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0

Technical Data ET 200L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0

ET 200L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0

ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0

The

terminal block bears the stationary wiring.

Order

Numbers

Plug-In Electronics

Blocks

Characteristics

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 7-2 you can see the dimension drawing of the TB 32L terminal

block with the LSC 32 DI 24

V electronics block clipped on.

ET200L-SC

DI 32xDC24V

SENSOR SUPPLY

PROFIBUS-DP

131-1BL10-0XBO

TB32L

636261605958575655545352515049474645444342414039383736353433

18 19 312928271615141312111098764321 30 3220 21

1L+ 2L+ 3L+ 4L+ 5L+

1M 2M 3M 4M 5M

17 22 23 24 25 265

48 64

1L+

1M 33...

1... 48

2L+

2M 49...

17... 64

4L+

POWER

SUPPLY

47,5 52,5

Rail

support

69*

35,3

With bus connector: 82 mm

Figure 7-2 The TB 32L Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Clipped On, Dimension Drawing

Dimension

Drawing

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table

7-2 shows the pinout of the TB 32L terminal block.

Table 7-2 Pinout of the TB 32L Terminal Block

Terminal Assignment

Inputs Outputs

to 8 I0: Signals .0 to .7

Q0: Signals .0 to .7

9 to 16

I1: Signals .0 to .7

Q1: Signals .0 to .7

17 to 24

I2: Signals .0 to .7

Q2: Signals .0 to .7

25 to 32

I3: Signals .0 to .7

Q3: Signals .0 to .7

33 to 40

I0: Sensor supply

Q0: Chassis ground (internal

ly jumpered)

41 to 48

I1: Sensor supply

Q1: Chassis ground (internal

ly jumpered)

49 to 56

I2: Sensor supply

Q2: Chassis ground (internal

ly jumpered)

57 to 64

I3: Sensor supply

Q3: Chassis ground (inter

nally jumpered)

1L+

Power supply for channel group A (I0 and I1 or Q0 and Q1)

2L+

Power supply for channel group B

3L+

Power

supply

for

channel

group

(I2 and I3 or Q2 and Q3) internally jumpered

4L+

Power supply for electronics internally jumpered

5L+

Power supply for electronics, internally jumpered

Ch i d ti f h l

Ah l

Chassis ground connection for channel group

A, channel

group B, and electronics (all internally jumpered)

group

, an

ectron

(

nterna

umpere

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 191 10040.5

Height with electronics block from top

edge rail (with bus terminator

6ES7 972-0CA30-0XA0)

82 mm

Weight 350 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of channels 32

Pinout

Technical

Data

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.3 Terminal Block TB 16L

AC 6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0

The

TB 16L

AC terminal block has the following characteristics:



Screw-type terminal connection



The terminal block bears the stationary wiring

ou can connect the following electronics blocks to the TB 16L AC terminal

block:

Chapter Plug-In Electronics Blocks Order Number

Chapter 9: ET 200L 16 DI AC 120 V 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XA0

ET 200L Electronics

Blocks

ET 200L 16 DO AC 120V/1.0A 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0

Blocks

Technical Data

ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0

ata ET 200L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120V/1.0A 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0

ET 200L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0

Characteristics

Plug-In

Electronics

Blocks

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 7-3 you can see the dimension drawing of the TB 16L AC terminal

block with the L

16 DI AC 120

V electronics block clipped on.

1234 5678 9101112 13141516

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

PROFIBUS–DP BF

POWER

SUPPLY

16xAC120V

ET200L

TB16L

L1 L1

X10

40.5

99.1

131

1EH00–0XB0

193 1CH20–0XA0

Figure 7-3 The TB 16L AC Terminal Block with the Electronics Block Mounted, Dimension Drawing (mm)

Dimension

Drawing

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table

7-2 shows the pinout of the TB 16L AC terminal block.

Table 7-3 Pinout of the TB 16L AC Terminal Block

Terminal Assignment

Inputs Outputs

to 8 I0: Signals .0 to .7

Q0: Signals .0 to .7

9 to 16

I1: Signals .0 to .7

Q1: Signals .0 to .7

I0.0: Sensor neutral

Q0.0: Load voltage

I0.1: Sensor neutral

Q0.1: Load voltage

I0.2: Sensor neutral

Q0.2: Load voltage

I0.3: Sensor neutral

Q0.3: Load voltage

I0.4: Sensor neutral

Q0.4: Load voltage

I0.5: Sensor neutral

Q0.5: Load voltage

I0.6: Sensor neutral

Q0.6: Load voltage

I0.7: Sensor neutral

Q0.7: Load voltage

I1.0: Sensor neutral

Q1.0: Load voltage

I1.1: Sensor neutral

Q1.1: Load voltage

I1.2: Sensor neutral

Q1.2: Load voltage

I1.3: Sensor neutral

Q1.3: Load voltage

I1.4: Sensor neutral

Q1.4: Load voltage

I1.5: Sensor neutral

Q1.5: Load voltage

I1.6: Sensor neutral

Q0.6: Load voltage

I1.7: Sensor neutral

Q1.7: Load voltage

Power supply line for electronics

Power supply neutral for electronics

The following table shows the technical data of the TB 16L AC terminal

block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 191 10040.5

Height with electronics block from top

edge rail (with bus terminator) 98.5 mm

Weight 283 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of channels 16

Pinout

Technical

Data

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.4 Terminal

Block TB 16SC

The

TB 16SC terminal block is available with two types of connection:



Connection by means of a screw-type terminal (Order Number

6ES7 120-0AH01-0AA0)



Connection by means of a spring terminal (Order Number

6ES7 120-0BH01-0AA0)

ou can connect the following electronic modules to the TB 16 SC terminal

block:

Chapter Plug-In Electronic Modules Order Number

Chapter 10: 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0

Digital SC Electronic

Modules

2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0

Modules

Technical Data

2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0

ata 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0

1DOAC120/230V 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0

1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0

Counter module 1COUNT40kHz * 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0

Chapter 12: 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0

Analog SC Electronic

Modules

2 AI HS U *6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0

Modules

Technical Data 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0 ,

6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0

2 AI HS I *6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0,

6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0

2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0

1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0

1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0

1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0

* Only in conjunction with TB 16IM-SC

Order

Numbers

Plug-In Electronic

Modules

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

TB 16SC terminal block has the following characteristics:



It can be wired before you plug in the electronic modules.



Depending on the design, the wiring can be connected either via screw-

type terminals or via spring terminals.

Y

ou must establish a connection to local ground.



The TB16 SC enables a 2-wire connection and can be expanded to 3-wire

and 4-wire connection using supplementary terminals.

Y

ou can slide a labeling strip into the TB16 SC terminal block for noting

the assignments between slot and module.



The counter module and the high-speed analog SC-electronic modules

can only be used in the TB 16SC, when the TB 16SC is connected to a

TB 16IM-SC.

Characteristics

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

7-4 shows the front elevation of the TB 16SC terminal block.

112

115

69*

100

47.5 52.5

With bus connector: 82 mm

Figure 7-4 Front Elevation of the Terminal Block

!Caution

The

spring terminal will be destroyed if you insert the screwdriver into the

opening for the wires.

Only press the screwdriver into the rectangular openings of the terminal

block.

Dimension

Drawing

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

figure below shows you the block diagram of the TB16 SC terminal

block.

The connections 2L+ and 2M are used for looping through the load voltage

supply 1L+ and 1M.

...

....

...

Connection cable

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

Figure 7-5 Block Diagram of the TB16 SC Terminal Block.

!Warning

There

is a risk of injury and damage to property

Connecting dif

ferent phases of a three-phase system to a terminal block can

lead to injury and damage to property

Connect only one phase to each terminal block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 14510040.5

Weight 230 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of slots 8

Current-carrying capacity via 1L+ and

2L+

Current-carrying capacity per slot with

parallel supply

max. 8A

max. 1,5 A

Number

of times an

electronic module can

be plugged into a slot of the TB 16 SC max. 20

Insulation tested

(from slot to slot) DC 4000 V

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.5 Terminal Block TB 16IM-SC

The

TB 16IM-SC terminal block is available with two types of connection.



Connection by means of a screw-type terminal (Order Number

6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0)



Connection by means of a spring terminal (Order Number

6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0)

The TB 16IM-SC terminal block has the following characteristics:



It can be wired before you plug in the electronic modules.



Depending on the design, the wiring can be connected either via screw-

type terminals or via spring terminals.



The TB 16IM-SC enables a 2-wire connection and can be expanded to a

3- and 4-wire connection with the supplementary terminals of the

TB 16SC.

Y

ou can slide a labeling strip into the TB 16IM-SC terminal block for

noting the assignments between slot and module.



the TB 16IM-SC can be expanded with the TB 16SC to connect another

8 SC electronics modules.



two load voltage supplies (load voltage group 1L+: A to D, load voltage

group 2L+, 3L+: E to F)

Order

Numbers

Characteristics

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

can connect the following electronic modules to the TB 16IM-SC termi

nal block:

Chapter Plug-In Electronic Modules Order Number

Chapter 10: 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0

Digital SC Electronic

Modules

2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0

Modules

Technical Data

2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0

ata Counter module 1COUNT40kHz 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0

1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0

1DOAC120/230V 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0

1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0

Chapter 12: 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0

Analog SC Electronic

Modules

2 AI HS U 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0

Modules

Technical Data 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0

6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0

2 AI HS I 6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0,

6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0

2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0

1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0

1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0

1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0

Plug-In

Electronic

Modules

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

7-6 shows the front elevation of the TB 16IM-SC terminal block.

160

47.5

100

69*

35.3

52.5

Rail support

With bus connector: 82 mm

IM-SC

Bus

terminator

OFF

SIMATIC

ET200L-SC

Figure 7-6 The TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block with the IM-SC Interface Module Mounted, Dimension Drawing

!Caution

The

spring terminal will be destroyed if you insert the screwdriver into the

opening for the wires.

Only press the screwdriver into the rectangular openings of the terminal

block.

Dimension

Drawing

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

figure below shows you the block diagram of the TB

16IM-SC terminal

block.

The connections 3L+ and 3M are used for looping through the load voltage

supply 2L+ and 2M.

1L+

2L+

3L+

...

....

...

o the IM-SC

Figure 7-7 Block Diagram of the TB 16IM-SC Terminal Block

!Warning

There

is a risk of injury and damage to property

Connecting dif

ferent phases of a three-phase system to a terminal block can

lead to injury and damage to property

Connect only one phase to each terminal block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 16010073.6

Weight 260 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of slots 8

Current-carrying capacity via 1L+ and

2L+ max. 28A

Number

of times an

electronic module can

be plugged into a slot of the TB 16IM-SC max. 8

Isolation tested

(from slot to slot) DC 4000 V

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

erminal Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.6 Supplementary Terminals for the TB 16L and TB 32L

The

supplementary terminals allow you to upgrade the two-wire termination

of the ET

200L distributed I/O device to a three- or four

-wire termination.

Table 7-4 Supplied Versions of the Supplementary Terminals

Channels Tiers Fixing Order

Number

Screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FH20-0XA0

Spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FH50-0XA0

Screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FH30-0XA0

Spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FH60-0XA0

Screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FL20-0XA0

Spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FL50-0XA0

Screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FL30-0XA0

Spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FL60-0XA0

ith the supplementary terminals, every tier is jumpered internally

Definition

Versions

Supplied

Characteristics

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 7-8

shows the dimension drawings for the supplementary terminals.

TB 16L single-tier

TB 16L double-tier

TB 32L single-tier

TB 32L double-tier

145

24.2

29.8

40.3

29.8

40.3 145

39.224.2

29.8

40.3 191

29.8

40.3 191

39.2

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM

PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE

PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE

PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE PEPEPE PE

Figure 7-8 TB 16L/TB 32L Supplementary Terminals, Dimension Drawing

Dimension

Drawing

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

7-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

7.7 Supplementary Terminals for the TB 16SC and

TB 16IM-SC

The

supplementary terminals allow you to upgrade the two-wire termination

of the ET

200L-SC IM-SC distributed I/O device and Smart Connect to a

three- or four

-wire termination.

Table 7-5 Supplied Versions of the Supplementary Terminals

TB16SC/ TB 16IM-SC

Tiers Fixing Order

Number

Screw-type terminal 6ES7 120-1AH00-0AA0

Spring terminal

6ES7 120-1BH00-0AA0

Screw-type terminal 6ES7 120-2AH00-0AA0

Spring terminal

6ES7 120-2BH00-0AA0

Shield terminal

6ES7 192-0AA0-0AA0

ith the supplementary terminals, every tier is jumpered internally

Figure 7-8 shows the dimension drawings for the supplementary terminals.

115

Installation depth: 40

115

Installation depth: 40

TB 16SC/ TB 16IM-SC single-tier

TB 16SC/ TB 16IM-SC double-tier

Figure 7-9 TB 16SC/TB 16IM-SC Supplementary Terminals, Dimension Drawing

Definition

Versions

Supplied

Characteristics

Dimension

Drawing

Terminal

Blocks and Supplementary T

erminals – T

echnical Data

8-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

ET 200L Electronics Blocks –

Technical Data

The

components of the ET 200L cannot be upgraded with a Smart Connect.

This chapter contains the technical data of the ET

200L electronics blocks.

The following table contains the assignment of the ET

200L electronic

blocks to the terminal blocks.

Table 8-1 Assignment of the ET 200L Electronic Blocks to the Terminal Blocks

Terminal Block Electronics Block Order Number

TB 16L –

(6ES7 193

1CH00

0XA0

ET 200L 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0

(6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0,

6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0) ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A 6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0

TB 32L –

(6ES7 193 1CL00 0XA0

ET 200L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0

(6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0,

6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0) ET 200L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0

6ES7

193

1CL10

0XA0)

ET 200L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0

TB 16L AC

(6ES7 193 1CH20 0XA0)

ET 200L 16 DI AC 120 V 6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0

(6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0) ET 200L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0

ET 200L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0

ET 200L 8 DI/8DO AC 120 V/1.0 A 6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0

ET 200L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0

Introduction

TB´EB

Assignment

8-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Section Subject Page

8.1 Electronics Block L 16 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0 8-3

8.3 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A –

6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0 8-9

9.2 Electronics Block L 32 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0 0-4

8.4 Electronics Block L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A –

6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0 8-12

8.5 Electronics Block L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A –

6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0 8-15

8.6 Electronics Block L 16 DI AC –

6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0 8-18

8.7 Electronics Block L 16 DO AC 120 V/ 1.0 A –

6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0 8-21

8.8 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A –

6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0 8-24

8.9 Electronics Block L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A –

6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0 8-28

8.10 Electronics Block L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC

120V/2.0 A – 6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0 8-31

Contents of the

Chapter

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.1 Electronics Block L 16 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0

The

L 16 DI DC 24

V electronics block has the following characteristics:



16 inputs in two groups, each of eight inputs



Rated input voltage of 24

V DC



Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

PROFIBUS-DP

ET200L

16xDC24V

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

1L+

1M 17....

1 ....

2L+

2M 25....

9 ....

SENSOR SUPPL

131-1BH00-0XB0

x10

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-1 View of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-2

shows the block diagram.

17 2

18 3

19 4

20 5

21 6

22 7

23 9

24 10

26 11

27 12

28 13

29 14

30 15

31 16

1L+

1M 2L+

2M 3L+

3M 4L+

4M 5L+

24 V

internal AB

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

ON BF

Figure 8-2 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Block

Diagram

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the technical data of the L 16 DI DC 24

V elec

tronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

Number of inputs 16

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0014H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC

Maximum number of in-

puts

driven

simultaneously

Galvanic isolation

Between channels No

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 V DC

Power input

From supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 70 mA

From

load voltage

L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 50 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 2.2 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

Monitoring of electro-

nics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

At signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

At signal ”0” -30 to 5 V

Input current

At signal ”1” Typically 5 mA at 24 V

Input delay

With ”0” after ”1” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

With ”1” after ”0” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Permissible

closed-cir

cuit current Max. 1.5 mA

Technical

Data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.2 Electronics Block L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A –

6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0

The

L 16 DO DC 24

V/0.5 A electronics block has the following characteris

tics:



16 outputs in two groups, each of eight outputs



Output current of 0.5

A per output



Rated load voltage of 24

V DC



Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

LOAD

VOL

TAGE

A1L+

1 ....

17.... 8

2L+

9 ....

25.... 16

DO 16xDC24V/0.5A

ET200L ON

PROFIBUS-DP

132-1BH00-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-3 View of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-4

shows the block diagram.

17 2

18 3

19 4

20 5

21 6

22 7

23 9

24 10

26 11

27 12

28 13

29 14

30 15

31 16

1L+

1M 2L+

2M 3L+

3M 4L+

4M 5L+

24 V

internal AB

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

ON BF

Figure 8-4 Block diagram of the L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the L

16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0016H

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC

SReverse polarity

protection Yes

SPower failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A

Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A

Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A

SAll other installation

positions

Up to 40 _C Max. 2 A

Galvanic isolation

SBetween channels No

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 V DC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 70 mA

Sfrom load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 50 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 5 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

SMonitoring of electro-

nics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

SAt signal ”1” At least L1+ (– 3 V) or

L2+/L3+ (3 V)

Output current

SAt signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

0.5 A

1 mA to 0.5 A

SAt signal ”0”

(residual current) Max. 1 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

SWith ”0” after ”1” Max. 50 µs

SWith ”1” after ”0” Max. 200 µs

Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible (outputs in same

group only)

SFor performance im-

provement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 100 Hz

SInductive load to

IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 8 Hz

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on circuit interrup-

tion

Typically L1+ (– 55 V) or

L2+/L3+ (– 55 V)

Short-circuit protection

SResponse threshold

Yes

Typically 0.7 A

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.3 Electronics

Block L 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0

The

L 32 DI DC 24

V electronics block has the following characteristics:



32 inputs in two groups, each of 16 outputs



Rated input voltage of 24

V DC



Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

SENSOR

SUPPL

1L+

1 ....

33.... 16

2L+

2M 17....

49.... 32

DI 32xDC24V

ET200L ON

PROFIBUS-DP

131-1BL00-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-5 View of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-6

shows the block diagram.

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 5756 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

5L+

24 V

internal

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

33 2

34 3

35 4

36 5

37 6

38 7

39 9

40 10

42 11

43 12

44 13

45 14

46 15

47 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2524 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ON BF

Internal

power

supply

Figure 8-6 Block diagram of the L 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Block

Diagram

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the technical data of the L 32 DI DC 24

V elec

tronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 150 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

Number of inputs 32

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0015H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC

Maximum number of in-

puts

driven

simultaneously

Galvanic isolation

Between channels No

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 V DC

Power input

from supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 70 mA

from load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 100 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 3.2 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

Monitoring of electro-

nics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value 24 V DC

At signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

At signal ”0” -30 to 5 V

Input current

At signal ”1” Typically 5 mA at 24 V

Input delay

With ”0” after ”1” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

With ”1” after ”0” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Permissible

closed-cir

cuit current Max. 1.5 mA

Technical

Data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.4 Electronics Block L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A –

6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0

The

L 32 DO DC 24

V/0.5

A electronics block has the following characteris

tics:



32 outputs in two groups, each of 16 outputs



Output current of 0.5

A per output



Rated load voltage of 24

V DC



Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

LOAD

VOL

TAGE

A1L+

1 ....

33.... 16

2L+

17....

49....

DO 32xDC24V/0.5A

ET200L ON

PROFIBUS-DP

132-1BL00-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-7 View of the L 32 DO Electronics Block DC 24 V/0.5 A

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-8

shows the block diagram.

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 5756 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

5L+

24 V

internal

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

33 2

34 3

35 4

36 5

37 6

38 7

39 9

40 10

42 11

43 12

44 13

45 14

46 15

47 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2524 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ON BF

Figure 8-8 Block Diagram of the L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the L

32 DO DC 24

V/0.5

electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 150 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of outputs 32

Cable length

SUnshielded Max. 600 m

SShielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0011H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC

SReverse polarity

protection Yes

SPower failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A

Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A

Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A

SAll other installation

positions

Up to 40 _C Max. 2 A

Block

Diagram

Technical data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Galvanic isolation

Between channels No

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 V DC

Power input

from supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 70 mA

from load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 100 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 7 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

Monitoring of electro-

nics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

At signal ”1” At least L1+ (– 3 V) or

L2+/L3+ (3 V)

Output current

At signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

0.5 A

1 mA to 0.5 A

At signal ”0”

(residual current) Max. 1 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

With ”0” after ”1” Max. 50 µs

With ”1” after ”0” Max. 200 µs

Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

For redundant control

of load Possible (outputs in same

group only)

For performance im-

provement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

Resistive load Max. 100 Hz

Inductive load to

IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 0.5 Hz

Lamp load Max. 8 Hz

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on circuit interrup-

tion

Typically L1+ (– 55 V) or

L2+/L3+ (55 V)

Short-circuit protection

Response threshold

Yes

Typically 0.7 A

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.5 Electronics Block L 16 DI/16 D

O D

C 24 V/0.5

A –

6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0

The

L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

A electronics block has the following char

acteristics:



16 inputs in a single group of 16 inputs

–

Rated input voltage of 24

V DC

–

Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)



16 outputs in a single group of 16 outputs

–

Output current of 0.5

–

Rated load voltage of 24

V DC

–

Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

LOAD

VOL

TAGE

A1L+

1 ....

33.... 16

48 17

DI16/DO16xDC24V/0.5A

ET200L ON

PROFIBUS-DP

133-1BL00-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

SENSOR SUPPL

2L+

2M 17....

49.... 32

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-9 View of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-10

shows the block diagram.

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 5756 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

5L+

24 V

internal

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2524 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ON BF

33 2

34 3

35 4

36 5

37 6

38 7

39 9

40 10

42 11

43 12

44 13

45 14

46 15

47 16

Figure 8-10 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the L

16 DI/16 DO

DC 24

V/0.5

A electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of inputs 16

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0017H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 V DC

Maximum number of in-

puts

driven

simultaneously

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A

Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A

Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A

SAll other installation

positions

Up to 40 _C Max. 2 A

Galvanic isolation

SBetween channels No

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 V DC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 70 mA

Sfrom load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 50 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 5 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

SMonitoring of electro-

nics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

SRated value 24 V DC

SAt signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

SAt signal ”0” -30 to 5 V

Input current

SAt signal ”1” Typically 5 mA at 24 V

Input delay

SWith ”0” after ”1” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

SWith ”1” after ”0” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

SPermissible

closed-cir

cuit current Max. 1.5 mA

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

SAt signal ”1” At least L1+ (– 3 V) or

L2+/L3+ ( 3 V)

Output current

SAt signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

0.5 A

1 mA to 0.5 A

SAt signal ”0”

(residual current) Max. 1 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

SWith ”0” after ”1” Max. 50 µs

SWith ”1” after ”0” Max. 200 µs

Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible (outputs in same

group only)

SFor performance im-

provement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 100 Hz

SInductive load to

IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 8 Hz

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on circuit interrup-

tion

Typically L1+ (– 55 V) or

L2+/L3+ (– 55 V)

Short-circuit protection

SResponse threshold

Yes

Typically 0.7 A

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.6 Electronics Block L 16 DI AC 120 V –

6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0

The

L 16 DI AC 120

V electronics block has the following characteristics:



16 inputs, fully isolated



Rated input voltage of 120

VAC



Suitable for switches and proximity switches compatible with

IEC T

ype 2 currents

Figure 8-1

1 shows a view of the L 16 DI AC 120V electronics block.

ET200L

16xAC120V

POWER

SUPPLY

PROFIBUS–DP

x10

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-11 View of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-12

shows the block diagram of the L 16 DI AC 120 V electronics

block.

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Internal

power

supply

21 12

Electronics

29 L1

NTB

120

Figure 8-12 Block Diagram of the L 16 DI AC 120 V Electronic Block

Block

Diagram

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the technical data of the L

16 DI

AC 120

V elec

tronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1916185.5

Weight Approx. 341 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500, 1500, 3000, and

6000 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

Number of inputs 16

I/O Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 002AH

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Supply voltage L1

Rated value 120 VAC

Permissible range 74 to 132 VAC

Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Power failure

withstand time At least 20 ms

Maximum number of

inputs driven

simultaneously

Optical isolation

Between channels Yes

Between L1 and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC

Power input

from

supply

voltage

Max. 90 mA

Power loss of module Typically 5.4 W

Status, Alarms, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Alarms None

Diagnostic function Yes

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red “BF” LED

Monitoring of

electronics power

supply

Green “ON” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value 120 VAC

With signal 1 74 to 132 VAC

With signal 0 0 to 20 VAC

Input current

With signal 1 9 to 27 mA

With signal 0 0 to 4 mA

Input delay

From 0 to 1 2 to 14 ms

From 1 to 0 6 to 25 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 2

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Technical

Data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.7 Electronics Block L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A –

6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0

The

L 16 DO AC 120

V/1.0 A electronics block has the following character

istics:



16 outputs, fully isolated



Output current of 1.0



Rated load voltage of 120

VAC



Suitable for solenoids, AC contactors, and indicator lights

Figure 8-13 shows a view of the L 16 DO AC 120

V/1.0 A electronics block.

ET200L

16xAC120V/1.0A

POWER

SUPPLY

PROFIBUS–DP

x10

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-13 View of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-14

shows the block diagram of the L 16 DO AC 120

V/1.0 A elec

tronics block.

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Internal

power

supply

21 12

Electronics

29 L1

NTB

120

Figure 8-14 Block Diagram of the L 16 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block

Block

Diagram

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-23

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the technical data of the L

16 DO

AC 120

V/1.0

electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1916185.5

Weight Approx. 294 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500, 1500, 3000, and

6000 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of outputs 16

I/O Cable length

SUnshielded Max. 600 m

SShielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0028H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Supply voltage L1

SRated voltage 120 VAC

SPermissible range 74 to 132 VAC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

SPower failure

withstand time At least 20 ms

Aggregate current of outputs (per point)

SHorizontal installation

up to 40_CMax. 1 A

up to 60_C Max. 0.4 A

SAll other installation

positions

up to 40_CMax. 0.4 A

Optical isolation

SBetween channels Yes

SBetween L1 and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage L Max. 170 mA

Power loss of module Typically 18.9 W

Status, Alarms, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Alarms None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red “BF” LED

SMonitoring of

electronics

power supply

Green “ON” LED

Actuator Selection Data

Load voltage L

SRated voltage 120 VAC

SPermissible range 74 to 132 VAC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

Output voltage

SWith signal 1 At least L (– 1.5V)

Output current

SWith signal 1

Rated value

Permissible range

1.0 A Pilot Duty

0.1 to 1.0 A

SWith signal 0

(residual current) Max. 2.6 mA

Zero cross inhibit voltage Max. 60 V

Output delay

(with resistive load) Max. 20 ms

Size of motor starter

SUp to 40_CMax. size 4 acc. to NEMA

SUp to 60_CMax. size 3 acc. to NEMA

Lamp load Max. 50 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible

SFor performance

improvement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 10 Hz

SInductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection No

Technical data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-24 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.8 Electronics Block L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0

A –

6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0

The

L 16 RO DC 24

V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block has the following

characteristics:



16 relay outputs, fully isolated



Output current of 2.0



Rated load voltage of 24 V DC or 120

VAC



Suitable for solenoids, contactors, and indicator lights



Adjacent outputs of 24 V DC and 120 V

AC are permitted

Figure 8-15 shows a view of the L 16 RO DC 24

V/AC 120

V/2.0 A electron

ics block.

ET200L

16xDC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0A

POWER

SUPPLY

PROFIBUS–DP

x10

Receptacle

for labeling strip

132–1JH00–

0XB0

Figure 8-15 View of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-25

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-16

shows the block diagram of the

16 RO DC 24

V/AC 120

V/2.0

A electronics block.

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Internal

power

supply

21 12

Electronics

29 L1

NTB

120

Figure 8-16 Block Diagram of the L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the

L 16 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1916185.5

Weight Approx. 302 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500, 1500, 3000, and

6000 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of outputs 16

I/O Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0026H

Block

Diagram

Technical data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-26 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Supply voltage L1

SRated voltage 120 VAC

SPermissible range 85 to 132 VAC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

SPower failure

withstand time At least 20 ms

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

up to 40_CMax. 2 A

up to 60_CMax. 1 A

SAll other installation

positions

up to 40_CMax. 1 A

Optical isolation

SBetween channels Yes

SBetween L1 and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage L Max. 220 mA

Power loss of module Typically 25.6 W

Status, Alarms, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Alarms None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red “BF” LED

SMonitoring of

electronics

power supply

Green “ON” LED

Actuator Selection Data

Load voltage L

SRated voltage 24 V DC or 120 VAC

SPermissible DC range 4.5 to 30 V DC

SPermissible AC range 6 to 132 VAC

SAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Output voltage

SWith signal 1 At least L (– 1.0V)

Output current

SWith signal 1

Rated value

Permissible range

2.0 A Pilot Duty

10 mA to 2.0 A

SWith signal 0

(residual current) none

Output delay

(with resistive load) Max. 10 ms

Size of motor starter

SUp to 40_CNEMA Size 5

SUp to 60_CNEMA Size 4

Lamp load Max. 50 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible

SFor performance

improvement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 10 Hz

SInductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection No

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-27

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 8-2 Service Life of the Contacts

Resistive Load Voltage Switching Cycles

(Typical)

Resistive load

0.5 A

1.0 A

2.0 A

30 V DC or 250 V AC

800.000

550.000

300.000

Inductive

load (L/R = 7 ms;

power factor = 0.4)

0.5 A

1.0 A

2.0 A

30 V DC or 250 V AC

500.000

300.000

100.000

Mechanical 20.000.000

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-28 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.9 Electronics Block L 8 DI/8 D

O A

C 120 V/1.0

A –

6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0

The

L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120

V/1.0

A electronics block has the following

characteristics:



8 inputs, fully isolated

–

Rated input voltage of 120

VAC

–

Suitable for switches and proximity switches, compatible with IEC

ype 2 currents



8 outputs, fully isolated

–

Output current of 1.0

–

Rated load voltage of 120

VAC

–

Suitable for solenoids, AC contactors, and indicator lights

Figure 8-17 shows a view of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0

A electronics

block.

ET200L

8/DO 8xAC120V/1.0A

POWER

SUPPLY

PROFIBUS–DP

x10

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 8-17 View of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-29

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-18

shows the block diagram of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120

V/1.0

electronics block.

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Internal

power

supply

Electronics

NTB

120

25 16

Figure 8-18 Block Diagram of the L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the

8 DI/8 DO

AC 120

V/1.0

A electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WxHxD

(mm)

14561 85 .5

Weight Approx. 318 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500, 1500, 3000, and

6000kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of inputs 8

Number of outputs 8

I/O Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0029H

Block

Diagram

Technical data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-30 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Supply voltage L1

SRated voltage 120 VAC

SPermissible range 74 to 132 VAC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

SPower failure

withstand time At least 20 ms

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

up to 40_ CMax. 1 A

up to 60_ CMax. 0.4 A

SAll other installation

positions

up to 40_ CMax. 0.4 A

Optical isolation

SBetween channels Yes

SBetween L1 and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage L Max. 130 mA

Power loss of module Typically 12.2 W

Status, Alarms, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Alarms None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ‘‘BF” LED

SMonitoring of

electronics

power supply

Green ‘‘ON” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

SRated value 120 VAC

SWith signal 1 74 to 132 VAC

SWith signal 0 0 to 20 VAC

Input current

SWith signal 1 9 to 27 mA

SWith signal 0 0 to 4 mA

Input delay

SFrom 0 to 1 2 to 14 ms

SFrom 1 to 7 6 to 25 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 2

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Actuator Selection Data

Load voltage L

SRated voltage 120 VAC

SPermissible range 74 to 132 VAC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

Output voltage

SWith signal 1 At least L (– 1.5V)

Output current

SWith signal 1

Rated value

Permissible range

1.0 A Pilot Duty

0.1 to 1.0 A

SWith signal 0

(residual current) Max. 2.6 mA

Zero cross inhibit voltage Max. 60 V

Output delay (with

resistive load) Max. 20 ms

Size of motor starter

SUp to 40_CMax. size 4 acc. to NEMA

SUp to 60_CMax. size 3 acc. to NEMA

Lamp load Max. 50 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible

SFor performance

improvement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 10 Hz

SInductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection No

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-31

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

8.10 Electronics Block L 8 DI A

C 1

20 V/

8 R

O D

C 2

4 V/AC

120 V/2.0

A – 6

ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0

The

L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block has

the following characteristics:



8 inputs, fully isolated

–

Rated input voltage of 120

VAC

–

Suitable for switches and proximity switches, compatible with IEC

ype 2 currents



8 relay outputs, fully isolated

–

Output current of 2.0

–

Rated load voltage of 24 V DC or 120 V

–

Suitable for solenoids, contactors, and indicator lights

–

Adjacent outputs of 24 V DC and 120 V

AC are permitted

Figure 8-19 shows a view of the

L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block.

ET200L

8 AC 120 V/RO 8 DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A

POWER

SUPPLY

PROFIBUS–DP

x10

Receptacle

for labeling strip

1331JH00

0XB0

Figure 8-19 View of the L 8DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 2.0A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-32 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-20

shows the block diagram of the

L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A electronics block.

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connectionA

Internal

power

supply

Electronics

NTB

120

25 16

Figure 8-20 Block Diagram of the L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the

L 8 DI AC 120 V/8 RO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0A electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WxHxD

(mm)

14561 85.5

Weight Approx. 322 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500, 1500, 3000, and

6000kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

SYNC compatibility Yes

Number of inputs 8

Number of outputs 8

I/O Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 0027H

Block

Diagram

Technical data

ET 200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-33

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Supply voltage L1

SRated voltage 120 VAC

SPermissible range 74 to 132 VAC

SFrequency 47 to 63 Hz

SPower failure

withstand time At least 20 ms

Aggregate current of outputs (per point)

SHorizontal installation

up to 40_ CMax. 2 A

up to 60_ CMax. 1 A

SAll other installation

positions

up to 40_ CMax. 1A

Optical isolation

SBetween channels Yes

SBetween L1 and

PROFIBUSDB Yes

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage L Max. 160 mA

Power loss of module Typically 15.1 W

Status, Alarms, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Alarms None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ‘‘BF” LED

SMonitoring of

electronics

power supply

Green ‘‘ON” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

SRated value 120 VAC

SWith signal 1 74 to 132 VAC

SWith signal 0 0 to 20 VAC

Input current

SWith signal 1 9 to 27 mA

SWith signal 0 0 to 4 mA

Input delay

SFrom 0 to 1 2 to 14 ms

SFrom 1 to 7 6 to 25 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 2

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Actuator Selection Data

Load voltage L

SRated voltage 24 V DC or 120 VAC

SPermissible DC range 4.5 to 30 V DC

SPermissible AC range 6 to 132 VAC

SAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Output voltage

SWith signal 1 At least L (– 1.0V)

Output current

SWith signal 1

Rated value

Permissible range

2.0 A Pilot Duty

10 mA to 2.0 A

SWith signal 0

(residual current) none

Output delay (with

resistive load) Max. 10 ms

Size of motor starter

SUp to 40_CNEMA Size 5

SUp to 60_CNEMA Size 4

Lamp load Max. 50 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible

SFor performance

improvement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 10 Hz

SInductive load Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection No

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

8-34 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 8-3 Service Life of the Contacts

Resistive Load Voltage Switching Cycles

(Typical)

Resistive load

0.5 A

1.0 A

2.0 A

30 V DC or 250 V AC

800.000

550.000

300.000

Inductive

load (L/R = 7 ms;

power factor = 0.4)

0.5 A

1.0 A

2.0 A

30 V DC or 250 V AC

500.000

300.000

100.000

Mechanical 20.000.000

200L Electronics Blocks – Technical Data

9-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks –

Technical Data

The

components of the ET

200L-SC can be upgraded with a Smart Connect.

This chapter contains the technical data of the ET

200L-SC electronics

blocks and the IM-SC interface module.

The following table assigns the interface module/electronics blocks to the

terminal blocks.

Table 9-1 Assignment of the Interface Module/ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks to the Terminal Blocks

Terminal Block Interface Module/Electronics

Block Order Number

TB 16IM-SC

(6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0,

6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0)

IM-SC interface module 6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0

TB 16L – (6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0,

6ES7 193 1CH10 0XA0)

ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0

(

6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0) ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0

TB 32L – (6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0,

6ES7 193 1CL10 0XA0)

ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0

(

6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0) ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO

DC 24 V/0.5 A 6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0

Section Topic Page

9.1 Interface Module IM-SC

6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0 9-2

9.2 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BH11-0XB0 9-4

9.3 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A –

6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0 9-7

9.4 Electronics Block L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BL11-0XB0 9-10

9.5 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0 9-13

Introduction

TB´EB

Assignment

Contents of the

Chapter

9-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

9.1 Interface Module IM-SC

6ES7

138-1XL00-0XB0

The IM-SC interface module has the following characteristics:



It connects the TB 16IM-SC terminal block with the PROFIBUS-DP



It is swiveled onto the TB 16IM-SC terminal block.



The PROFIBUS-DP can be connected and disconnected at the IM-SC

interface module by means of the bus terminating switsch. In this way

, a

data line connected at A2 and B2 can be disconnected or looped through.



When the PROFIBUS-DP screw-type terminal is removed, subsequent DP

slaves are disconnected from the PROFIBUS-DP



When the connector for the power supply is removed, the IM-SC is swit

sched of

f. Subsequently connected slaves are not af

fected.

The following figure shows a view of the IM-SC interface module:

Switch for the ter

minating resistor

LEDs for diagnostics

IM-SC

Busterminator

OFF

SIMATIC

ET200L-SC

4L+

5L+

Figure 9-1 IM-SC Interface Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

View

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

9-2 shows the block diagram.

4L+

4M 5L+

24 V

internal

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

ON BF

Connection

for the

TB 16IM-SC terminal block

Connection for the TB 16-SC

terminal block

Figure 9-2 Block Diagram of the IM-SC Interface Module

The following table shows the technical data of the IM-SC interface module:

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

BHT (mm) 5410055

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility

SYNC compatibility

Yes

Number of inputs

Number of outputs

Max. 32

Manufacturer ID 802BH

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 V DC

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Maximum number of in-

puts/outputs driven simul-

taneously

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 V DC

Power loss of module Typically 1.4 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

Group error

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP

Red ”SF” LED

Red ”BF” LED

Monitoring of elec-

tronics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

9.2 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BH1

1-0XB0

The

upgraded L-SC 16 DI DC 24

V electronics block has the following char

acteristics:



16 inputs in two groups, each of 8 inputs



Rated input voltage of 24

VDC



Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)



Connection of a TB 16SC

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

SENSOR

SUPPL

A1L+

1 ....

17... 8

2L+

2M 9...

25... 16

DI 16xDC24V

ET200L-SC BF

PROFIBUS-DP

131-1BH11-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Smart Connect connection

Figure 9-3 View of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 9-4

shows the block diagram.

17 2

18 3

19 4

20 5

21 6

22 7

23 9

24 10

26 11

27 12

28 13

29 14

30 15

31 16

1L+

1M 2L+

2M 3L+

3M 4L+

4M 5L+

24 V

internal AB

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

ON BF

TB 16SC

connection

Figure 9-4 Block Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Block

Diagram

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the technical data of the L-SC 16 DI DC 24

electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility

SYNC compatibility for

SC outputs

Yes

Number of inputs 16

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 8027 H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 VDC

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 VDC

Maximum number of in-

puts

driven

simultaneously

Galvanic isolation

Between channels No

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Power input

from supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 180 mA

from load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 50 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 4.0 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

Monitoring of elec-

tronics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Group error Red ”GE” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value 24 VDC

At signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

At signal ”0” -30 to 5 V

Input current

At signal ”1” Typically 5 mA at 24 V

Input delay

With ”0” after ”1” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

With ”1” after ”0” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Permissible

closed-cir

cuit current Max. 1.5 mA

Technical

Data

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

9.3 Electronics Block L-S

C 1

6 D

O D

C 24 V/0.5

A –

6ES7 132-1BH11-0XB0

The

upgraded L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A electronics block has the following

characteristics:



16 outputs in two groups, each of eight outputs



Output current of 0.5



Rated load voltage of 24

VDC



Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights



TB 16SC connection

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

x10

Smart Connect connection

LOAD

VOL

TAGE

1L+

1 ....

17....

2L+

9 ....

25....

DO 16xDC24V/0.5A

ET200L-SC PROFIBUS-DP

132-1BH11-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Figure 9-5 View of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 9-6

shows the block diagram.

17 2

18 3

19 4

20 5

21 6

22 7

23 9

24 10

26 11

27 12

28 13

29 14

30 15

31 16

1L+

1M 2L+

2M 3L+

3M 4L+

4M 5L+

24 V

internal AB

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

ON BF

16SC

connection

Figure 9-6 Block diagram of the L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

The

following table shows the technical data of the

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

SYNC compatibility

FREEZE compatibility for

SC inputs

Yes

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 8028H

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 VDC

SReverse polarity

protection Yes

SPower failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 VDC

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A

Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A

Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A

SAll other installation

positions

Up to 40 _C Max. 2 A

Galvanic isolation

SBetween channels No

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Power input

Sfrom supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 180 mA

Sfrom load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 50 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 4.0 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

SMonitoring of electro-

nics power supply

SGroup error

Green ”ON” LED

Red ”SF” LED

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

SAt signal ”1” At least L1+ (– 3 V) or

L2+/L3+ (3 V)

Output current

SAt signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

0.5 A

1 mA to 0.5 A

SAt signal ”0”

(residual current) Max. 1 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

SWith ”0” after ”1” Max. 50 µs

SWith ”1” after ”0” Max. 200 µs

Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible (outputs in same

group only)

SFor performance im-

provement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 100 Hz

SInductive load to

IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 8 Hz

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on circuit interrup-

tion

Typically L1+ (– 55 V) or

L2+/L3+ (– 55 V)

Short-circuit protection

SResponse threshold

Yes

Typically 0.7 A

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

9.4 Electronics Block L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V –

6ES7 131-1BL1

1-0XB0

The

upgraded L-SC 32 DI DC 24

V electronics block has the following char

acteristics:



32 inputs in two groups, each of 16 outputs



Rated input voltage of 24

VDC



Suitable for switches, and proximity switches (BEROs)



TB 16SC connection

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

SENSOR

SUPPL

A1L+

1 ....

33... 16

2L+

2M 17...

49... 32

DI 32xDC24V

ET200L-SC BF

PROFIBUS-DP

131-1BL11-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Smart Connect connection

Figure 9-7 View of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 9-8

shows the block diagram.

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 5756 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

5L+

24 V

internal

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

33 2

34 3

35 4

36 5

37 6

38 7

39 9

40 10

42 11

43 12

44 13

45 14

46 15

47 16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2524 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ON BF

TB 16SC

connection

Figure 9-8 Block diagram of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V Electronics Block

Block

Diagram

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the technical data of the L-SC 32 DI DC 24

electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 150 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility Yes

SYNC compatibility for

SC outputs Yes

Number of inputs 32

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 8029H

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) 24 VDC

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) 24 VDC

Maximum number of in-

puts

driven

simultaneously

Galvanic isolation

Between channels No

Between channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Insulation tested with 500 VDC

Power input

from supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 180 mA

from load voltage L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 100 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 4.8 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

Bus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red ”BF” LED

Monitoring of elec-

tronics power supply Green ”ON” LED

Group error Red ”GE” LED

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value 24 VDC

At signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

At signal ”0” -30 to 5 V

Input current

At signal ”1” Typically 5 mA at 24 V

Input delay

With ”0” after ”1” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

With ”1” after ”0” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

Input characteristic To IEC 1131-2 Type 1

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

Permissible

closed-cir

cuit current Max. 1.5 mA

Technical

Data

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

9.5 Electronics Block L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

A –

6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0

The

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

A electronics block has the following

characteristics:



16 inputs in a single group of 16 inputs

–

Rated input voltage of DC 24

–

Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)



16 outputs in a single group of 16 outputs

–

Output current of 0.5

–

Rated load voltage of DC 24

–

Suitable for solenoids, DC contactors, and indicator lights



TB 16SC connection

The following figure shows a view of the electronics block.

LOAD

VOL

TAGE

A1L+

1 ....

33....

48 17

DI16/DO16xDC24V/0.5A

ET200L-SC

PROFIBUS-DP

133-1BL10-0XB0

x10

SUPPLY

POWER

4L+

SENSOR SUPPL

2L+

17....

49.... 32

Receptacle

for labeling strip

Smart Connect connection

Figure 9-9 View of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

Characteristics

View

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure 8-10

shows the block diagram.

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 5756 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

1L+

2L+

3L+

4L+

5L+

24 V

internal

PROFIBUS

address

10

1

PROFIBUS-DP

connection

Galvanic

isolation

Electronics

Internal

power

supply

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2524 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ON BF

33 2

34 3

35 4

36 5

37 6

38 7

39 9

40 10

42 11

43 12

44 13

45 14

46 15

47 16

TB 16SC

connection

Figure 9-10 Block Diagram of the L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A Electronics Block

The

following data shows the technical data of the

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

A electronics block.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions

WHD (mm) 1456060.5

Weight Approx. 130 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5;

500 and 1500 kBaud

Bus protocol PROFIBUS-DP

FREEZE compatibility for

SC outputs Yes

SYNC compatibility for

SC outputs Yes

Number of inputs 16

Number of outputs 16

Cable length

Unshielded Max. 600 m

Shielded Max. 1000 m

Manufacturer ID 802CH

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage for

electronics (4L+, 5L+) DC 24 V

Reverse polarity

protection Yes

Power failure with-

stand time At least 20 ms

Block

Diagram

echnical Data

ET 200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Rated load voltage

(1L+, 2L+ and 3L+) DC 24 V

Number of inputs driven

simultaneously 16

Aggregate current of outputs (per byte)

SHorizontal installation

Up to 30 _C Max. 4 A

Up to 40 _C Max. 3 A

Up to 60 _C Max. 2 A

SAll other installation

positions

Up to 40 _C Max. 2 A

Galvanic isolation

SBetween channels No

SBetween channels and

PROFIBUS-DP Yes

Isolation tested with DC 500 V

Power input

SFrom supply voltage

L4+/L5+ Max. 180 mA

SFrom

load voltage

L1+

and L2+/L3+ (without

load)

Max. 50 mA per load

group

Power loss of module Typically 5 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts None

Diagnostic function Yes

SBus monitoring

PROFIBUS-DP Red LED ”BF”

SMonitoring of elec-

tronics power supply

SGroup error

Green LED ”ON”

Red LED ”SF”

Actuator Selection Data

Input voltage

SRated value DC 24 V

SAt signal ”1” 13 to 30 V

SAt signal ”0” -30 to 5 V

Input current

SAt signal ”1” Typically 5 mA at 24 V

Input delay

SAt ”0” after ”1” 2,0 to 4.5 ms

SAt ”1” after ”0” 2.0 to 4.5 ms

Input Characteristic to IEC 1131-2 Type 1

Connection of 2-wire

BEROs Possible

SPermissible

closed-cir

cuit current Max. 1.5 mA

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

SAt signal ”1” At least L1+ (– 3 V) or

L2+/L3+ (– 3 V)

Output current

SAt signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

0.5 A

1 mA to 0.5 A

SAt signal ”0” (residual

current) Max. 1 mA

Output delay (with resistive load)

SAt ”0” after ”1” Max. 50 µs

SAt ”1” after ”0” Max. 200 µs

Load resistance range 41 W to 28 kW

Lamp load Max. 5 W

Parallel connection of two outputs

SFor redundant control

of load Possible (outputs in same

group only)

SFor performance im-

provement Not possible

Driving a digital input Possible

Switching frequency

SResistive load Max. 100 Hz

SInductive load to

IEC 947-5-1, DC13 Max. 0.5 Hz

SLamp load Max. 8 Hz

Limitation of voltage in-

duced on circuit interrup-

tion

Typically L1+ (– 55 V) or

L2+/L3+ (– 55 V)

Short-circuit protection

SResponse threshold Typically 0.7 A

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

9-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

200L-SC Electronics Blocks – T

echnical Data

10-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

SC Digital Electronic Modules –

Technical Data

Section Topic Page

10.1 Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V 10-2

10.2 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A 10-5

10.3 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A 10-8

10.4 Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V 10-11

10.5 Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A 10-14

10.6 Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V 10-17

Product Name Order Number

Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0

Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0

Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0

Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0

Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0

Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0

Contents of

Chapter

Order Numbers

10-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

10.1 Digital Electronic Module 2DIDC24V

6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0

The

figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the

input module.

The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the input module. The two

LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the cir

cuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through

the transparent part of the labeling strip.

Front elevation Side elevation (rotated)

LED Channel 1

LED Channel 2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown

Figure 10-1 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module

Note

The

status LEDs of the input module indicate the system status.

Order

Number

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

10-2 shows the block diagram of the 2DIDC24V digital electronic

module.

1L+,

2L+

1M, 2M

L+,

M– supply via terminal block

bus

Channel 0

Channel 1

L+

Figure 10-2 Block Diagram of the 2DIDC24V Digital Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2DIDC24V digital electronic module is listed be

low.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 15 g

Module-Specifc Data

Number of inputs 2

Cable length

Unshieded

Shielded

max. 600 m

max. 1000 m

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Current, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V

Number of simultaneously con-

trollable imputs 2

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between different channels

Permissible potential difference

Between different circuits DC 75 V/AC 60 V

Power input

From load voltage L+ –

Power loss of the module typ. 0.4 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status indication green LED per

channel

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions none

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value

At signal ”1”

At signal ”0”

DC 24 V

13 ... 30 V

-3 ... 5 V

Input current

At signal ”1” typ. 7 mA

Input delay

At ”0” to ”1”

At ”1” to ”0”

Input characteristic to

1.2...4.8 ms

IEC 1131, Type 1

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

Permissible closed-circuit

current

possible

max 1.5 mA

Technical

Data

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

10.2 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V0.5A

6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0

The

figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the

output module.

The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the output module. The two

LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the cir

cuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through

the transparent part of the labeling strip.

Front

elevation

Side

elevation (rotated)

LED Channel 1

LED Channel 2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 10-3 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic

Module

Note

The

status LEDs of the output module indicate the system status.

Order

Number

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

When

L+ is connected by means of a mechanical contact, a disturbing pulse

appears at the output with an exponentially increasing width from 8



s at

rated current to 20



s at 10 mA load current. (The time specifications are

based on a threshold of 10

V.)

Figure 10-4 shows the block diagram of the 2DODC24V0.5A digital elec

tronic module.

1L+,

2L+

1M, 2M

L+,

M– supply via terminal block

bus

Channel 0

Channel 1

Figure 10-4 Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V0.5A Digital Electronic Module

Special

Features

Block Diagram

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2DODC24V0.5A digital electronic module is listed

below.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 15 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of outputs 2

Cable length

Unshielded

Shielded

max. 600 m

max. 1000 m

Number

of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V

Total current of the outputs

(per module)

to 40°C

to 60°C

1 A

0.8 A

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between the different

channels

Permissible potential differ-

ence

Between different circuits DC 75 V/AC 60 V

Power input

– From load voltage L+

(without load) 3 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.4 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status indication green LED per

channel

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions none

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

At signal ”1” min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current

At signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

At

signal

”0” (residual cur

rent)

0.5 A

5 mA ... 0.6 A

max. 0.3 mA

Output delay (with resistive

load)

At ”0” to ”1”

At ”1” to ”0”

max. 200 ms

max. 1.3 ms

Load resistance range 48 W to 4.8 kW

Lamp load max. 2.5 W

Parallel switching of 2 outputs

For redundant control of a

load not possible

For performance enhance-

ment possible

Controlling a digital input possible

Switching frequency

With resistive load

With inductive load in ac-

cordance with

IEC 947-5-1, DC 13

With lamp load

max. 100 Hz

max.2 Hz at 0.3 A

max.0.5 Hz at 0.5 A

max. 1 Hz

Inductive switch-off voltage

limited (internally) to typ. L+ (48 V)

Short-circuit protection of the

output yes, electronically 1

Response threshold typ. 0.7...1.8 A

1After

a short-circuit, switch-on under full load

cannot

be guaranteed. Countermeasures are:

Change the signal at the output, or

Interrupt the load voltage of the module, or

Temporarily disconnect the load from the output.

Technical

Data

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

10.3 Digital Electronic Module 2DODC24V2A

6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0

The

following figure shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of

the output module.

The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the input module. The two

LEDs are located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the cir

cuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LEDs are visible through

the transparent part of the labeling strip.

Front elevation Side elevation (rotated)

LED Channel 1

LED Channel 2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 10-5 Front and Side Elevations of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic

Module

Note

The

status LEDs of the output module indicate the system status.

Order

Number

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

When

L+ is connected by means of a mechanical contact, a disturbing pulse

appears at the output with an exponentially increasing width from 5



s at

rated current to 100



s at 10 mA load current. (The time specifications are

based on a threshold of 10

V.)

Figure 10-6 shows the block diagram of the 2DODC24V2A digital electronic

module.

1L+,

2L+

1M, 2M

L+,

M– supply via terminal block

bus

Channel 0

Channel 1

Figure 10-6 Block Diagram of the 2DODC24V2A Digital Electronic Module

Special

Features

Block Diagram

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2DODC24V2A digital electronic module is listed

below.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 15 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of outputs 2

Cable length

Unshielded

Shielded

max. 600 m

max. 1000 m

Number

of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Current, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+ DC 24 V

Total current of the outputs

(per module)

to 40°C

to 60°C

max. 3 A

max. 2 A

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between the different

channels

Permissible potential differ-

ence

Between different circuits DC 75 V/AC 60 V

Power input

From load voltage L+

(without load) 6 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.9 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status indication green LED per

channel

Interrupts none

Diagnostics function none

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

At signal ”1” min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current

At signal ”1”

Rated value

Permissible range

– For 0 to 40°C

– For 40 to 60°C

At

signal

”0” (residual cur

rent)

2 A

5 mA to 2.4 A

5 mA to 1.8 A

max. 0.6 mA

Output delay (with resistive

load)

At ”0” to ”1”

At ”1” to ”0”

max. 200 ms

max. 1.3 ms

Lamp load max. 10 W

Load resistance range 12 W to 4.8 kW

Parallel switching of 2 outputs

For performance enhance-

ment possible

For redundant control of a

load not possible

Controlling a digital input possible

Switching frequency

With resistive load

With inductive load in ac-

cordance with

IEC 947-5-1, DC 13

With lamp load

max. 100 Hz

max. 0.2 Hz at 1 A

max. 0.1 Hz at 2 A

max. 1 Hz

Inductive switch-off voltage

limited (internally) to typ. L+ (48 V)

Short-circuit protection of

the output Yes, electronically

Response threshold typ. 2.8...7.2 A

1After

a short-circuit, switch-on under full load

cannot

be guaranteed. Countermeasures are:

Change the signal at the output, or

Interrupt the load voltage of the module, or

Temporarily disconnect the load from the output.

Technical

Data

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

10.4 Digital Electronic Module 1DIAC120/230V

6ES7 121-1F

A00-0AA0

The

figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the

digital electronic module.

The circuit schematic is shown on the front of the digital electronic module.

The LED is located below the circuit schematic. In the operating state, the

circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip. The LED is visible through

the transparent part of the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

LED Channel 1

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 10-7 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic

Module

Note

The

status LED of the input module indicates the system status.

Order

Number

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

10-8 shows the block diagram of the 1DIAC120/230V digital elec

tronic module.

bus

Figure 10-8 Block diagram of the 1DIAC120/230V Digital Electronic Module

The

1DIAC120/230V electronic module does not require a supply voltage

(L+, M).

Block

Diagram

Special Feature

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 1DIAC120/230V electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 15 g

Module Specific Data

Number of Inputs 1

Cable Length

Unshielded

Shielded

max. 600 m

max. 1000 m

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus yes

Permissible potential difference

Between ground and input AC 240 V

Isolation tested with DC 2500 V

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status indication green LED

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions none

Sensor Selection Data

Input voltage

Rated value

At signal ”1”

At signal ”0”

Frequency range

AC 120/230 V

AC 74 ... 264 V

DC 75 ... 264 V

AC 0 ... 40 V

DC 0 ... 40 V

47...63 Hz

Input current

At signal ”1”

At signal ”0”

typ. 3.,7 mA*

typ. 2.2 mA*

Input delay

At ”0” to ”1”

At ”1” to ”0”

max. 30 ms

Input characteristic in accordance with

IEC 1131, Type 1*

Connection of 2-wire BEROS

Permissible closed-circuit

current

possible

max. 1.5 mA

* With parallel switching of 2 electronic modules,

IEC 1131-2/Type 2 is complied with at AC 120 V.

Technical

Data

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

10.5 Digital Electronic Module 1DOAC120/230V1A

6ES7 122-1F

A00-0AA0

The

figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the

1DOAC120/230V1A

Front elevation

Side elevation

LED Channel 1

Slot 1 is shown.

The used terminals are shaded gray

Figure 10-9 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic

Module

The

1DOAC120/230V1A electronic module does not require a supply volt

age (L+, M).

Order

Number

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

Special Feature

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

10-10 shows the block diagram of the 1DOAC120/230V1A digital

electronic module.

bus

Figure 10-10 Block Diagram of the 1DOAC120/230V1A Digital Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 1DOAC120/230V1A electronic module is listed

below.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 15 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of outputs 1

Cable length

Unshielded

Shielded

max. 600 m

max. 1000 m

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L1

Permissible frequency range

AC 120/230 V

47...63 Hz

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus yes

Permissible potential difference

Between ground and the out-

put AC 240 V

Isolation tested with DC 2500 V

Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status indication green LED

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions none

Actuator Selection Data

Output voltage

At signal ”1” min. L (1 V)

Output current

At signal ”1”

– Rated value

– Permissible range for

00 C to 400 C

– Permissible range for

400 C to 600 C

– Permissible

sur

current

At signal ”0”(residual cur-

rent)

1 A

40 mA ... 1.1 A

40 mA ... 0.6 A

max. 10 A (for 2

half-waves)

max. 3 mA

Output

delay (with

resistive load)

At ”0” to ”1”

At ”1” to ”0”

max. 20 ms

Zero crossing with zero crossing

switch

Size of the motor starter max. size 8

Lamp load

At AC 230 V

At AC 120 V

max. 100 W

max. 50 W

Parallel switching of 2 outputs

For redundant control of a

load

For performance enhance-

ment

possible

not possible

Controlling a digital input only possible with

additional load

Switching frequency

With resistive load

With

inductive load in

accor

dance with

IEC 947-5-1, AC 15

With lamp load

max. 50 Hz

max. 10 Hz

max. 1 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the

output no

Technical

Data

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

10.6 Digital Electronic Module 1DORel.AC230V, DC 24 V to 120 V

6ES7 122-1HA00-0AA0

The

figure below shows you the front elevation and the side elevation of the

1DORel.AC230V digital electronic module.

LED Channel 1

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

6ES7122-1HA01-0AA0

Figure 10-11 Front and Side Elevations of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic

Module

Order

Number

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

10-12 shows you the block diagram of the 1DORel.AC230V digital

electronic module.

bus

L+

1M, 2M

1L+, 2L+

Figure 10-12 Block Diagram of the 1DORel.AC230V Digital Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 1DORel.AC230V

digital

electronic module is listed

below.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions WHD (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 30 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of outputs 1

Contact type 1 x A

Cable length

Unshielded

Shielded

max. 600 m

max. 1000 m

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of relay

L+

Reverse polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between channel and supply

voltage of the relay

yes

Permissible potential difference

Between ground and supply

voltage of the relay

Between ground or supply

voltage of the relay and the

output

DC 75 V, AC 60 V

AC 240 V

Isolation tested with

 Between ground and supply

voltage of the relay

Between ground or supply

voltage of the relay and the

output

AC 1500 V

DC 2500 V

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 15 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.7 W

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status indication green LED

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions none

Actuator Selection Data

Continuous thermal current max. 5 A

Minimum load current 1 mA

Switching capacity and lifetime

of the contacts

For resistive load

For inductive load in accor-

dance with

IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15

see Table 10-1

Lamp load see Table 10-1

Internal contact connection Varistor

rated voltage 275 V

Parallel switching of 2 outputs

For redundant control of a

load

For performance enhance-

ment

possible

not possible

Controlling a digital input possible

Switching frequency

Mechanical

With resistive load

With

inductive load in

accor

dance with IEC 947-5-1

DC13/AC15

With lamp load

max. 10 Hz

max. 1 Hz

max. 0.1 Hz

Technical

Data

SC Digital Electronic Modules – Technical Data

10-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 10-1 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

With Resistive Load

Voltage Current Number of Operations

(Typ.)

DC 24 V 5.0 A 0.1 million

DC 24 V 1.0 A 0.5 million

DC 24 V 0.5 A 1.5 million

DC 60 V 0.5 A 1.0 million

DC 120 V 0.2 A 1.0 million

AC 48 V 5.0 A 0.3 million

AC 60 V 5.0 A 0.2 million

AC 120 V 5.0 A 0.1 million

AC 120 V 1.0 A 1.0 million

AC 120 V 0.5 A 2.5 million

AC 230 V 5.0 A 0.2 million

AC 230 V 1.0 A 0.5 million

AC 230 V 0.5 A 1.5 million

For Inductive Load in Accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC13/AC15 and Lamp

Load

Voltage Current Number of Operations

(Typ.)

DC 24 V 1.0 A 0.1 million

DC 24 V 0.5 A 0.5 million

DC 60 V 0.5 A 0.5 million

DC 120 V 0.2 A 0.1 million

AC 48 V 2.0 A 1.0 million

AC 60 V 2.0 A 1.0 million

AC 120 V 2.0 A 0.5 million

AC 120 V 1.0 A 0.7 million

AC 120 V 0.7 A 1.0 million

AC 120 V 0.5 A 2.0 million

AC 230 V 2.0 A 0.2 million

AC 230 V 1.0 A 0.5 million

AC 230 V 0.5 A 1.0 million

The lifetime is longer with an external suppression circuit.

Digital Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

11-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

SC Analog Electronic Modules –

Parameters

Section Topic Page

11.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 11-2

11.2 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 11-4

11.3 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules 11-6

11.4 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules 11-7

11.5 Conversion and Cycle Times of the Analog Input Channels 11-8

11.6 Connection of Thermocouples 11-9

11.7 Connecting Non-Isolated Voltage Sensors 11-14

11.8 Connecting Current Sensors 11-15

11.9 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors 11-17

11.10 Floating Measuring Sensors 11-18

11.11 Wiring Unused Inputs of Analog Input Modules 11-19

11.12 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 11-20

11.13 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 11-21

11.14 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules 11-22

11.15 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules 11-23

11.16 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of the Analog

Output Modules 11-24

11.17 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs 11-26

11.18 Wiring Unused Analog Output Modules 11-28

11.19 Analog Value Representation in S7 Number Format 11-29

11.20 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S7 Number

Format 11-30

11.21 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Modules in S7

Number Format 11-32

11.22 Analog

Output Ranges for Output

Channels in S7 Number Format

11-37

11.23 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S7 Number

Format 11-39

11.24 Analog Value Representation in S5 Number Format 11-41

11.25 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S5 Number

Format 11-43

11.26 Analog Value Representationfor Analog Input Modules in S5

Number Format 11-45

11.27 Analog

Output Ranges for Output

Channels in S5 Number Format

11-50

11.28 Analog Value Representation for Output Modules in S5 Number

Format 11-52

Contents of the

Chapter

11-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

This

section contains an overview of the parameters of the analog input mod

ules.

The modules use a subset of the parameters and value ranges listed below

depending on their functionality

ou will find the tools for parameterization described in Section 4.1.

In the following table, you will find all the parameters used by analog mod

ules.

Parameter

The following settings are possible for each channel:

Measurement range deactivated (yes/no)

Voltage measurement range

± 80 mV

1 ... 5 V

± 10 V

Current measurement range for 4-wire measuring transducer

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

± 20 mA

Current measurement range for 2-wire measuring transducer

4 ... 20 mA

Resistance measurement range, 4-conductor connection

600 W

Thermal resistance with linearization, 4-conductor connection

Pt 100 climatic range

Pt 100 standard range

Ni 100 standard range

Thermocouples with linearization

Type R

Type J

Type K

Tool

for

Parameterization

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Parameter

Interference frequency suppression

50 Hz interference suppression

60 Hz interference suppression

Smoothing

None

Weak smoothing

Medium smoothing

Strong smoothing

Reference junction

None

Dynamic reference temperature at Pt100 module on A

Dynamic reference temperature

Format (analog value representation)

S5 format

S7 format

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.2 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Each

module is intended for a specific measurement type. Y

ou can select a

measurement range for each channel.

Measurement Type Measurement Ranges Notes

Deactivated Use this parameter if you have not connected a

sensor to this channel and you want to shorten the

module cycle time.

Voltage measurement range " 80 mV ... " 10 V

Current, 4-wire measuring

transducer

" 20 mA; 4...20 mA

Current, 2-wire measuring

transducer 4...20 mA The 2-wire measuring transducers must be oper-

ated via an external voltage source at +24 V.

Resistance measurement

range,

4-conductor connection 0 ... 600 WThe 4-conductor connection gives the maximum

possible

accuracy

The conductor resistances are in

principle fully compensated.

Resistance thermometer with

linearization

4-conductor connection

Platinum and nickel resist-

ance thermometer Temperature characteristics of various resistance

thermometers

(dynamic reference temperature)

are

stored

in the module’

s ROM. The converted analog

value

is shown in units of 0.1 (0.5)*

C in the stan

dard temperature range and 0.01 (0.05)*oC in the

climatic temperature range.

Thermocouples with lineariza-

tion Type R (PtRh-Pt)

Type J (Fe-CuNi)

Type K (NiCr-Ni)

Temperature characteristics of various thermocou-

ples are stored in the module’s ROM. The con-

verted analog value is shown in units

of 0.1 (1)*oCt.

* The values in brackets refer to S5 format.

Measurement

Type/Measurement

Range

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

you have connected a thermocouple, the following options are available to

you for specifying the reference junction:

Reference Junction Notes

None The module records only the temperature difference between the measurement point and the

free ends of the thermocouple.

Dynamic reference

temperature module

on A

Connect a platinum resistance thermometer to the resistance measurement module on slot A

order to record the reference junction in the climatic temperature range. Any thermocouple

types on the remaining slots can then use this reference temperature.

ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect: The reference temperature refers to slot A on the TB16SC

and applies to all other SC modules.

ET 200L-SC IM-SC and Smart Connect: The reference temperature refers to slot A on the

TB 16IM-SC and applies to all other SC modules. Slot A of the TB16 SC cannot generate a

reference temperature.

Dynamic reference

temperature1Select this option if the temperature at your reference junction is constant or the temperature

at the reference junction is recorded by another module. You can specify the temperature in

the reference temperature parameter and adjust it dynamically in RUN mode.

1In the case of the ET 200L-SC, the dynamic reference temperature is only possible with S7 masters.

Here

you can enter the reference junction temperature in the climatic temper

ature range for recording temperatures using thermocouples (in S7 number

format: 0.01

C and in S5 number format: 0.05

oC).

ou can update this parameter using your application program.

ou can, for instance, record the reference junction temperature via another

module.

In the case of the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC, entering the reference

temperature is only possible with S7 masters.

The frequency of your AC power supply can interfere with the measured

value particularly in the case of low voltage ranges and thermocouples. Enter

the mains frequency of your system.

The various measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Y

ou can

choose between no, weak, medium and strong smoothing for each module.

The stronger the smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter

The analog input module supplies its information in S5 or S7 number format,

depending the parameterization.

Reference

Junction

Reference

Temperature

Interference

Frequency

Suppression

Smoothing

Format

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.3 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

you have not set the parameters of the relevant module using the specified

software (Chapter 4), the default settings apply to all input channels after a

restart. Specifically

, this means:

Table 11-1 Default Parameters of the Analog Input Modules

Parameters Default Value

Measurement type Each module is intended for a specific

measurement type.

Measurement Range

Module type for voltage input " 10 V

Module type for current input 4 ... 20 mA

Module type for resistance input Pt 100 standard

Module type for thermocouple input Thermocouple type K

Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz

Smoothing None

Reference junction None

Reference temperature value 0000H

Format S7 format

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.4 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules

This

section describes:



The dependency of analog input values on the load power supply of the

analog modules and the operating states of the CPU



The behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the ana

log values in each value range



The ef

fect of faults on the analog modules

The behavior of the analog input modules depends on which part of the value

range the input values are in.

Table 11-2 Effect of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ on the Analog Input Values

Operating Mode of the CPU Supply Voltage L+

at the Analog

Input Value of the Analog Module

at the Analog

Module S7 Number Format S5 Number Format

POWER ON RUN L+ applied Process value Process value

7FFFH until the conclusion

of the 1st conversion after

the parameterization of the

module.

7FFFH until the conclusion

of the 1st conversion after

the parameterization of the

module.

L+ not applied 7FFFH7FFFH

POWER ON STOP L+ applied Process value Process value

7FFFH until the conclusion

of the 1st conversion after

the parameterization of the

module.

7FFFH until the conclusion

of the 1st conversion after

the parameterization of the

module.

L+ not applied 7FFFH7FFFH

POWER OFF – L+ applied – –

L+ not applied – –

Introduction

Extreme Range of

the Analog Signals

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.5 Conversion and Cycle Times of the Analog Input Channels

this section, you will find the definitions and interrelationships of the con

version time and cycle time for analog input modules.

The conversion time consists of the basic conversion time and additional pro

cessing times of the module. The basic conversion time depends directly on

the conversion process (integrated process, successive approximation) of the

analog input channel. In integrating conversion processes, the integration

time is included directly with the conversion time. The integration time is

dependent on the interface frequency suppression.

Analog/digital conversion and transfer of the digitized measured values to the

SC bus are sequential. In other words, the analog input channels are con

verted one after the other

. The cycle time (i.e. the time until another analog

input value is converted) is the sum of the conversion times of the activated

analog input channels of an analog input module (see Chapter 12). Y

should activate unused analog input channels to reduce the cycle time.

The transfer of the digitized measured values to the system depends on the

interface used and the degree of expansion of the Smart Connect.

If you are using an ET 200L-SC with analog SC modules, you must allow the

following times for the transmission of the digitized measured values:



12 ms for each analog module



An additional 10 ms for each 2 AI TC SC module for which you have set

the reference temperature transfer parameter (dynamically or from the

dynamic reference temperature module on slot A)

The total cycle time thus depends on the cycle time in the SC modules (see

Chapter 12) plus the cycle times to the system, as described above.

Conversion

time

Cycle T

ime in a

Module

Cycle T

ime to the

System

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.6 Connecting Thermocouples

Thermocouples

are used to measure temperature.There are various types of

thermocouple, which dif

fer with regard to their temperature range and output

voltage, depending on the material of their wires.

A thermocouple assembly consists of:



The thermocouple itself (sensor)



The required built-in and connected components.

e t

hermocoupl

e i

tsel

f c

onsist

s o

f tw

o w

ire

s m

e o

f dif

ferent metals or metal

alloys, the ends of which are soldered or welded together

. Thermocouples are

categorized into dif

ferent types (e.g. R, J, K) according to the combination of

materials used. The measurement principle is the same for all thermocouple

types.

°C

Trimming

resistor

Supply conductor (Cu)

Equalizing conductor

Reference junction

Connecting point

Thermocouple with plus and mi

nus components

Measurement point

Measurement point for thermal e.m.f.

Figure 11-1 Structure of Thermocouples

the measurement point is subjected to a dif

ferent temperature to the free

end of the thermocouple, a potential dif

ference develops between the free

ends, which is referred to as the thermal e.m.f.

The thermal e.m.f. depends on the difference between the temperature of the

measurement point and the temperature at the free ends of the reference junc

tion, as well as the combination of materials used in the thermocouple. A

thermocouple always measures a temperature dif

ference, so to determine the

temperature of a measurement point the free ends at a reference junction

must be kept at a known temperature.

Structure of

Thermocouples

How

Thermocouples

Work

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

have various options for measuring the reference junction temperature in

order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the temperature dif

ference

between the reference junction and the measurement point.

Table 11-3 Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature

Option Notes Reference Junction

Parameters

No compensation When

you only want to measure the tempera

ture difference between the measurement

point and the reference junction.

None

Use of a compensating box in the supply

conductors of a single thermocouple You

have already measured and compensated

the reference junction temperature using a

compensating box looped into the supply

conductors of a single thermocouple. No fur-

ther processing on the part of the module is

required.

None

Use of a resistance thermometer to mea-

sure the reference junction temperature

(recommended method)

You can measure the reference temperature

using a resistance thermometer (platinum),

and have

the module calculate it for any ther

mocouple of this terminal block.

Dynamic

reference

tem

perature module on A

Constant reference junction temperature

(thermostat, ice bath) If the reference junction temperature is

constant and known, you can specify this

value in the dynamic parameters.

Dynamic

reference

tem

perature

Distribution of thermocouples with the

same reference junction across several

modules

Use a resistance measurement module with a

connected dynamic reference temperature

module, which measures the reference junc-

tion

temperature, and set the parameters of the

reference junctions of the thermocouples as

described

above

(dynamic reference tempera

ture

module on A). Read the climatic temper

ature into the CPU, and pass the value via

SFC55 to the other module.

Dynamic

reference

tem

perature

Compensation of

the Reference

Junction

Temperature

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Connect

the thermocouple to the inputs of the modules either directly or via

equalizing conductors. Each channel, independently of the other channel, can

use any thermocouple type supported by the analog input module.

Slot A

AI TC

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

M+

M–

M+

M–

Figure 11-2 Connecting

Insulated Thermocouples W

ithout Compensation, W

ith Internal Compensation, or Use of

the

Reference Temperature (Example TB 16SC)

Connecting

Thermocouples

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

you use non-insulated thermocouples, you must be careful to comply with

the permitted common-mode voltage.

The thermocouples can be extended from their connecting point via equaliz

ing conductors to a point with as constant a temperature as possible (refer

ence junction).

The equalizing conductors are made of the same material as the wires of the

thermocouple. The supply conductors are of copper

. In this case, internal

compensation must not be set. Ensure that the polarity of the connection is

correct, since otherwise serious measurement errors occur

The ef

fect of temperature fluctuations on the reference junction can be com

pensated for by an equalizing circuit (e.g. by means of a compensating box

for a reference junction outside the terminal block or by means of internal

compensation for a reference junction in the terminal block). In this case, the

equalizing conductors must lead to the terminal block.

The ef

fect of temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (e.g.

terminal box) can be equalized by means of a compensating box.

The compensating box contains a bridge circuit, which is compensated for a

specified reference junction temperature (compensating temperature). The

connections for the ends of the equalizing conductor of the thermocouple

form the reference junction.

If the actual reference temperature dif

fers from the compensating tempera

ture, the temperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. The result is a

positive or negative compensation voltage, which is added to the thermal

e.m.f.

o compensate the analog input modules, compensating boxes with the

ref-

ence junction temperatur

e of 0

must be used.

Note:

The compensating box must be supplied potential-free.

The power supply unit must have suf

ficient interference filtering (e.g. by

means of a grounded shielding winding).

Non-Insulated

Thermocouples

Extension to a

Reference

Junction

Equalizing Circuit

Use of a

Compensating Box

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the analog modules of a ter

minal block have the same reference junction, compensate them as follows:

Slot A

AI RTD Slot

Slot

AI TC

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

M– M–

M+ M+

M+ IC+

M– IC–

only

for an ungrounded

thermocouple

Figure 11-3 Connecting Insulated Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation, via a Resistance

Thermometer Connected to the Resistance Measurement Module, to Slot A of the Terminal Block

(Example TB 16SC)

Connect

the resistance thermometer to the module on slot A. Note the para

meterization of the reference junction for each thermocouple channel.

In Figures 1

1-2 and 1

1-3, the abbreviations have the following meanings:

IC +:

Constant current line (positive)

IC–:

Constant current line (negative)

M +:

Measurement line (positive)

M–:

Measurement line (negative)

Compensation by

Measurement of

the Reference

Junction

Temperature

Abbreviations

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.7 Connecting Non-Isolated Voltage Sensors

Figure

1-4 shows how to connect voltage sensors to an analog input module.

Slot A

"10V/1...5V

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

M+

M– M–

M+

Figure 11-4 Connecting Voltage Sensors (Example TB 16SC)

4-wire

measuring transducers with voltage output are connected like voltage

sensors.

Voltage

Sensors

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.8 Connecting Current Sensors

You

can only connect 4-wire measuring transducers or 2-wire measuring

transducers with external supply voltage to the modules.

Figure 1

1-5 shows you how to connect current sensors as 4-wire measuring

transducers to analog input modules.

= auxiliary power

Slot A

AI 4...20 mA/

"20mA

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

M+

M–

M+

M–

Sensor,

e.g.

pressure

gauge

–

4-wire

measuring

transducer

4-wire

measuring

transducer

–

U H

Figure 11-5 Connecting 4-Wire Measuring Transducers (Example TB 16SC)

Supply

oltage of

the Sensors

Connecting 4-Wire

Measuring

Transducers

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

1-6 shows you how to connect 2-wire measuring transducers with an

external power supply to current input modules.

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

M+

M–

M+

M–

–

2-wire

measuring

transducer

+24V

–

2-wire

measuring

transducer

+24V

Slot A

AI 4...20 mA/

Figure 11-6 Connecting 2-wire measuring transducers (Example TB 16SC)

Connecting

2-W

ire

Measuring

Transducers

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.9 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors

The

resistance thermometers and resistors are measured by means of a 4-con

ductor system. A constant current is fed via terminals IC + and IC – to the

resistance thermometers and resistors. The resulting voltage at the resistance

thermometer and resistor is measured via terminals M

and M

–. V

ery pre

cise measurement results are thus obtained at the 4-conductor connection.

Figure 1

1-7 shows how to implement the 4-conductor connection for resist

ance thermometers/resistors.

Slot A

AI RTD

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

M+ IC+

M– IC–

Figure 11-7 4-Conductor Connection for Resistance Thermometers and Resistors

(Example TB 16SC)

4-Conductor

Connection

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.10 Floating Measuring Sensors

the case of floating measuring sensors, potential dif

ferences can occur be

tween the individual measuring sensors and in comparison to M. These po

tential dif

ferences can also be caused by malfunctions or the spatial distribu

tion of the measuring sensors. Ensure that U

does not exceed the permitted

value (e.g. by using an equalizing conductor).

Floating

Measuring

Sensors

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.11 Wiring Unused Inputs of Analog Input Modules

avoid malfunctions, you should deactivate unused channels of analog in

put modules using the configuration tool and wire as follows:



In the case of analog input modules for voltage, current and thermocou

ples:

Insert a bridge between M+ and M–, and connect it to the ground (M) of

the terminal block.



In the case of analog input modules for resistance thermometers:

Insert a bridge between M+ and M–, and connect it to the ground (M) of

the terminal block. IC+ and IC– remain unwired.



In the case of the 2 AI HS I analog input module

(6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0):

Leave the inputs of the unused channel unwired.

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.12 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

This

section contains an overview of the parameters of the analog output

modules.

The modules use a subset of the parameters and value ranges listed below

depending on their functionality

The parameterization tools are described in Chapter 4.

The

table 11-4 shows which parameters are used by the analog output mod

ules.

Table 11-4 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameters

The following settings are possible:

Measurement range deactivated (yes/no)

Voltage range

1 ... 5 V

± 10 V

Current range

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

Tool

for

Parameterization

Parameters of the

Analog Output

Modules

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.13 Notes on the Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

You

specify the output type by selecting the corresponding module type. For

each module type, you have the option of entering an output range of the pa

rameters or value ranges listed below

Table 11-5 Output Types/Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules

Output

ype Output Range Notes

Voltage 1 ... 5 V

± 10 V Wire the S+ and S– sense inputs of the modules

directly to the load to be driven in order to com-

pensate for line effects.

Current 0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

Output

Type/Output

Range

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.14 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

you have not set the parameters of the corresponding module using the

specified software (Chapter 4), the default settings apply to all output chan

nels after a restart. Specifically

, this means:

Table 11-6 Default Parameters of the Analog Output Modules

Parameter Default Value

Output type Each module is intended for a specific

output type.

Output Range

Module type for voltage " 10 V

Module type for current 4 ... 20 mA

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-23

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.15 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules

This

section describes the following:



The ef

fect of the load power supply of the analog modules and the operat

ing modes of the CPU on the analog output values



The behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the ana

log values in the relevant value range



The ef

fect of errors on the analog modules

Table 11-7 Effect of the Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ on the Analog Output Values

Operating Mode of the

CPU

Supply Voltage L+

at the Analog Mo

-Output Value of the Analog Output Module

CPU at the Analog Mo-

dule S7 Number Format S5 Number Format

POWER ON RUN L+applied CPU values CPU values

By the conclusion of the 1st

conversion ...

after power on, a signal of

0 mA or 0 V is output.

after parameterization, a

signal of 0 mA or 0 V is

output.

By the conclusion of the 1st

conversion ...

after power on, a signal of

0 mA or 0 V is output.

after parameterization, a

signal of 0 mA or 0 V is

output.

L+ not applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V

POWER ON STOP L+ applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V

0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V

L+ not applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V

POWER OFF – L+applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V

L+ not applied 0 mA / 0 V 0 mA / 0 V

Introduction

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-24 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.16 Conversion, Cycle, Settling and Response Times of the Analog Out-

put Modules

this section, you will find the definition and interrelationships of the rele

vant times for the analog output modules.

The conversion time of the analog output modules includes transferring the

digitized output values from internal memory after a message ends, and digi

tal/analog conversion.

The analog output modules are single-channel, so the internal cycle time cor

responds to the conversion time described above.

The data in the analog modules is transmitted sequentially by means of the

appropriate interface. The cycle time (i.e. the time that elapses before an ana

log module is addressed again) depends on the interface used and the number

of parameterized analog modules.

Conversion Time

Cycle T

ime in a

Module

Cycle T

ime of the

System

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-25

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

settling time (t

to t

), which is the time from when the converted value

is applied to when the specified value is obtained at the analog output, de

pends on the load. Distinctions must be drawn between ohmic, capacitive and

inductive load.

The response time (t

to t

), which is the time from when the digital output

values apply in the internal memory of the appropriate interface to when the

specified value is reached at the analog output, is, in the worst case, the sum

of the cycle time and the settling time. The worst case is when the analog

channel is converted just before transfer of a new output value to the inter

face, and is only transferred again after transfer and conversion of the other

channels (cycle time).

Figure 1

1-8 shows the response time of the analog output channels.

t1t2

= response

time

tZ =

cycle time, which corresponds to n



transfer time +1



conversion time

(n = activated modules)

tE =

settling time

t1 =

new digitized output value applies

t2 =

output value accepted and converted

t3=

specified output value

Figure 11-8 Response Time of the Analog Output Channels

Analog Output

Module Settling

Time

Response Time

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-26 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.17 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs

the figures below

, the abbreviations have the following meanings:

QI+:

Output current

QV+:

Output voltage

S +:

Sensor line (positive)

S –:

Sensor line (negative)

QV–/QI–:

Return line for load (ground connection)

RL:

Load resistance

The figures below show you how to connect loads and actuators to the cur

rent or voltage outputs of the analog output modules.

Figure 1

1-9 shows an example of the wiring on an electronic module.

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

QI+

QI–

Slot A

AO 4...20 mA/

0...20mA

Figure 11-9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Current Output (Example TB 16SC)

Connecting Loads

to a Current

Output

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-27

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

you connect the load to the voltage output via a 4-wire circuit, high accu

racy is obtained.

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

QV+

QV–

S–

Slot A

AO "10V/1..5V

Figure 11-10 Connecting Loads/Actuators to a Voltage Output via a 4-Wire Circuit (Example TB 16SC)

The

sensor lines (S +, S –) must be connected directly to the load. The volt

age is thus measured and adjusted directly on the load.

ou can also use only QV+ and QV– by bridging QV+ with S+ and QV–

with S– on the terminal block. This entails a loss of accuracy

. In this case, the

line resistances are not compensated.

S + and S – must not remain unwired.

Connecting Loads

to a V

oltage

Output

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-28 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.18 Wiring Unused Analog Output Modules

avoid faults, you must wire unused channels of analog output modules as

follows:



In the case of analog output modules for voltage:

Insert a bridge between QV+ and S+ and between QV– and S– .



In the case of analog output modules for current:

No wiring is required.

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-29

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.19 Analog

alue Representation in S7 Number Format

this section, the analog values are shown in S7 number format for all mea

surement ranges or output ranges that you can use with the SC analog mod

ules.

All modules use the same analog value representation, but their resolution

varies.

The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values with the

same rated range.

Analog values are represented as fixed-point numbers in two’

s complement

form. The assignment is as follows:

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109876543210

Value of

bits 215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

the resolution of an analog module is less than 16 bits, the analog value is

stored on the module with left justification. ”0” is written to the unused low-

value positions.

Example

In the following example, you see how ”0” is written to the unused positions

when the resolution is low

Bit pattern of a 14-bit and a 12-bit analog value

Resolution Analog value

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

14-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

12-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Analog

alue

Representation

with 16-Bit

Resolution

Resolution Less

Than 16 Bits

Example

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-30 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.20 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S7 Number For-

mat

The

input ranges contained in T

ables 1

1-8 to 1

1-10 are defined in two’

s com

plement representation:

Table 11-8 Bipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured

Value in %

Data Word Range

Value in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

32767 u117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange

27649 100.004 0 110110000000001

27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0.003617 0 000000000000001

00.000 0 000000000000000Rated range

– 1 – 0.003617 1 111111111111111

– 27648 – 100.000 1 001010000000000

– 27649 100.004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange

– 32512 – 117.593 1 000000100000000

– 32768 t– 117.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Table 11-9 Unipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured

Value in %

Data Word Range

Value in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

32767 u117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange

27649 100.004 0 110110000000001

27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0.003617 0 000000000000001Rated range

0 0.000 0 000000000000000

– 1 – 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange

– 4864 – 17.593 1 110110100000000

– 32768 t– 17.593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Input

Ranges

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-31

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 11-10 Life-Zero Input Ranges

Units Measured

Value in %

Data Word Range

Value in % 215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

32767 u117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow

32511 117.589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overrange

27649 100.004 0 110110000000001

27648 100.000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0.003617 0 000000000000001Rated range

0 0.000 0 000000000000000

– 1 – 0.003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Underrange

– 4864 – 17.593 1 110110100000000

32767 t– 17.593 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Open circuit

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-32 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.21 Analog

alue Representation for Analog Input Modules in S7 Num-

ber Format

The

tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the

individual measurement ranges of the analog input modules. The table values

apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges.

The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various mea

surement ranges.

Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the

following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units.

For the corresponding binary representation of the measured values, see the

tables in Section 1

1.20.

Measured

Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range

Dec. Hex. ± 10 V ± 80 mV

u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u11.759V Overflow

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 94.1 mV Overrange

27649 6C01

100.000 % 27648 6C00 10 V 80 mV Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 V 2.89 V

0 % 0 0 0 V 0 V

– 0.003617 % – 1 FFFF –361.7 V– 2.89 V

– 100.000 % – 27648 9400 – 10 V – 80 mV

– 27649 93FF Underrange

– 117.593 % – 32512 8100 -11.759 V -94.1 mV

t 117.593 % –32768 8000 t-11.759V t-94.1mV Underflow

How to Read the

Measurement

Tables

Voltage

Measurement

Range +10 V and

+80 mV

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-33

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Measured

Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range

Dec. Hex. 1 ... 5 V

u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u5.704 V Overflow

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 5.704 V Overrange

27649 6C01

100.000 % 27648 6C00 5 V Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 V

0 % 0 0 1 V

– 1 FFFF Underrange

–17.593 % – 4864 ED00 0.296 V

t–17.593 % 32767 7FFF t 0.296 V Open circuit

Measured

Value in % System Current Measurement Range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA

u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u23.52 mA Overflow

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overrange

27649 6C01

100.000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA

0 % 0 0 0 mA

– 0.003617 % – 1 FFFF – 723.4 nA

– 100.000 % – 27648 9400 – 20 mA

– 27649 93FF Underrange

– 117.593 % – 32512 8100 – 23.52 mA

t–117.593 % – 32768 8000 t– 23.52 mA Underflow

Voltage

Measurement

Range

1...5 V

Current

Measurement

Range

20 mA

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-34 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Measured

Value in % System Current Measurement Range

Dec. Hex. 4 ... 20 mA

u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u22.81 mA Overflow

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 22.81 mA Overrange

27649 6C01

100.000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA

0 % 0 0 4 mA

– 1 FFFF Underrange

– 17.593 % – 4864 ED00 1.185 mA

t– 17.593 % 32767 7FFF t1.185 mA Open circuit

Measured

Value in % System Resistance-Type Sensor

Dec. Hex. 600 

u117.589 % 32767 7FFF u705.53 WOverflow

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 705.53 WOverrange

27649 6C01

100.000 % 27648 6C00 600 WRated range

0.003617 % 1 1 21.70 mW

0 % 0 0 0 W

– 1 FFFF *Underrange

– 17.593 % – 4864 ED00 *

t– 17.593 % – 32768 8000 * Underflow

*Polarity

reversal of IC+, IC

Current

Measurement

Range

4...

0 mA

Resistance-Type

Sensor 0...600

W

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-35

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following two tables show the analog value representation for tempera

ture sensors of various types in various temperature ranges.

System Temperature Range for Thermoresistors

Climatic (1 Digit

= 0.01 oC) Standard (1 Digit = 0.1 oC)

Dec. Hex. Pt100 Pt100 Ni100

32767 7FFF Overflow

*155 oC *1000 oC *295 oCOverrange

130 oC 850 oC 250 oCRated range

1000 10 oC 100 oC 100 oC

1 1 0.01 oC 0.1 oC 0.1 oC

0 0 0.00 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC

–1 FFFF – 0.01 oC– 0.1 oC – 0.1 oC

– 120 oC – 200 oC– 60 oC

Underrange

*– 145 oC *–243 oC*– 105 oC

–32768 8000 Underflow

* Overrange

and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve as it leaves the

linearized rated range is retained.

Analog

alue

Representation for

Temperature

Sensors

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-36 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

System Temperature Range for Thermocouples

Standard (1 Digit = 0.1 oC)

Dec. Hex. Type R Type J Type K

32767 7FFF Overflow

*2019 oC*1450 oC *1622 oCOverrange

1769 oC 1200 oC 1372 oCRated range

10000 1000 oC 1000 oC 1000 oC

1 1 0.1 oC 0.1 oC 0.1 oC

0 0 0.0 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC

– 1 FFFF – 0.1 oC –0.1 oC – 0.1 oC

– 50 oC– 210 oC – 270 oC

Underrange

*– 170 oC *– 330 oC*– 390 oC

– 32768 8000 Underflow

* Overrange

and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve as it leaves the

linearized rated range is retained.

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-37

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.22 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S7 Number Format

The

output ranges shown in the following tables are defined for the analog

output modules.

Table 11-11 Bipolar Output Ranges

Units Data Word Output Value

in %

Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

in %

w32512 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0

Overflow

32511 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 117.589 Overrange

27649 0 110110000000001 100.004

27648 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.000

1 0 000000000000001 0.003617

0 0 000000000000000 0.000 Rated range

– 1 1 111111111111111 –0.003617

– 27648 1 001010000000000 –100.000

– 27649 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.004 Underrange

– 32512 1 000000100000000 –117.593

v 32513 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x

0 %

Underflow

Table 11-12 Unipolar Output Ranges

Units Data Word Output Value

in %

Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

in %

w32512 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x 0

Overflow

32511 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 117.589 Overrange

27649 0 110110000000001 100.004

27648 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.000

1 0 000000000000001 0.003617 Rated range

0 0 000000000000000 0.000

– 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0.000

Restricted to

rated range

lower limit,

– 32512 1 000000100000000

lower

limit

0 V or 0 mA

v 325131 0 0 0 0 0 00xxxxxxxx

0 %

Underflow

Output

Ranges

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-38 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 11-13 Life-Zero Output Ranges

Units Data Word Output Value

in %

Range

215 214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

in %

w 32512 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x

0 %

Overflow

32511 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 117.589 Overrange

27649 0 110110000000001 100.004

27648 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100.000

1 0 000000000000001 0.003617 Rated range

0 0 000000000000000 0.000

– 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 – 0.003617 Underrange

– 6912 1 110010100000000 –25.000

– 6913 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Restricted to

overrange

– 32512 1 000000100000000

– 25.000 overrange

lower limit,

0 V or 0 mA

v – 32513 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x – 25 % Underflow

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-39

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.23 Analog

alue Representation for Output Modules in S7 Number For-

mat

The

tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the

individual measurement ranges of the analog output modules. The table val

ues apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges.

The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various mea

surement ranges.

Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the

following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units.

Measured

Value in % System Voltage Range

Dec. Hex.±10 V

118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, no voltage and no

current

117.593 % 32512 7F00 0.00 V

current

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overrange

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 10 V Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV

0 % 0 0 0 V

– 0.003617 % – 1 FFFF – 361.7 µV

– 100 % – 27648 9400 – 10 V

– 27649 93FF Underrange

117.593 % – 32512 8100 – 11.76 V

–117.596% – 32513 80FF 0.00 V Underflow, no voltage and no

current

– 118.519 % – 32768 8000 0.00 V

current

How to Read the

Measurement

Tables

Voltage Range

10 V

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-40 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Measured

Value in % System Voltage Range

Dec. Hex.1 ... 5 V

118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, no voltage and no

current

117.593 % 32512 7F00 0.00 V

current

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 5.70 V Overrange

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 5 V Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 1V+144.7µV

0 % 0 0 1 V

– 1 FFFF 1V-144.7 µVUnderrange

– 25 % – 6912 E500 0 V

– 6913 E4FF 0.00 V Impossible; output value

restricted to 0 V

117.593 % – 32512 8100 0.00 V

restricted to 0 V

- 117.596 % – 32513 80FF 0.00 V Underflow, no voltage and no

current

– 118.519 % – 32768 8000 0.00 V

current

System Current range

Dec. Hex.0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA

118.5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, no

voltage and no

117.593 % 32512 7F00 voltage and no

current

117.589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange

27649 6C01

100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Rated range

0.003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 4mA+578.7 nA

0 % 0 0 0 mA 4 mA

– 1 FFFF 0 mA 4mA-578.7 nA Underrange

– 25 % – 6912 E500 0 mA 0 mA

– 6913 E4FF 0 mA 0 mA Impossible;

output value

– 117.593 % – 32512 8100 0 mA 0 mA output value

restricted

to 0 mA

- 117.596 % – 32513 80FF 0 mA 0 mA Underflow, no

voltage and no

– 118.519 % – 32768 8000 0 mA 0 mA voltage and no

current

Voltage

Range

1...5 V

Current range

0...20 mA and

4...20 mA

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-41

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.24 Analog

alue Representation in S5 Number Format

this section, the dif

ferences between the analog value representation in S5

number format and S7 number format are explained.

The measurement and output ranges are always represented with left justifi

cation, with the exception of temperature ranges. T

emperature ranges

(PT100, Ni100, thermocouples) refer to bit 3, with right justification.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109876543210

Value 212 211 210 29282726252423222120x F Ü

Bits Ü, F and x are reserved for diagnostic functions:

Bit Meaning

Bit 20 = Ü Overflow bit

Bit 21 = F Fault (open circuit)

Bit 22 = x Not used

The

individual measurement ranges are represented as follows:

Table 11-14 Representation of the Measurement Ranges for Analog Inputs

Measurement range Representation in S5

Number Format Representation in S7

Number Format

±80 mV

±10 V

±20 mA

– 2048...+2048 –27648...+27648

1...5 V; 4...20 mA 512...+2560 0...+27648

PT100 Standard 0.5 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit

–100...+850 oC –200...+1700

– 200...+850 oC– 2000...+8500

PT100 climatic 0.05 oC/digit 0.01 oC/digit

– 120...+130 oC– 2400...+2600 –12000...+13000

Ni100 standard 0.5 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit

– 60...+250 oC– 120...+500 –600...+2500

Resistor

0...600 W0...+2048 0...+27648

Thermocouple type J 1 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit

– 210...+1200 oC– 2100...+12000

–200...+1200 oC –200...+1200 oC

Thermocouple type K 1 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit

– 270...+1372 oC– 2700...+13720

–100...+1369 oC –100...+1369 oC

Measurement

Ranges

for

Analog

Electronic

Modules

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-42 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 11-14 Representation of the Measurement Ranges for Analog Inputs

Measurement range Representation in S7

Number Format

Representation in S5

Number Format

Thermocouple type R 1 oC/digit 0.1 oC/digit

– 50...+1769 oC– 50...+1769 –500...+17690

Table 11-15 Representation of the Measurement Rangesfor Analog Outputs

Output Range Representation in S5

Number Format Representation in S7

Number Format

±10 V –1024...+1024 – 27648...+27648

1...5 V

0...20 mA 0...1024 0...+27648

4...20 mA

Overrange 117.59%

(as S7)



Overflow value

Greatest overrange value +1



Underflow value

Greatest underrange value –1

In both cases, the 0 (overflow) bit is set for inputs.

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-43

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.25 Analog Measurement Ranges for Input Channels in S5 Number For-

mat

The

input ranges contained in T

ables 1

1-16 to 11-18 are defined in two’

complement representation:

Table 11-16 Bipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured

Value in %

Data Word Range

Value in % 212 211 210 29282726252423222120xFÜ

2409 u117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

2408 117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange

2049 100.05 0100000000001000

2048 100.000 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0.0488 0000000000001000

00.000 0000000000000000Rated range

– 1 – 0.0488 1111111111111000

– 2048 – 100.000 1100000000000000

– 2049 – 100.05 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Underrange

– 2408 – 117.578 1011010011000000

– 2409 t– 117.578 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Underflow

Table 11-17 Unipolar Input Ranges

Units Measured

Value in %

Data Word Range

Value in % 212 211 210 29282726252423222120*FÜ

2409 u117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

2408 117.578 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange

2049 100.05 0100000000001000

2048 100.000 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0.0488 0000000000001000Rated range

0 0.000 0000000000000000

– 1 – 0.0488 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Overrange

– 360 – 17.593 1111010011000000

– 361 t– 17.593 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 Underflow

Input

Ranges

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-44 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 11-18 Life-Zero Input Ranges

Units Measured

Value in %

Data Word Range

Value in % 212 211 210 29282726252423222120xFÜ

2921 117.578 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Overflow

2920 117.578 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Overrange

2561 100.05 0 101000000001000

2560 100.000 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

513 0.0488 0 00100000000100 0 Rated range

512 0.000 0 001000000000000

511 0.0488 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Underrange

151 – 17.593 0 000010010111000

4095 v–17.593 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 Open circuit

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-45

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.26 Analog

alue Representation for Analog Input Modules in S5 Num-

ber Format

The

tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the

individual measurement ranges of the analog input modules. The table values

apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges.

The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various mea

surement ranges.

Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the

following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units.

Measured

Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range

Dec. ± 10 V ± 80 mV

u117.589 % 2409 u11.769 V w94.1 mV Overflow

117.589 % 2408 11.758 V 94.06 mV Overrange

2049

100.000 % 2048 10 V 80 mV Rated range

0.0488 % 1 4.9 mV 39 V

0 % 0 0 V 0 V

–0.0488 % – 1 –4.9 mV –39 V

– 100.000 % – 2048 – 10 V – 80 mV

– 2049 Underrange

– 117.593 % – 2408 – 11.759 V – 94.06 mV

t– 117.593 % – 2409 t11.759 V v– 94.1 mV Underflow

Measured

Value in % System Voltage Measurement Range

Dec. 1 ... 5 V

u117.589 % 2921 w5.704 V Overflow

117.589 % 2920 5.704 V Overrange

100.05 % 2561

100.000 % 2560 5 V Rated range

0.0488 % 513 1 V + 1.95 mV

0 512 1 V

– 0.0488 %

511 Underrange

– 17.593 % 151 0.296 V

t– 17.593 % 4095 t0.296 V Open circuit

How to Read the

Measurement

Tables

Voltage

Measurement

Range

10 V

and ±

80 mV

Voltage

Measurement

Range 1...5 V

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-46 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Measured

Value in % System Current Measurement Range

Dec. ± 20 mA

u117.589 % 2409 u23.52 mA Overflow

117.589 % 2408 23.52 mA Overrange

2049

100.000 % 2048 20 mA Rated range

0.0488 % 1 9.766 A

0 % 0 0 mA

–0.0488 % – 1 –9.766 A

– 100.000 % – 2048 – 20 mA

– 2049 Underrange

– 117.593 % – 2408 – 23.52 mA

t– 117.593 % – 2409 t– 23.52 mA Underflow

Measured Value

in % System Current Measurement Range

Dec. 4 ... 20 mA

u117.589 % 2921 u22.81 mA Overflow

117.589 % 2920 22.81 mA Overrange

2561

100.000 % 2560 20 mA Rated range

0.0488 % 513 4 mA + 7.813 A

0 % 512 4 mA

– 0.0488 % 511 Underrange

– 17.593 % 151 1,185 mA

t– 17.593 % 4095 t1,185 mA Open circuit

Current

Measurement

Range

20 mA

Current

Measurement

Range 4...20 mA

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-47

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Measured

Value in % System Resistance-Type Sensor

Dec. 600 

u117.589 % 2409 u705.53 WOverflow

117.578 % 2408 705.53 WOverrange

2049

100.000 % 2048 600 WRated range

0.0488 % 1 0.293 W

0 % 0 0 W

-1 * Underrange

– 17.593 % -360 *

t– 17.593 % -361 * Underflow

* Polarity reversal of constant current IC+, IC-

Resistance-Type

Sensor

600

W

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-48 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following two tables show the analog value representation for tempera

ture sensors of various types in various temperature ranges.

System Temperature Range

Climatic (1 Digit

= 0.05 oC) Standard (1 Digit = 0.5 oC)

Dec. Pt100 Pt100 Ni100

3101 u 155 oCOverflow

2001 u 1000 oC

591 u295 oC Overflow

*155 oC *1000 oC *295 oCOverrange

130 oC 850 oC 250 oCRated range

200 10 oC 100 oC 100 oC

1 0.05 oC 0.5 oC 0.5 oC

0 0.00 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC

– 120 oC 100 oC 60 oC

Underrange

*– 145 oC *– 243 oC*– 105oC

211 t– 105 oCUnderflow

487 t– 243 oC

2901 t– 145 oC

* Overrange

and

underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the char

acteristic curve as it leaves the linearized rated range is retained.

Analog

alue

Representation for

Temperature

Sensors

... for Resistance

Thermometers

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-49

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

System Temperature Range

Standard (1 Digit = 1 oC)

Dec. Type R Type J Type K

2020 u 2019 oC Overflow

1623 u 1622 oC

1451 u 1450 oC

*2019 oC1450 oC 1622 oCOverrange

1769 oC 1200 oC 1372 oCRated range

1000 oC 1000 oC 1000 oC

1 1 oC 1 oC 1 oC

0 0.0 oC 0.0 oC 0.0 oC

– 1 – 1 oC – 1 oC – 1 oC

– 50 oC– 210 oC – 270 oC

Underrange

*– 170 oC– 330 oC– 390 oC

– 171 t– 170 oCUnderflow

– 331 t– 330 oC

– 390 t– 390 oC

* Overrange

and underrange: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve

as it leaves the linearized rated range is retained.

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-50 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.27 Analog Output Ranges for Output Channels in S5 Number Format

The

output ranges shown in the following tables are defined for the analog

output modules.

Table 11-19 Bipolar Output Ranges

Units Data Word Output Value

in %

Range

211 210 29282726252423222120xxxx

in %

w1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x 0

Overflow

1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x 117.578 Overrange

1025 0 10000000001xx x x 100.097

1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000

1 0 00000000001xx x x 0.097

0 0 00000000000xx x x 0.000 Rated range

– 1 1 11111111111xx x x 0.097

– 1024 1 10000000000xx x x 100.000

– 1025 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 100.097 Underrange

– 1204 1 01101001100xx x x – 117.578

v 1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x

0 %

Underflow

x=irrelevant

Table 11-20 Unipolar Output Ranges

Units Data Word Output Value

in %

Range

211 210 29282726252423222120xxxx

in %

w1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x 0

Overflow

1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x 117.578 Overrange

1025 0 10000000001xxxx w100.097

1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000

1 0 00000000001xx x x 0.0971 Rated range

0 0 00000000000xx x x 0.000

– 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x

0.000

Restricted to

rated range

lower limit,

– 1204 1 01101001100xxxx

lower

limit

0 V or 0 mA

v–12051 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 10 1 1xxxx

0 %

Underflow

x=irrelevant

Output

Ranges

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-51

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table 11-21 Life-Zero Output Ranges

Units Data Word Output Value

in %

Range

211 210 29282726252423222120xxxx

in %

w 1205 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 x x x x

0 %

Overflow

1204 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 x x x x 117.578 Overrange

1025 0 10000000001xx x x 100.097

1024 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x 100.000

1 0 00000000000xx x x 0.097 Rated range

0 0 00000000000xx x x 0.000

– 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x 0.097 Underrange

– 256 1 11100000000xx x x – 25.000

– 257 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x Restricted to

overrange

– 1204 1 01101001100xxxx

– 25.000 overrange

lower limit,

0 V or 0 mA

v –1205 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 x x x x –

25 %

Underflow

x=irrelevant

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-52 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

11.28 Analog

alue Representation for Output Modules in S5 Number For-

mat

The

tables in this section contain the measurement representations for the

individual measurement ranges of the analog output modules. The table val

ues apply to all modules with the corresponding measurement ranges.

The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the various mea

surement ranges.

Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, the

following tables contain only the measurement ranges against the units.

The following tables show the analog value representation for output chan

nels in various voltage ranges.

System Voltage Range

Dec. ±10 V

u 117.578 % u1204 0.00 V Overflow, no voltage and no cur-

rent

117.578 % 1204 11.76 V Overrange

1025

100 % 1024 10 V

0.097 % 1 9.76 mV

0 % 0 0 V Rated range

–0.097 % – 1 – 9.76 mV

– 100 % – 1024 – 10 V

– 1025 Underrange

– 117.578 % – 1204 – 11.76 V

u–117.578 % u–1204 0.00 V Underflow, no voltage and no cur-

rent

How to Read the

Measurement

Tables

Analog V

alue

Representation

Voltage Range

10 V

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-53

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

System Voltage Range

Dec. 1 ... 5 V

u 117.578 % 1205 0 V Overflow, no voltage and no cur-

rent

117.578 % 1204 5.70 V Overrange

1025

100 % 1024 5 V

0.0976 % 1 1V + 3.9 mV Rated range

0 % 0 1 V

– 1 1 V – 3.9 mV Underrange

– 25 % – 256 *0 V

- 257 0 V Impossible;

output value restricted

to 0 V

t–117.578 % t–1205 0 V

to 0 V

System Current Measurement Range

Dec. 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA

u117.578 % u1204 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, no voltage

and no current

117.578 % 1204 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange

1025

100 % 1024 20 mA 20 mA

0.0976 % 1 19.5 A 4mA+15.6 ARated range

0 % 0 0 mA 4 mA

–0.0976 % – 1 0 mA Underrange

– 25 % – 256 0 mA 0 mA

– 257 0 mA 0 mA Impossible;

output

value restricted to

– 117.578 % –1204 0 mA 0 mA output

value restricted to

0 mA

t–

117.578%

t–1205 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Underflow, no voltage

and no current

Voltage

Range

1...5 V

Current range

0...20 mA and

4...20 mA

SC Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

11-54 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog Electronic Modules – Parameters

12-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

SC Analog Electronic Modules –

Technical Data

Section Topic Page

12.1 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U 12-2

12.2 High Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U 12-8

12.3 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB00-...) 12-14

12.4 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB10-...) 12-20

12.5 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I

(0/4–20 mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer) 12-26

12.6 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I

(4–20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer) 12-32

12.7 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC 12-38

12.8 Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD 12-44

12.9 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U 12-50

12.10 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I 12-54

Product Name Order Number

Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0

High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0

Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0

6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0

HighSpeed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I

(0/4–20 mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer)

6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0

HighSpeed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I

(4–20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer)

6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0

Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0

Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0

Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0

Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0

Contents of the

Chapter

Order Numbers

12-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.1 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI U

6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0

The

2 AI U analog electronic module is an analog input module with the fol

lowing characteristics:



2 inputs for voltage measurement



Input ranges

V and 1...5



13/12-bit resolution



Input range selection



Isolated from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the input

module.

The block diagram is shown on the front of the input module. In the operat

ing state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 12-1 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI U Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-2 shows the block diagram of the 2

AI U analog electronic module.

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Isolation

Internal

supply

L+

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Figure 12-2 Block Diagram of the 2 AI U Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

AI U electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-1 Static Parameters of the 2 AI U Electronic Module

Parameters Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type deactivated

Voltage Voltage

Channel

Measurement range (volt-

age)

" 10 V

1 ... 5 V

" 10 V Channel

Interference

frequency

sup

pression 50 Hz (integration time 60

ms)

60 Hz (integration time 50

ms)

50 Hz Module

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 2

AI U electronic module using the

specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-1).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to the system in the current cycle n

Figure

12-3 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

Module

cycles

Jump Response

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Figure 12-3 Jump response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2 AI U electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM)DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

>90 dB

>70 dB

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) " 1.0%

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) " 0.7%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle integrative

Integration and conversion time/

resolution per channel

Parameterized

Integration time in ms

Conversion time in ms

yes

Resolution (incl. overrange/

representation in two’s com-

plement)

– S7 format/S5 format

"10 V/13 bits

1...5 V/12 bits

Interference

voltage

suppres

sion for interference fre-

quency f1 in Hz 50 60

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance

Permitted input voltage

For voltage input

(destruction limit)

"10 V/100kW

1...5 V/100kW

max.20 V perma-

nent;

75 V for max. 1 s

(pulse duty factor

1:20)

Connection of sensors

For voltage measurement

Characteristic

curve linearization

Temperature compensation

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

possible

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.2 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS U

6ES7

123-1FB50-0AB0

The 2

AI HS U high-speed analog electronic module is an analog input mod

ule with the following characteristics:



2 inputs for voltage measurement



Input ranges



12-bit resolution



Isolated from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the two-

channel input module.

The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In

its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip.

2AI

HS U

6ES7123-1FB50-0AB0

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 12-4 Front

and Side Elevations of the 2

HS U High Speed Analog Electronic

Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-5 shows the block diagram of the 2

AI HS U high speed analog

electronic module.

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Isolation

Internal

supply

L+

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Figure 12-5 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS U High-Speed Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

AI HS U electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-2 Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS U HighSpeed Electronic Module

Parameters Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type Deactivated

Voltage Voltage

Channel

Measurement range (volt-

age)

" 10 V " 10 V Channel

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 2

AI HS U electronic module using

the specified software (Chapter 4), the default settings of all parameters apply

to both input channels after a restart (see T

able 12-2).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to the system in the current cycle n

Figure

12-3 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

Module

cycles

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Jump Response

Figure 12-6 Jump response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2

AI HS U high speed electronic module is listed

below.

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16IM-SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM ) DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

>50 dB

>70 dB (with

smoothing factor k

= 128)

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) " 1.0%

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) " 0.7%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.1%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle instantaneous value

encoding

Conversion time/resolution per

channel

Parameterized

Time constant of the input

filter in µs

Conversion time in ms

300 " 20 %

Resolution (incl. overrange/

representation in two’s com-

plement)

– S7 format/S5 format

"10 V/12 bits incl. sign

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance

Permitted input voltage

For voltage input

(destruction limit)

"10 V/approx.

100kW

max.20 V perma-

nent;

75 V for max. 1 s

(pulse duty factor

1:20)

Connection of sensors

For voltage measurement

Characteristic

curve linearization

Temperature compensation

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

possible

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.3 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB00...)

6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0

The

2 AI I analog electronic module is an analog input module with the fol

lowing characteristics:



2 inputs for current measurement



Input ranges

20 mA and 4...20 mA



13/12-bit resolution



Input range selection



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the two-

channel input module.

The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In

its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 12-7 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-8 shows the block diagram of the 2

AI I analog electronic module.

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

L+

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Figure 12-8 Block Diagram of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

2 AI I electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-3 Static Parameters of the 2 AI I Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type Deactivated

Current (4-wire measuring

transducer) Current (4-wire measuring

transducer)

Channel

Measurement

range (4-wire

measuring transducer) 4...20 mA

" 20 mA

4...20 mA Channel

Interference

frequency

sup

pression 50 Hz (integration time 60

ms)

60 Hz (integration time 50

ms)

50 Hz Module

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 2

AI I electronic module using the

specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-3).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to system in cycle n

Figure

12-9 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

Module

cycles

Jump Response

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Figure 12-9 Jump Response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2

AI I electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM)DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

>90 dB

>70 dB

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) " 1.0%

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) " 0.8%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle integrative

Integration and conversion time/

resolution per channel

Parameterized

Integration time in ms

Conversion time in ms

Resolution (incl. overrange/

representation in two’s com-

plement)

–"20 mA

– 4...20 mA

yes

13 bits

12 bits

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance

Permissible input current

For current input

(destruction limit)

"20 mA/50 W

4...20 mA/50 W

40 mA, permanent

Connection of sensors

For voltage measurement

– As 2-wire measuring

transducer

– As 4-wire measuring

transducer

possible; with exter-

nal measuring trans-

ducer feed

possible

Characteristic

curve linearization

Temperature compensation

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.4 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI I (...123-1GB10-...)

6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0

The

2 AI I analog electronic module is an analog input module with the fol

lowing characteristics:



2 inputs for current measurement



Input ranges

20 mA and 4...20 mA



13/12-bit resolution



Basic error

0.1 %; operating error

0.3 %



Input range selection



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the two-

channel input module.

The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In

its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown

Figure 12-10 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-8 shows the block diagram of the 2

AI I analog electronic module.

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

L+

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Figure 12-11 Block Diagram of the 2 AI I Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

2 AI I electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-4 Static Parameters of the 2 AI I Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type Deactivated

Current (4-wire measuring

transducer) Current (4-wire measuring

transducer)

Channel

Measurement

range (4-wire

measuring transducer) 4...20 mA

" 20 mA

4...20 mA Channel

Interference

frequency

sup

pression 50 Hz (integration time

60 ms)

60 Hz (integration time

50 ms)

50 Hz Module

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 2

AI I electronic module using the

specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-3).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-23

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to system in cycle n

Figure

12-9 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

Module

cycles

Jump Response

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Figure 12-12 Jump Response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-24 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2

AI I electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM)DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

>90 dB

>70 dB

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) " 0.3%

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) " 0.1%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.06%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-25

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle integrative

Integration and conversion time/

resolution per channel

Parameterized

Integration time in ms

Conversion time in ms

Resolution (incl. overrange/

representation in two’s com-

plement)

–"20 mA

– 4...20 mA

yes

13 bits

12 bits

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance

Permissible input current

For current input

(destruction limit)

"20 mA/50 W

4...20 mA/50 W

40 mA, permanent

Connection of sensors

For voltage measurement

– As 2-wire measuring

transducer

– As 4-wire measuring

transducer

Characteristic

curve linearization

Temperature compensation

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

possible; with exter-

nal measuring trans-

ducer feed

possible

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-26 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.5 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I (0/4-20 mA, 4-Wire

Measuring Transducer)

6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0

The

2 AI HS I high-speed analog electronic module is an analog input mod

ule with the following characteristics:



2 inputs for current measurement



Input ranges 0/4...20 mA



12 bit resolution



Input range selection



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the two-

channel input module.

The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In

its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip.

2AI

6ES7123-1GB60-0AB0

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 12-13 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog

Electronic Module (0/4–20mA, 4-Wire Measuring Transducer)

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-27

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-14 shows the block diagram of the 2

AI HS I high-speed analog

electronic module (0/4–20mA, 4-wire measuring transducer).

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

L+

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Figure 12-14 Block

Diagram of the 2

AI HS I High-Speed Analog

Electronic Module (0/4–20mA, 4-W

ire Measuring

Transducer)

Note

The

current limitation applies to both measuring transducers of the 2 AI HS I

analog electronic module.

If a short circuit occurs at one measuring transducer and thus activates cur

rent limitation, the second measuring transducer does not indicate a valid

value.

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-28 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

2 AI HS I electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-5 Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS I Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type Deactivated

Current (4-wire measuring

transducer) Current (4-wire measuring

transducer)

Channel

Measurement

range (4-wire

measuring transducer) 4...20 mA

" 20 mA

4...20 mA Channel

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 2

AI HS I electronic module using

the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings of all parameters

apply to both input channels after a restart (see T

able 12-3).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-29

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to system in current cycle n

Figure

12-9 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Module

cycles

Jump Response

Figure 12-15 Jump Response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-30 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2

AI HS I electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16IM-SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM ) DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

>50 dB

>70 dB (with

smoothing factor k

= 128)

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz > 50 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) " 1.0%

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) " 0.7%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-31

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle Instantaneous value

encoding

Conversion time/resolution per

channel

Parameterized

Time constant of the input

filter

Conversion time in ms

Resolution (incl. overrange/

representation in two’s com-

plement)

–"20 mA

– 4...20 mA

typ. 1 ms

12 bits incl. sign

11 bits

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance

Permitted input current

For current input

(destruction limit)

"20 mA/approx.

50 W

4...20 mA/approx.

50 W

35 mA, permanent;

150mA for max. 1s;

(pulse duty factor

1:20)

Connection of sensors

For current measurement

– As 4-wire measuring

transducer possible

Characteristic

curve linearization

Temperature compensation

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-32 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.6 High-Speed Analog Electronic Module 2 AI HS I

(4–20 mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer)

6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0

The

2 AI HS I high-speed analog electronic module is an analog input mod

ule with the following characteristics:



2 inputs for current measurement



Input ranges 4...20 mA



12 bit resolution



Short circuit-proof supply of the measuring transducers



Isolation from the SC bus



Common-mode voltage irrelevant

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the two-

channel input module.

The circuit shematic is shown on the front elevation of the input module. In

its operative state the circuit schematic is covered by the labeling strip.

2AI

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

6ES7123-1GB50-0AB0

Figure 12-16 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog

Electronic Module (4–20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer)

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-33

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-17 shows the block diagram of the 2

AI HS I high-speed analog

electronic module (4–20mA, 2-wire measuring transducer).

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Current

limitation

L+

Figure 12-17 Block Diagram of the 2 AI HS I High-Speed Analog Electronic Module (4–20mA, 2-Wire Measuring

Transducer)

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-34 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

AI HS I high-speed electronic module (4–20mA, 2-wire measuring

transducer) uses the following parameters:

Table 12-6 Static Parameters of the 2 AI HS I Electronic Module (4–20mA, 2-Wire Measuring Transducer)

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type Deactivated

Current (2-wire measuring

transducer) Current (2-wire measuring

transducer)

Channel

Measurement

range (4-wire

measuring transducer) 4...20 mA 4...20 mA Channel

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 2

AI HS I high-speed electronic

module (4–20mA, 2-wire measuring transducer) using the specified software

(see Chapter 4), the default settings for all parameters apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-6).

Parameters

Defaultparameter

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-35

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to the system in the current cycle n

Figure

12-18 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Module

cycles

Jump Response

Figure 12-18 Jump response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-36 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2

AI HS I high-speed electronic module (4–20mA,

2-wire measuring transducer) is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16IM-SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM ) DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Sustained short-circuit current

from M0+/ M1+ against M to 100mA

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

>50 dB

>70 dB (with

smoothing factor k

= 128)

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz >50 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) " 1,0%

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) " 0.7%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-37

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle instantaneous value

encoding

Conversion time/resolution per

channel

Parameterized

Time constant of the input

filter

Conversion time in ms

Resolution (incl. overrange/

representation in two’s com-

plement)

– 4...20 mA

typ. 1 ms

12 bits

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance

Permitted input current

For current input

(destruction limit)

4...20 mA/approx.

50 W

35 mA, permanent;

150mA for max. 1s;

(pulse duty factor

1:20)

Connection of sensors

For current measurement

– As 2-wire measuring

transducer

– Load of the 2-wire mea-

suring transducer

possible

up to 750 W

Characteristic

curve linearization

Temperature compensation

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-38 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.7 Analog Electronic Module 2 AI TC

6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0

The

TC analog electronic module is an analog input module with the

following characteristics:



2 inputs for thermocouples or voltage measurement



Input ranges for thermocouples of type R, J or K or voltage measure

ment

80 mV

0.1

C/digit or 14-bit resolution



Input range selection



Linearization of sensor characteristic curves



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the input

module.

The block diagram is shown on the front of the input module. In the operat

ing state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

LED Channel 1

LED Channel 2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 12-19 Front and Side Elevations of the 2 AI TC Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-39

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-20 shows the block diagram of the 2

TC analog electronic mod

ule

SC bus

ADC

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

L+

M 0 +

M 0 –

M 1 –

M 1 +

Figure 12-20 Block Diagram of the 2 AI TC Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-40 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

TC electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-7 Static Parameters of the 2 AI TC Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters Wirkungsbereich

Measurement type Deactivated

Voltage Voltage

Channel

Measurement range (volt-

age)

" 80 mV " 80 mV Channel

Thermocouple with linea-

rization Type R

Type J

Type K

Type K Channel

Interference

frequency

sup

pression 50 Hz (integration time 60

ms)

60 Hz (integration time 50

ms)

50 Hz Module

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Reference junction None

Dynamic

reference

temper

ature on the AI RTD elec-

tronic module at slot A

Dynamic

reference

temper

ature

Module

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Module

Table 12-8 Dynamic Parameters of the 2 AI TC Electronic Module

Parameter SIMATIC S7 Value Range SIMATIC S5 Value Range

Reference

temperature in 0.01

CIn 0.01C – 14500... + 15500 In 0.05C – 2900... + 3100*

*The following applies to the SIMATIC S5 value range:

Bit 15 14 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reference temperature 0 0 0

you have not set the parameters of the 2

TC electronic module using the

specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-7).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-41

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to system in cycle n

Figure

12-21 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

Module

cycles

Jump Response

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Figure 12-21 Jump Response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-42 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 2

TC electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of inputs 2

Line length

Shielded max. 50 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between channels

Permissible potential difference

Between inputs and

ground (VCM ) DC 2 V/ AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range)

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range)

>90 dB

>70 dB

>50 dB

" 1.0%

" 0.8%

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range) " 0.05%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C, (relative to rated input

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-43

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle integrative

Integration and conversion

time/resolution per channel

Parameterized

Integration time in ms

Conversion time in ms

yes

Resolution

(incl. overrange/rep

resentation in two’s comple-

ment)

S7 format

"80mV

Type J

Type K

Type R

14 bit

0.1C/digit

S5 format

"80mV

Type J

Type K

Type R

13 bit

1C/digit

Interference voltage sup-

pression for interference

frequency f1 in Hz 50 60

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/in-

put resistance

Permitted input voltage

for voltage input

(destruction limit)

" 80 mV/>1MW

Type J/1200C/>1MW

Type K/1372C/>

1 MW

Type R/1769C/>

1 MW

max.10 V permanent;

25 V for max. 1 s

(pulse duty factor 1:20)

Connection of sensors

For voltage measurement possible

Characteristic curve lineariza-

tion yes; parameterized

Type J, K, R to IEC

584

Temperature compensation

Internal temperature com-

pensation

External temperature com-

pensation by means of a

compensating box looped

into the measuring circuit

yes; parameterized

not possible

possible; one compen-

sating box per channel

Smoothing

of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

yes; set by parameters

4 steps by digital fil

tering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-44 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.8 Analog Electronic Module 1 AI RTD

6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0

The

AI R

TD analog electronic module is an analog input module with the

following characteristics:



1 input for a resistance thermometer or resistance measurement

0.01

C/digit or 14-bit resolution



Input ranges for the Pt100 climatic range, Pt100 standard range,

Ni100 standard range or 0... 600



Input range selection



Linearization of sensor characteristic curves



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the input

module.

The block diagram is shown on the front of the input module. In the operat

ing state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

Figure 12-22 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AI RTD Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-45

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-23 shows the block diagram of the 1

AI R

TD analog electronic

module

SC bus

ADC

L+

M +

M –

4IC–

IC+

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

Figure 12-23 Block Diagram of the 1 AI RTD Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-46 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

AI R

TD electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-9 Static Parameters of the 2 AI RTD Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters Scope

Measurement type Deactivated

Resistance 0...600 W

Temperature measurement

with thermal resistance

Resistance 0...600 W

Channel

Measurement range

Resistance measurement

with 4-conductor connec-

tion

Temperature measure-

ment with thermal resist-

ance

Resistance 0...600 W

Pt100 climatic range

Pt100 standard range

Ni100 standard range

Pt100 standard range Channel

Interference frequency sup-

pression 50 Hz (integration time 60

ms)

60 Hz (integration time 50

ms)

50 Hz Channel

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None Channel

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7 Channel

you have not set the parameters of the 1 AI R

TD electronic module using

the specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-9).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-47

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

smoothing is adjustable in 4 steps. Smoothing factor k multiplied by the

cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the

smoothing filter

Smoothing factor: k:

None 1

Weak 8

Medium 64

Strong 128

ou can calculate the time response for any jump of the input value x and the

smoothing factor k by using the following formula:

yn:+xn)(k–1) yn–1

yn= value passed to system in cycle n

Figure

12-24 shows the jump response for various smoothing factors, depend

ing on the number of module cycles.

0.5

0.63

100 200 300 400

Module

cycles

Jump Response

k = 8

k = 64

k = 128

Figure 12-24 Jump Response

Time Response of

the Digital

First-Order

Low-Pass Filter

Calculation of the

ime Response

Jump Response

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-48 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 1 AI RTD electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight approx. 20 g

Module-Specific Data

Baud rate of the SC bus 9.6 KBaud

Number of inputs 1

Line length

Shielded max. 50 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between

channels and

power

supply of electronics

Between measurement and

current channels

Permissible potential difference

Between input and

ground (VCM)DC 2 V/AC 2 VSS

Constant current for resistance

sensor approx. 1.5 mA

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 30 mA

Power loss of the module typ. 0.6 W

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Interference voltage suppression

for f=n x (f1"1%)

(f1=interference frequency;

n=1,2...)

Common-mode interference

Series-mode interference

(peak value of interference <

rated value of input range)

Crosstalk between inputs

at 50 Hz/60 Hz

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

input range) 0...600W

Pt100 (climatic)

Pt100 (standard)

Ni100 (standard)

Basic error limit (operational

limit

at 25



C, relative to rated in

put range) 0...600W

Pt100 (climatic)

Pt100 (standard)

Ni100 (standard)

Temperature error (relative to

rated input range)

Linearity error (relative to rated

input range)

after

a restart (see T

able in

settled

state at 25C, (relative to rated

input range)

>90 dB

>70 dB

>50 dB

" 1.0%

4 C

8 C

4 C

0.7 %

1 C

4 C

2 C

" 0.03%/K

" 0.05%

" 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts none

Diagnostic functions

Fault display on module

Readable

diagnostic

function

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-49

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog value formation

Measurement principle integrative

Integration and conversion time/

resolution per channel

Parameterized

Integration time in ms

Conversion time in ms

Cycle time in ms

yes

110

130

Resolution (incl. overrange/rep-

resentation

in two’

s complement)

S7 format

0...600 W

Pt100 climatic

Pt100 standard

Ni100 standard

14 bits

0.1C/digit

S5 format

0...600 W

Pt100 climatic

Pt100 standard

Ni100 standard

13 bits

0.05C/digit

0.5C/digit

Interference

voltage

suppres

sion for interference fre-

quency f1 in Hz 50 60

Sensor Selection Data

Input ranges (rated values)/input

resistance 0...600 W / >1 MW

Pt100 (climatic; -120...+130 C) / >1 MW

Pt100 (standard; -200...+850 C) / >1 MW

Ni100 (standard; -60...+250 C) / >1 MW

Permitted input voltage

for resistance measurement

input

and constant current inputs/out-

puts (destruction limit)

max.10 V perma-

nent;

25 V for max. 1 s

(pulse duty factor

1:20)

Connection of sensors

For resistance measurement

with

– 4-conductor connection yes;

with

compensa-

tion of the line re-

sistances

Characteristic

curve linearization

yes; parameterized

– For Pt100 to DIN IEC 751

– For Ni100 to DIN 43760

Temperature compensation no

Smoothing of measured values

Step

None

Weak

Medium

Strong

yes; set by parame-

ters in 4 steps by

digital filtering

Time constant

1x cycle time

8x cycle time

64x cycle time

128x cycle time

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-50 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.9 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO U

6ES7 124-1F

A00-0AB0

The

AO U analog electronic module is an analog output module with the

following characteristics:



1 voltage output



Output ranges

V and 1...5

12/1

1-bit resolution



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the out

put module.

The block diagram is shown on the front of the output module. In the operat

ing state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

A3 B2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slots 1 and 2 are shown.

Figure 12-25 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AO U Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-51

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-26 shows the block diagram of the 1

AO U analog electronic mod

ule

SC bus

DAC

L+

QV +

QV –

S +

S –

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

Figure 12-26 Block Diagram of the 1 AO U Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-52 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

AO U electronic module uses the following parameters:

Table 12-10 Static Parameters of the 1 AO U Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters

Measurement type Deactivated

Voltage Voltage

Output range (voltage) " 10 V

1 ... 5 V

" 10 V

Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz (integration time 60 ms)

60 Hz (integration time 50 ms)

50 Hz

Smoothing None

Weak

Medium

Strong

None

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

you have not set the parameters of the 1

AO U electronic module using the

specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-10).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-53

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 1

AO U analog electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 206451

Weight approx. 25 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of outputs 1

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between output channel and

SC bus

Between output channel and

current supply of electronics

Permissible potential difference

Between S- and QV- (VCM)max. DC 2 V/

AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 50 mA

Power loss of the module max. 1 W

Analog value formation

Resolution (incl. overrange)

S7 format /

"10 V

1...5 V

S5 format

12 bits

11 bits

Conversion time max. 5 ms

Settling time

For resistive load

For capacitive load

0.1 ms

3.3 ms

Substitute values applicable no

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Common-mode interference

VCM < 2 VSS AC (50Hz) >30 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

output range) " 0.9%

Basic error limit (operational

limit at 25C, relative to rated

output range) " 0.6%

Temperature error (relative to

rated output range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

output range) " 0.06%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C (relative to rated output

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

none

Actuator Selection Data

Output range (rated values) "10 V

1...5 V

Load

resistance (in rated range of

the output)

Short circuit protection

Short circuit current

Capacitive load

min. 1kW

yes

approx. 30 mA

max. 1 mF

Destruction limit against exter-

nally applied voltages/currents

Voltage at outputs against

ground; QV-

Current

max. 15 V perma-

nent; 75 V for

max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)

max. DC 50 mA

Connection of the actuators

– 2-conductor connection

– 4-conductor connection

(measuring lead)

possible

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-54 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

12.10 Analog Electronic Module 1 AO I

6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0

The

AO I analog electronic module is an analog output module with the

following characteristics:



1 current output



Output ranges 0..20 mA and 4...20 mA



12-bit resolution



Output range selection



Isolation from the SC bus



Permissible common-mode voltage of AC 2

VSS

The figure below shows the front elevation and the side elevation of the out

put module.

The block diagram is shown on the front of the output module. In the operat

ing state, the block diagram is covered by the labeling strip.

Front elevation

Side elevation

A3 B2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slots 1 and 2 are shown.

Figure 12-27 Front and Side Elevations of the 1 AO I Analog Electronic Module

Order

Number

Characteristics

Front Elevation/

Side Elevation

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-55

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure

12-28 shows the block diagram of the 1

AO I analog electronic mod

ule.

SC bus

DAC

L+

QI +

QI –

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

Figure 12-28 Block Diagram of the 1 AO I Analog Electronic Module

Block

Diagram

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-56 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

AO I electronic module uses the following static parameters, which are

stored in data record 0:

Table 12-11 Static Parameters of the 1 AO I Electronic Module

Parameter Value Range Default Parameters

Measurement type Deactivated

Current Current

Output range (current) 0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

Format SIMATIC S7

SIMATIC S5

SIMATIC S7

you have not set the parameters of the 1

AO I electronic module using the

specified software (see Chapter 4), the default settings apply to both input

channels after a restart (see T

able 12-1

1).

Parameters

Default

Parameters

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-57

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

technical data of the 1

AO I analog electronic module is listed below

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 206451

Weight approx. 25 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of outputs 1

Line length

Shielded max. 200 m

Protection

of the electronic mod

ule against surge stress

to IEC801-5

external protective

device in the power

supply and signal

lines required

Number of times the electronic

module can be plugged into a

TB 16 SC max. 20

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated supply voltage of the elec-

tronics L+

Reversed polarity protection

DC 24 V

yes

Galvanic isolation

Between

channel and SC bus

Between output channel and

voltage supply of electronics

Permissible potential difference

 Between reference point of

load and QV- (VCM)max. DC 2 V/

AC 2 VSS

Power input

From supply voltage L+ max. 50 mA

Power loss of the module max. 1 W

Analog value formation

Resolution (incl. overrange)

S7 format /

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

S5 format

12 bits

Conversion time max. 5 ms

Settling time

For resistive load

For inductive load

Substitute values applicable

0.1 ms

0.5 ms

Interference Suppression, Limits of Error

Common-mode interference

VCM < VSS AC (50Hz) >30 dB

Operational limit (in entire tem-

perature range, relative to rated

output range) " 1.0%

Basic error limit (operational

limit at 25C, relative to rated

output range) " 0.7%

Temperature error (relative to

rated output range) " 0.01%/K

Linearity error (relative to rated

output range) " 0.06%

Repeatability in settled state at

25C (relative to rated output

range) " 0.1%

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Interrupts

Diagnostic interrupt

none

Actuator Selection Data

Output ranges (rated values) 0...20 mA;

4...20 mA

Load

resistance (in rated range of

the output)

at common-mode voltage of

2 V

at common-mode voltage of

0 V

Idling-proof

Open-circuit voltage

Inductive load

max. 500W

max. 600W

yes

approx. 16 V

max. 1mH

Destruction limit against exter-

nally applied voltages/currents

Voltage at outputs against

ground

Current

max. 15 V perma-

nent; 75 V for

max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)

max. DC 50 mA

Connection of the actuators

– 2-conductor connection possible

Technical

Data

SC Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

12-58 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Analog Electronic Modules – T

echnical Data

13-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

Section Topic Page

13.1 Front and Side Elevations 13-2

13.2 Block Diagram 13-3

13.3 Functions of the Counter Module 13-4

13.4 Wiring the Counter and Putting it into Operation 13-14

13.5 Parameters of the Counter Module 13-17

13.6 Subdivision of the Data Areas 13-19

13.7 Application Examples 13-21

13.8 Technical Data 13-25

Product Name Order Number

Counter module 1COUNT40kHz 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0

The 1COUNT40kHz counter module is a counter for use in the

200L-SC IM-SC. The module incorporates a counter that can work in the

following range:

Counting Range Lower count limit Upper count limit

16 bits (unipolar) 0 +65535

The

maximum input frequency of the count signals is 40 kHz.

ou can use the 1COUNT40kHz counter module for the following types of

counting:



Continuous counting



Single-pass counting



Periodic counting

The 1COUNT40kHz counter module can count signals generated by the fol

lowing pulse initiators: 24-V pulse initiator



with direction indicator (e.g. light barrier or proximity switch)



without a direction indicator (e.g. light barrier or proximity switch)

Contents of the

Chapter

Order Numbers

Characteristics

What Signals Can

the 1COUNT40kHz

Count?

13-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.1 Front and Side Elevations

The

figure below shows you the front and side elevations of the

1COUNT40kHz counter module.

Front elevation

Side elevation

LED 1

LED 2

The used terminals are shaded gray

Slot 1 is shown.

COUNT

40 kHz

L+

6ES7127-1BE00-0AB0

SIMATIC SC

Figure 13-1 Front and Side Elevations of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

The

1COUNT40kHz counter module has two LEDs, which indicate the status

of the 1COUNT40kHz counter module.

able 13-1 lists the LED displays, giving their display

, colour and function.

Table 13-1 Displays, Colour and Functions of the LEDs

Display Color Function

"Green This LED comes on when the counter is counting upward

(door open and status of the direction input B = 0 signal)

#Green This LED comes on when the counter is counting downward

(gate open and status of the direction input B = 1 signal)

Front/Side

Elevation

Status

LEDs

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.2 Block Diagram

bus

Logic

and

interface

circuit

Galvanic

isolation

Internal

supply

1L+,

2L+

L+,

M jumpered via terminal block

1M,

Figure 13-2 Block Diagram of the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

1A = count

input

3B =

direction input

4M =

load voltage brought out (neg. potential)

2L+ =

load voltage brought out (pos. potential)

Abbreviations

Used

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.3 Functions of the Counter Module

Section Topic Page

13.3.1 24V Pulse Initiator With/Without Direction Indicator 13-7

13.3.2 Gate Function 13-8

13.3.3 Digital Output 13-9

The

counter begins at the lower count limit.

If the counter reaches the upper limit when counting upward and there is then

another count pulse, the counter jumps to the lower limit and starts to count

the count pulses again, thus counting continuously

If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting downward and

there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the upper count limit

and starts to count downward from there.

Upper count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Figure 13-3 Continuous Upward Counting

Upper

count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Figure 13-4 Continuous Downward Counting

Contents of the

Section

Continuous

Counting

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

counter begins at the loaded value.

In single-pass counting, the counter starts at the loaded value. If the counter

reaches the upper count limit when counting upward and there is then another

count pulse, the counter jumps to the lower count limit and stays there even

when there are additional count pulses.

If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting downward and

there is then another count pulse, it jumps to the upper count limit and stays

there even when there are additional count pulses.

Upper count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Loaded value

Figure 13-5 Single-Pass Upward Counting

Upper

count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Loaded value

Figure 13-6 Single-Pass Downward Counting

Upper

count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Loaded value

Gate start

Gate stop

Gate start

Figure 13-7 Single-Pass Counting with Loaded Value and Gate Function

Single-Pass

Counting

Repeated

Single-Pass

Counting with

Door Function

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

counter begins at the loaded value.

In periodic counting, the counter starts at the loaded value. If the counter

reaches the upper value when counting upward and there is then another

count pulse, the counter jumps to the loaded value and starts to count the

count pulses again.

If the counter reaches the lower count limit when counting downward and

there is then another count pulse, the counter jumps to the loaded value and

continues to count downward from there.

Upper count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Loaded value

Figure 13-8 Periodic Upward Counting

Upper

count limit

Lower count limit

Counter status

Time

Loaded value

Figure 13-9 Periodic Downward Counting

Periodic Counting

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.3.1 24V Pulse Initiator With/Without Direction Indicator

The

pulse initiator – a proximity switch (BERO) or light barrier, for example

– supplies only one count signal, which must be connected to terminal A on

the terminal block.

ou can also connect a signal for direction identification to terminal B of the

terminal block. If you do not connect a direction signal, the counter counts

upward.

Note the parameterization of the count direction.

Signal A

Signal B as

direction in

dicator

Count pulses

upward

Count pulses

downward

Upward Downward

Figure 13-10 Signals of a 24V Pulse Initiator with Direction Indicator

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.3.2 Gate Functions

Many

applications require counting to start or stop as of a defined time, de

pendent on other events. In the case of the counter module, this starting and

stopping of counting is effected by means of a gate function. If the gate is

opened, count pulses can get through to the counter

. If the gate is closed,

count pulses can no longer get through to the counter and counting stops.

The counter module has a gate function. This is controlled by the user pro

gram in the CPU. The transmission times must be taken into account here.

When the gate signal is set, the gate is opened and the count pulses are

counted. When the gate signal is taken away, the gate is closed and the count

pulses are no longer registered by the counter

. The count remains constant.

Figure 13-1

1 shows the opening and closing of a gate and the counting of the

pulses.

Count

Count pulses

Gate signal

Opening

the

gate

Closing

the gate

1234

Figure 13-11 Opening and Closing of a Gate

You

can terminate counting by setting the ”gate” bit to ”0”.

Counting with

Gate Functions

Gate Function

Example

Terminating

Counting with the

Gate Stop

Function

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.3.3 Digital Output

You

can store a comparison value on the 1COUNT40kHz counter module.

This is assigned to the digital output. The output is activated depending on

the count and the comparison value. This section describes the various ways

of setting the responses of the output.

The digital output of the counter module is only available as a status bit. T

operate a digital output, you must read in this status bit, which is in the input

range, and output it to a digital output.

ou transfer the comparison value to the 1COUNT40kHz counter module.

Counting is not affected by this.

The comparison value must lie within the count range of the counter module.

The comparison value is interpreted in accordance with the selected count

mode. If you specify a comparison value of FFFF

, for example, in 16-bit

mode the number is interpreted as 65535.

The output cannot be activated unless you first enable it by setting the ap

propriate bit (see also Section 13.6, Subdivision of the Data Areas).

By default, the output is switched of

The pulse duration can be set for the purpose of adaptation to the actuators

being used. The pulse duration specifies how long the output is to be set. The

pulse duration can be set between 0 and 3 s in steps of 100 ms.

If you set the digital output: logic parameter to inverted, in its active state the

digital output has a 0 in its status bit.

This does not take ef

fect until the parameter values are received.

Introduction

Comparison

alue

Enabling the

Output

Default Setting

Pulse Duration

Digital Output:

Logic

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

can set one of 6 possible responses for the output when the comparison

value is reached. The alternatives are shown in the table below

Behavior of the Output

Output disabled

Underflow Comparison value Overflow

The output remains deactivated and is not affected by the events comparison value, zero-

crossing, overflow or underflow.

Active from compar-

ison value to over-

flow

*Underflow Comparison value Overflow

The

output is activated when the counter is in the range between the comparison value n and

overflow. When the counter is set to a value between comparison value and overflow, the

output is activated.

Active from compar-

ison value to under-

flow

*Underflow Comparison value Overflow

The

output is activated when the counter is in the range between the comparison value n and

underflow. When the counter is set to a value between comparison value and underflow, the

output is activated.

Active

at comparison

value counting up-

ward

Underflow Comparison value Overflow

The output is activated for the length of the pulse duration when the comparison value is

reached counting upward.

Active

at comparison

value counting

downward

Underflow Comparison value Overflow

The output is activated for the length of the pulse duration when the comparison value is

reached counting downward.

Active

at comparison

value counting up-

ward/downward

Upward Downward

Underflow Comparison value Overflow Underflow Comparison value Overflow

The output is activated for the length of the pulse duration when the comparison value is

reached regardless of the direction of counting.

Note the conditions overleaf

= output active

t = pulse duration

Behavior of the

Output

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

When

you parameterize the behavior of the digital outputs, you must comply

with the following:

If.. Then...

...you want to parameterize the out-

put as active from the comparison

value to overflow or underflow

...you must ensure that the time between these

events is greater than the transmission time.

Otherwise, the control pulses are lost at the

output.

If the count reaches the comparison value

again while the output is still active, no new

pulse is released. Another pulse cannot be re-

leased until the output is no longer active.

Conditions

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Hysteresis

is only significant in upward/downward count mode.

Hysteresis, which can be set from 0 to 255 allows you to prevent the switch

ing output from changing with the direction signal around the comparison

value or the pulse duration from being restarted.

If the counter counter reaches the comparison value for the first time after

entry

, the output is activated.

Here are five examples:

Comparison value + hysteresis

Comparison value

Switching output

active

Comparison value – hysteresis

Counter value

Figure 13-12 Example 1: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Overflow

Comparison value + hysteresis

Comparison value

Switching output

active

Comparison value – hysteresis

Counter value

Figure 13-13 Example 2: The Output Is Set to Be Active from the Comparison Value to Underflow

Hysteresis

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Comparison value + hysteresis

Comparison value

Switching output

active

Comparison value – hysteresis

Counter value

Retrigger

Figure 13-14 Example

3: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the “Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison V

alue

Counting Upward”

Comparison value + hysteresis

Comparison value

Switching output

active

Comparison value – hysteresis

Counter value

ttt Retrigger

Figure 13-15 Example

4: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the “Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison V

alue

Counting Downward”

Comparison value + hysteresis

Comparison value

Switching output

active

Comparison value – hysteresis

Counter value

t t

Retrigger

Figure 13-16 Example

5: The Output Is Set to Be Active for the “Pulse Duration on Reaching the Comparison V

alue

Counting Upward/Downward”

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.4 Wiring the Counter and Putting the Counter into Operation

Section Topic Page

13.4.1 Wiring the Counter 13-15

13.4.2 Putting the Counter into Operation 13-16

Contents of the

Chapter

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.4.1 Wiring the Counter

You

wire the 1COUNT40kHz counter module as shown in the following

figure:

Slot A

Slot C

Slot B

C1 C2

C3 C4

B1 B2

B3 B4

A1 A2

A3 A4

1L+ 2L+

1M 2M

+24V

L+

Count

pulse

Pulse initiator

Direction signal

24 V

0 V

Figure 13-17 Connecting a Pulse Initiator with a Direction Signal (Example TB 16SC)

Note

You

can run up to 10 counter modules in the ET

200L-SC IM-SC.

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.4.2 Putting the Counter into Operation

After

the power is switched on and before any data is transmitted, the state of

the module is as follows:



The count is at zero.



The continuous counting mode is set.



Status messages are updated.



The gate is closed.



The module is waiting for parameters.

Characteristics

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.5 Parameters of the Counter Module

In the table below you will find a list of the parameters, their value ranges

and default values:

Table 13-2 Parameter List

Parameter Value Range Default Values

Count limit: lower 0 ... 65535 0

Count limit: upper 0 ... 65535 65535

Mode Continuous

Single-pass

Periodic

Continuous

Count mode Upward

Upward/downward

Upward

Enable comparison value Disable

Enable

Disable

Digital output:

activated on

Disable

Comparison value to overflow

Comparison value to underflow

Reaching the comparison value for the

pulse duration counting upward

Reaching the comparison value for the

pulse duration counting downward

Reaching the comparison value for the

pulse duration counting upward or

downward

Disable

Digital output:

logic

Not inverted

Inverted

Not inverted

Digital output: pulse duration 0 ... 3000 ms in steps of 100 ms 0

Hysteresis 0 ... 255 count pulses 0

You

can choose between the following count directions:

Upward

Upward/downward

In the upward count mode the direction input is ignored.

ou can store a comparison value in the counter module. An output of the

counter module is assigned to this value. If the count reaches the comparison

value, the output can be set in order to trigger direct control operations in the

process.

Parameter

Count Mode

Comparison

Values

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

the comparison value is disabled, the count is not compared with the com

parison value and the output is thus not activated.

If no other values are supplied from data records, the counter module works

with the default parameters.

If the DP line fails or the CPU goes into ST

OP mode (see Section 13.6, Sub

division of the Data Areas: Note), the counter module continues to count pro

vided the gate was open.

When a connection to the DP station is re-established or the CPU goes into

RUN mode, and provided the lower and upper count limit parameters have

not been changed, you can read the current count.

Comparison

alue

Enabling

Default Parameters

Peculiarities

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.6 Subdivision of the Data Areas

Control

data is transferred from the CPU to the counter module cyclically

Control data amounting to more than 1 byte is stored as follows:

n + 1 high byte

low byte

You

can use the control data to change the functioning of the counter module.

The following table indicates which function can be af

fected by which ad

dress/addresses.

Module out-

put address +

0Loaded

value

Module out-

put address +

2Comparison

value

Module out-

put address +

4Gate

0: Stop

1: Start

Output

0: Disable

1: Enable

Loaded value job

0: Do not accept

1: Accept

Comparison value

0: Do not accept

1: Accept

Valid control commands

0: Not valid

1: Valid

000

Module out-

put address +

500H

Note

You

generally have to set bit 7 (valid control commands) to 1 in the user

program. As a result, when there are changes to the operating status of the

CPU or in the event of the DP strang failing or being switched off, you can

recognize this and continue to count, provided the gate was open.

Control

Data

Output Range

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Module

put

address

+ 0 Count

Module

put

address

+ 2 Comparison

value

Module

put

address

+ 4 Counter running

0: Disabled

1: Running

Count direction

0: Upward

1: Downward

Output

0: Inactive

1: Active

Gate input

0: Stopped

1: Started

Loaded value acknowledgment

0: Not accepted

1: Accepted

Comparison value

acknowledgment

0: Not accepted

1: Accepted

Loaded value error

0: No loaded value error

1: Value outside range

Comparison value error

0: No comparison value error

1: Value outside range

Module

put

address

+ 5

Valid data

0: Invalid data

1: Valid data

0000000

Input

range

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.7 Application Examples

The

following example shows how to count upward in a single pass, with

gate function, without output.

Conditions: The input and output address of the counter module have been

parameterized as 0.

Single-pass

counting

Parameterize

single-pass counting with gate

function without output

Set loaded value,

stop gate,

disable output,

accept loaded value

Yes

Do not accept loaded value

Yes

Loaded value not

accepted?

Loaded value

accepted?

AW0 = ”loaded value”

A 4.0 = 0

A 4.1 = 0

A 4.2 = 1

E 4.4 = 1 ?

A 4.2 = 0

E 4.4 = 0 ?

Figure 13-18 Example 1

Example

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Yes

Current count = loaded

value + 20

Enable gate

Stop gate

Current count = loaded

value + 20

Current count = loaded

value

This is the earliest point at which the

loaded value AW 0 can be changed

EW 0 = ”loaded

value”

A 4.0 = 1

20 pulses, for example, arrive at

the input of the counter (A)

EW 0 = ”loaded value” + 20

A 4.0 = 0

Another 10 pulses arrive at the in-

put of the counter (A)

EW 0 = ”loaded value” + 20

Figure 13-19 Example 1, Continued

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-23

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following example shows how to count upward periodically

, with gate

function, output at comparison value.

Conditions: The input and output address of the counter module have been

parameterized as 0.

Count

periodically

Set loaded value,

set comparison value

stop gate,

disable output,

accept loaded value

accept comparison value

Yes

Do not accept loaded value

Yes

AW 0 = ”loaded value”

AW 2 = ”comparison value”

A 4.0 = 0

A 4.1 = 0

A 4.2 = 1

A 4.3 = 1

E 4.4 = 1 ?

A 4.2 = 0

E 4.4 = 0.?

Parameterize

periodic upward counting

with gate function, output at

comparison value for 500 ms pulse duration

Yes

Loaded value not

accepted?

Loaded value

accepted?

Comparison

value

accepted?

This is the earliest point at which

the loaded value AW 0 can be

changed

E 4.5 = 1 ?

Figure 13-20 Example 2

Example

The 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-24 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Enable gate

Stop gate

EW 0 = ”loaded value” + 20

A 4.0 = 1

20 pulses, for example, arrive at

the input of the counter (A)

EW 0 = ”loaded value”

Another 10 pulses arrive at the input of the counter (A). As

a result, the comparison value is exceeded in this example.

EW 2 = ”comparison value”

(in this example: ”loaded value” + 25)

Current count =

”loaded value” + 30

Set comparison value =

”comparison value”

E 4.2 = 1 After 500 ms

E 4.2 = 0

A 4.0 = 0

Another 50 pulses arrive at the in-

put of the counter (A)

EW 0= ”loaded value” + 30

EW 2 = ”comparison value”

Current count =

load value

Set comparison value =

”comparison value”

Current count = loaded

value + 20

Output is set for 500 ms

Do not accept the comparison

value

This is the earliest point at which the

comparison value AW 2 can be changed

A 4.3 = 0

Yes

Comparison

value

not accepted?

E 4.5 = 0

Figure 13-21 Example 2, Continued

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-25

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

13.8 Technical data

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W H D (mm) 106451

Weight Approx. 15 g

Module-Specific Data

Number of counters 1

Cable length

Shielded Max. 100 m

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+

Reverse polarity protection

DC 24 V

Yes

Galvanic isolation

Between channels and SC

bus

Between the inputs

Permissible potential difference

Between different circuits DC 75 V/ AC 60 V

Power input

From load voltage L+ Approx. 20 mA

Power loss of the module Max. 0.5 W

Statuses, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Status display

Interrupts

Diagnostic functions

1 green LED each

for

– Counting upward

– Counting down-

ward

None

Data on the Count Signals

24 V input signals

Rated value

For signal ”1”(high level)

For signal ”0” (low level)

DC 24 V

11 ... 30 V

–3 ... 5 V

Input current

At signal ”1”(high level) Typ. 6 mA

Minimum pulse width (max. in-

put frequency)

Input characteristic curve to

Connection to 2-wire BEROs

Permissible closed–circuit

current

w 12.5 s (40 kHz)

IEC 1131, Type 1

Possible

Max. 1.5 mA

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

13-26 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

A-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Order Numbers

Should

you require additional components for the ET

200L distributed I/O

device or should you wish to upgrade the PROFIBUS, you will find the order

numbers here for the corresponding components.

e have divided the components into:

ET

200L components



Smart Connect SC components



Accessories for the PROFIBUS with a note on the manuals for the dif

fer-

ent PROFIBUS-DP masters and system configuration software

Section Subject Page

A.1 Order Numbers for ET 200L Components A-2

A.2 Order Numbers for Smart Connect SC Components A-6

A.3 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS Accessories A-9

Introduction

Contents of the

Appendix

A-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

A.1 Order Numbers for ET 200L Components

You

will find here the order numbers for ET

200L components.

Table A-1 Terminal Block Order Numbers

Description Order

Number

erminal block TB 16L, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0

erminal block TB 16L, spring terminal 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0

erminal block TB 32L, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0

erminal block TB 32L, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0

erminal block TB 16L AC, screw-type termi

nal

6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0

erminal block TB 16SC, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0

erminal block TB 16SC, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0

erminal block TB 16IM-SC, screw-type termi

nal

6ES7 120-0AH50-0AA0

erminal block TB 16IM-SC, spring terminal

6ES7 120-0BH50-0AA0

Table A-2 Electronics Block Order Numbers

Description Order

Number

Interface module IM-SC

6ES7 138-1XL00-0XB0

L 16 DI DC 24

6ES7 131-1BH00-0XB0

L-SC 16 DI DC 24

6ES7 131-1BH1

1-0XB0

L 16 DI AC 120 V

6ES7 131-1EH00-0XB0

L 32 DI DC 24

6ES7 131-1BL00-0XB0

L-SC 32 DI DC 24

6ES7 131-1BL1

1-0XB0

L 16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5

6ES7 132-1BH1

1-0XB0

L DO AC 120

V/1.0

6ES7 132-1EH00-0XB0

L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A

6ES7 132-1JH00-0XB0

L 32 DO DC 24

V/0.5

6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0

L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

6ES7 133-1BL00-0XB0

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24

V/0.5

6ES7 133-1BL10-0XB0

L-8 DI/8 DO AC 120

V/1.0

6ES7 133-1EH00-0XB0

L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC 120V/2.0 A

6ES7 133-1JH00-0XB0

Introduction

Terminal

Blocks

Electronics

Blocks

Order Numbers

A-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table A-3 Supplementary Terminal Order Numbers

Description Order

Number

Single-tier

, 16 channels, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FH20-0XA0

Two-tier

, 16 channels, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FH30-0XA0

Single-tier

, 16 channels, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FH50-0XA0

Two-tier

, 16 channels, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FH60-0XA0

Single-tier

, 32 channels, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FL20-0XA0

Two-tier

, 32 channels, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-1FL30-0XA0

Single-tier

, 32 channels, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FL50-0XA0

Two-tier

, 32 channels, spring terminal

6ES7 193-1FL60-0XA0

ou obtain additional labeling strips by quoting the following order number:



DIN

A4 with 10 strips, 16 channels: 6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0



DIN

A4 with 10 strips, 32 channels: 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0

Supplementary

Terminal

Labeling

Strips

Order Numbers

A-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Labeling

strips 16 channels

Figure A-1 Labeling Strips 6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0

Order

Numbers

A-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Labeling

strips 32 channels

Figure A-2 Labeling Strips 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0

Order

Numbers

A-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

A.2 Order Numbers for Smart Connect SC Components

You

will find here the order numbers for Smart Connect SC components.

Table A-4 Terminal Block and Terminal Order Numbers

Description Order Number

Terminal block TB16 SC (screw-type terminal) 6ES7 120-0AH01-0AA0

Terminal block TB16 SC (spring terminal) 6ES7 120-0BH01-0AA0

Supplementary

terminal,

single-tier (screw-type termi

nal) 6ES7 120-1AH00-0AA0

Supplementary terminal, single-tier (spring terminal) 6ES7 120-1BH00-0AA0

Supplementary terminal, double-tier (screw-type ter-

minal) 6ES7 120-2AH00-0AA0

Supplementary terminal, double-tier (spring terminal) 6ES7 120-2BH00-0AA0

Shield terminal 6ES7 192-0AA00-0AA0

Table A-5 Digital SC Electronic Module Order Numbers

Description Order Number

Digital electronic module 2DIDC24V 6ES7 121-1BB00-0AA0

Digital electronic module 2DODC24V0.5A 6ES7 122-1BB00-0AA0

Digital electronic module 2DODC24V2A 6ES7 122-1BB10-0AA0

Digital electronic module 1DIAC120/230V 6ES7 121-1FA00-0AA0

Digital electronic module 1DOAC120/230V1A 6ES7 122-1FA00-0AA0

Digital electronic module 1DORel.AC230V 6ES7 122-1HA01-0AA0

Introduction

Terminal

Block

and Terminals

Digital SC

Electronic

Modules

Order Numbers

A-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table A-6 Analog SC Electronic Module Order Numbers

Description Order Number

Analog electronic module 2 AI U 6ES7 123-1FB00-0AB0

High-speed analog electronic module 2 AI HS U 6ES7 123-1FB50-0AB0

Analog electronic module 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB00-0AB0

Analog electronic module 2 AI I 6ES7 123-1GB10-0AB0

High-speed analog electronic module 2 AI HS I

(0/4–20 mA, 4-wire measuring transducer)

6ES7 123-1GB60-0AB0

High-speed analog electronic module 2 AI HS I

(4–20 mA, 2-wire measuring transducer)

6ES7 123-1GB50-0AB0

Analog electronic module 2 AI TC 6ES7 123-1JB00-0AB0

Analog electronic module 1 AI RTD 6ES7 123-1JA00-0AB0

Analog electronic module 1 AO U 6ES7 124-1FA00-0AB0

Analog electronic module 1 AO I 6ES7 124-1GA00-0AB0

Table A-7 Function Modules

Description Order Number

Counter module 1COUNT40kHz 6ES7 127-1BE00-0AB0

Analog

Electronic

Modules

Function

Modules

Order Numbers

A-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Labeling

strip AKL 4 NET 731 6013

Labeling strip AKL 4 NET 731 6013

Figure A-3 Labeling Strips for Smart Connect

Order

Numbers

A-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

A.3 Order Numbers for PROFIBUS Accessories

this section, we have listed the order numbers for PROFIBUS accessories

which you require for the ET 200L.

Further

, you will find notes on the different manuals you will require, de

pending on the PROFIBUS-DP master being used.

able A-8 lists all the network components for the ET

200L distributed I/O

device which you may require in conjunction with the ET

200L.

Table A-8 Accessories for the ET 200 Distributed I/O Device

Accessories Order Number

485 repeater, PROFIBUS -DP

, IP

6ES7 972-0AA00-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus terminator (12 MBaud) (not

for interface module IM-SC)



Anthracite (without programming port)

6ES7 972-0BA10-0XA0



Anthracite (with programming port)

6ES7 972-0BB10-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus terminator (1.5 MBaud)

6ES7 972-0CA30-0XA0

Bus cable (not for interface module IM-SC)

Normal

6XV1 830-0AH10



Drum cable

6XV1 830-3BH10



Direct-buried cable

6XV1 830-3AH10

Repeater adapter

6GK1 510-1AA00

Optical link modules for glass fiber

-optic

6GK1 502-3AB00

cables

6GK1 502-4AB00

PROFIBUS drop cable

6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

Introduction

Network

Components

for

the ET 200

Order Numbers

A-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

You

require one of the manuals listed in Table A-9 to program and commis

sion the ET

200L with STEP

Table A-9 Manuals for STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7

Manual Contents

S7-300

Programmable Controller

Hardware and Installation

Includes



Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of

CPU 315-2 DP



Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network



Bus connector and RS 485 repeater

M7-300 Programmable Controller

Hardware and Installation

Includes



Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface in

M7-300



Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network



Bus connector and RS 485 repeater

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable

Controllers

Hardware and Installation

Includes



Description of the PROFIBUS-DP interface in

S7-400 and M7-400



Installing a PROFIBUS-DP network



Bus connector and RS 485 repeater

System software for S7-300 and S7-400

Program Design

Programming manual

Includes

Description of addressing and diagnostics on

SIMA

TIC S7

System software for S7-300 and S7-400

System and Standard Functions

Reference manual

Description of the SFCs in STEP

ou require one of the manuals listed in Table A-9 to program and commis

sion the ET 200L with COM ET

200.

Table A-10 Manuals for ET 200 on SIMATIC S5

Manual Order

Number

Contents

200 distributed

I/O device

6ES5 998-3ES.1



Description of master interface IM 308-B for

S5-1

15U/H, S5-135U, and S5-155U/H



Handling COM ET

200 V

4.x

200 distributed

I/O device

6ES5 998-3ES.2



Description of master interface IM 308-C for

S5-1

15U/H, S5-135U and S5-155U/H



Description of the S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP master

interface



Handling COM ET

200 W

indows



Handling FB IM308C

Manuals

for

STEP 7 and

SIMA

TIC S7

Manual for ET 200

on SIMA

TIC S5

Order Numbers

B-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Type and Device Master Files

All

the properties of a DP slave are stored in a type file.

ou can integrate the type file of the ET 200L (T

able C-1) in COM ET

200

as of V

ersion 4.0, COM ET 200 W

indows and STEP

The type files for the ET 200L-SC (T

able C-4) can be integrated in

COM ET

200 W

indows as of V

ersion 2.1.

The type files for a default start-up of the ET 200L-SC with a standard, non-

Siemens DP master are described in T

able C-14. Y

ou can integrate the type

files of the default start-up in COM ET 200 W

indows as of V

ersion 1.0.

If you need the type file, you can get it using a modem by calling +49 (91

737972 or from the SINEC library in AUTFORUM in CompuServe

(GO AUTFORUM).

All slave-specific characteristics are stored in a device master file (GSD file).

The structure of the device master file is laid down in EN 50

170 V

olume 2,

PROFIBUS.

If you need the device master file, you can get it using a modem by calling

+49 (91

1) 737972 or from the SINEC library in AUTFORUM in

CompuServe (

GO AUTFORUM).

Type File

Device Master File

B-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following table shows the version of the configuration software as of

which the ET 200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC are integrated.

Table B-1 Version der Projektier-Software

Order

Number of the

Module

(6ES7 ... 0XB0)

COM ET 200

indows

as of V

ersion

COM

PROFIBUS

as of V

ersion

STEP 7

as of V

ersion

131-1BH00 2.1 3.0 3.0

131-1BL00 2.1 3.0 3.0

132-1BH00 2.1 3.0 3.0

132-1BL00 2.1 3.0 3.0

133-1BL00 2.1 3.0 3.0

131-1EH00 – 3.0 3.1

132-1EH00 – 3.0 3.1

133-1EH00 – 3.0 3.1

131-1BH10 2.1 3.0 3.0

131-1BH11 – 3.0 3.0

131-1BL10 2.1 3.0 3.0

131-1BL11 – 3.0 3.0

132-1BH10 2.1 3.0 3.0

132-1BH11 – 3.0 3.0

133-1BL10 – 3.0 3.0

138-1XL00 – 3.2 4.1

Configuration

Software

Type

and Device Master Files

B-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

you do not have the device master file in front of you, the most important

characteristics of the ET

200L distributed I/O device are listed here in tabular

form.

Table B-2 Data for PROFIBUS-DP

Characteristic DP Keyword in Accor-

dance with EN 50 170

Volume 2, PROFIBUS

ET 200L ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Manufacturer ID Ident_Number See

Table C-1 See Table C-4

Supports FMS FMS_supp No No

Supports 9.6 kbps 9.6_supp Yes Yes

Supports 19.2 kbps 19.2_supp Yes Yes

Supports 93.75 kbps 93.75_supp Yes Yes

Supports 187.5 kbps 187.5_supp Yes Yes

Supports 500 kbps 500_supp Yes Yes

Supports 1.5 Mbps 1.5M_supp Yes Yes

Supports 3 Mbps 3M_supp No* No

Supports 6 Mbps 6M_supp No* No

Supports the FREEZE control command Freeze_Mode_supp Yes Yes

Supports SYNC control command Sync_Mode_supp Yes Yes

Supports automatic baud rate recognition Auto_Baud_supp Yes Yes

PROFIBUS address modifiable using software Set_Slave_Add_supp No No

User-specific parameterization data (default) User_Prm_Data Yes Yes

Length of the user-specific data User_Prm_Data_Len 5 bytes

500H

Variable

Modular device Modular_Station 0 1

Maximum number of modules Max_Module 0 8 (ET 200L-SC)

16 (ET 200L-SC IM-SC)

Maximum number of inputs Max_Input_Len See Table B-3 and B-4

Maximum number of outputs Max_Output_Len

Maximum

number of inputs

and outputs together

Max_Data_Len

Central display of manufacturer-specific status

and error messages Unit_Diag_Bit Not used Not used

Assignment of values to texts in device-specific

diagnostic field Unit_Diag_Area Not used Used

Identification of all modules of a modular DP

slave Module, End_Module No No

Assignment of manufacturer-specific error types

to texts in channel-specific diagnostic field Channel_Diag No No

* Exception: AC terminal blocks of the ET 200L

Most

Important

Characteristics

ype and Device Master Files

B-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table

B-3 indicates the maximum number of inputs and outputs of the dif

fer-

ent ET

200L electronics blocks:

Table B-3 Maximum Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L

Electronics Block Maximum Number of

Inputs (Bytes) Outputs (Bytes) Inputs and Outputs

Together (Bytes)

L 16 DI DC 24 V 2 0 2

L 32 DI DC 24 V 4 0 4

L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 0 2 2

L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 0 4 4

L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A 2 2 4

Table

B-4 indicates the maximum number of inputs and outputs of the dif

fer-

ent ET

200L-SC electronics blocks.

Table B-4 Maximum Number of Inputs and Outputs with the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Electronics Block Maximum Number of Digital1Maximum Number of Analog2

Inputs

(Bytes) Outputs

(Bytes) Inputs and

Outputs

Together

(Bytes)

Inputs

(Bytes) Outputs

(Bytes) Inputs and

Outputs

Together

(Bytes)

Type File with SI802XA?.2003,4 Type File with SI802XB?.2003,4

L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V 10 8 18 34 32 66

L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V 12 8 20 36 32 68

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0,5 A 8 10 18 32 34 66

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0,5 A – – – 34 34 68

L-SC IM-SC 64 64 128 – – –

1Only digital input and output modules are connected to the ET 200L-SC.

2Analog

and digital input and output modules are connected to the ET

200L-SC; you can use digital or analog or digital

and analog modules on the Smart Connect.

3“X” = 7, 8, 9 or C

4“?” stands for a language abbreviation; D = German

Inputs and

Outputs with the

ET 200L

Inputs and

Outputs with the

ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

ype and Device Master Files

C-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Configuration Frame and Parameterization

Frame for the ET 200L

you configure and parameterize the ET 200L using STEP 7 or using

COM PROFIBUS as of V

3.0 (or COM ET 200 W

indows as of V

ersion 2.1),

you can call on an on-line help system for assistance with your entries.

ou need

only

the information in Section C.5. If you want to run your

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC without parameterization, you will find

the default configuration for a default start-up in Section C.5.

If you enter the configuration of the ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC us

ing a configuration frame and a parameterization frame, you will find the

information you require in Section C.3/C.4.

If you run your ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC without parameterization

(e.g. with S5-95U), you will find the default configuration for a default

start-up in Section C.5.

Note

When creating the configuration and parameterization frames, you must use

the predefined identifiers. If you use the wrong identifiers, the ET

200L-SC

or ET

200L-SC IM-SC cannot work properly

The ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC does not check all the contents of

the configuration and parameterization frames for plausibility

Section Topic Page

C.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L C-2

C.2 Types of ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up C-3

C.3 Configuration Frame for the ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-4

C.4 Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-14

C.5 Default Start-Up C-31

Using

STEP 7 as of

V 3.2 or

COM PROFIBUS

as of V 3.0

Using Any

Configuration

Software

Default Start-Up

Contents of the

Chapter

C-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L

The

various electronic blocks are distinguished by means of the DP identifier

within PROFIBUS-DP

. T

able C-1 lists the DP identifiers for the ET

200L

distributed I/O device.

Table C-1 DP Identifiers for the ET 200L

Electronics Block

ET 200L

Order

Number

Name of

Type File ...

Manufac-

turer ID

DP Identifier Con-

sis

-Address

Length

Ad-

dress

ET 200L Number

6ES7 ... -0XB0 Type File ...

.200 turer ID Slot 0 Slot 1 sis-

tency Length

(Bytes) dress

Area

L 16 DI DC 24 V 131-1BH00 SI0014AX10014H000 017 Byte 2 Digital

L 32 DI DC 24 V 131-1BL00 SI0015AX10015H000 019 Byte 4 Digital

L 16 DO

DC 24 V/0.5 A 132-1BH00 SI0016AX10016H033 000 Byte 2 Digital

L 32 DO

DC 24 V/0.5 A 132-1BL00 SI0011AX10011H035 000 Byte 4 Digital

L 16 DI/16 DO

DC 24 V/0.5 A 133-1BL00 SI0017AX10017H033 017 Byte 222Digital

L 16 DI AC 120 V 131-1EH00 SI002AAX1002AH000 017 Byte 2 Digital

L 16 DO

AC 120 V/ 1.0A 132-1EH00 SI0028AX10028H033 000 Byte 2 Digital

L 8 DI/DO

AC 120 V/1.0 A 133-1EH00 SI0029AX10029H032 016 Byte 2 Digital

1“X” stands for a language-independent version

2Two bytes each for the input and output ranges

DP Identifier

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.2 Types of ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up

the case of the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC you can carry out a

normal start-up (with configuration) or a default start-up (with a default con

figuration). The table below indicates how the dif

ferent electronics blocks are

displayed in the configuration software and which type/device master files

are valid.

Table C-2 Types of ET 200L-SC of ET 200L-SC IM-SC Start-Up

Display

in the Configura

tion Software Type

File

Name

Order Number in

the Configuration

Software

6ES7...0XB0

Device Master

File Name3Start-Up Type

L-SC 16DI DP SI8027A?.200 1131-1BH10 - Normal (SC digital

only)

L-SC 16DI /a DP SI8027B?.2001131-1BH11 SIEM8027.GSG Normal (SC analog and

digital)

L-SC 16DI/def. DP SI8027ZX.2002131-1BH10 - Default

(SC digital only)

L-SC 32DI DP SI8029A?.200 1131-1BL10 - Normal (SC digital

only)

L-SC 32DI /a DP SI8029B?.2001131-1BL11 SIEM8029.GSG Normal (SC analog and

digital)

L-SC 32DI/def. DP SI8029ZX.2002131-1BL10 - Default

(SC digital only)

L-SC 16DO DP SI8028A?.2001132-1BH10 - Normal (SC digital

only)

L-SC 16DO /a DP SI8028B?.2001132-1BH11 SIEM8028.GSG Normal (SC analog and

digital)

L-SC 16DO/def. DP SI8028ZX.200 2132-1BH10 - Default

(SC digital only)

L-SC 16DI/DO /a DP SI802CB?.2001133-1BL10 SIEM802C.GSG Normal (SC analog and

digital)

L-SC 16DI/DO/d. DP SI802CZX.200 2133-1BL10 - Default

(SC digital only)

L-SC IM-SC DP SI802BA?.2001138-1XL00 SIEM802B.GSG Normal (SC analog and

digital)

L-SC IM-SC/def. DP SI802BZX.2002138-1XL00 - Default

(SC digital only)

1”?” stands for a language-dependent abbreviation; D = German

2“X” stands for a language-independent version

3The extension “.GSG” stands for German, “.GSE” for English, “.GSF” for French, and so on.

Note

You

can also use the SI80__B?.200 type files to configure the existing (only

digitally upgradable) ET 200L-SC (131-1BH10, 131-1BL10 and

132-1BH10). Y

ou can of course then only use digital SC modules.

200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.3 Configuration Frame for the ET 200L-SC

a configuration frame is sent to the ET

200L-SC (or ET

200L-SC IM-SC)

that deviates from the default configuration, a parameterization frame must

be sent to the ET

200L-SC (or ET

200L-SC IM-SC) as well.

In this case, the ET

200L-SC (or ET

200L-SC IM-SC) always expects a com

plete parameterization frame for all the slots in use.

If you have not connected any SC electronic modules in the ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC, the module only starts up when there is no configura

tion available for the Smart Connect part (see Section C.3.3 for an example).

The structure of the configuration frame depends on the address distribution

of the Smart Connect electronic modules used.

The ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC can work with various configuration

frames. The configuration frame that can be read from the ET

200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC is described below

. Possible changes to the frame are

also described.

Note

SC function modules, such as the counter module, behave in the same way

as analog SC modules.

Table C-3 Structure of the Configuration Frame

Configuration Slot Identifiers (Hexadecimal) in Bytes

01234

Virtual slot 1 04 00 00 AD C4

2 04 00 00 9B 40

3 04 00 00 8F C0

ET 200L-SC (electronics block) 4 to 5 or 7* See Table C-4

Smart Connect

(SC)

SC digital modules 6 or 8* See Table C-5 and Table C-6

(SC) SC analog modules, if only analog

modules are used 6 or 8*

SC analog modules, if analog and

digital modules are used 7 or 9*

Introduction

Structure of the

Configuration

Frame

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table C-3 Structure of the Configuration Frame, continued

Configuration Identifiers (Hexadecimal) in BytesSlot

Configuration

43210

Slot

ET 200L-SC

IM SC

SC digital modules 4 See Table C-7 and Table C-8

IM-SC

Smart Connect

(SC)

SC analog modules, if only analog

modules are used 4

(SC) SC analog modules, if analog and

digital modules are used 5

* The slot depends on the type of the ET 200L-SC electronics block; 8 bits of an electronic block occupy one slot

The

slot assignment depends on the Smart Connect Modules used:



Slot 6 or 8:

–

For digital modules

–

For analog modules when only analog modules are connected to the

Smart Connect



Slot 7 or 9:

–

For analog modules when analog and digital modules are connected to

the Smart Connect

In the following section you will find all the information you need on the

structure of the parameterization frame.

Section Topic Page

C.3.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC C-6

C.3.2 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC C-9

C.3.3 Configuration Frame Example C-11

Slot

Assignment

Contents of the

Section

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.3.1 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC

The

identifiers for configuration depend on the electronics block used.

able C-4 contains all the DP identifiers for the ET

200L-SC.

Table C-4 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC

Electronics Block

ET 200L-SC Order Num-

ber

6ES7 ...

Manu-

facturer

Slot DP Identifiers (Hexadeci-

mal) in Bytes Con-

sis-

ten

Address

Length

(Bytes)

Ad-

dress

Area

6ES7

...

-0XB0

0 1 2 3 4 ten-

ytes

rea

L-SC 16 DI

DC 24 V

131-0BH11 8027H4 43 00 00 9F 41 Byte 66 Digital

DC 24 V

5 43 00 00 9F 41

L-SC 32 DI

DC 24 V

131-1BL11 8029H4 43 00 00 9F 41 Byte 68 Digital

DC 24 V

5 43 00 00 9F 41

6 43 00 00 9F 41

7 43 00 00 9F 41

L-SC 16 DO

DC 24 V/0 5 A

132-1BH11 8028H4 83 00 00 AF 48 Byte 66 Digital

DC 24 V/0.5 A

5 83 00 00 AF 48

L-SC 16 DI/ 133-1BL10 802CH4 83 00 00 AF 48 Byte 68 Digital

16 DO DC 24 V

5 83 00 00 AF 48

6 43 00 00 9F 41

7 43 00 00 9F 41

1Total address length of the ET 200L-SC

2 The

address area “Digital” and consistency

“Byte” apply only to the electronic blocks. If you use analog modules on

the Smart Connect, the address area is “Analog” and the consistency “Word”.

Identifiers for the

ET 200L-SC

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-7

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table C-5 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC Mod-

ules

Smart

Connect

Input

Byte

Output

Byte

Identifiers (Hexadecimal)

Connect

Byte

Byte 0 1 2 3 4

DI SC

(SC config-

1 --- 43 00 00 42 45

(SC config-

uration with

SC input

2 --- 43 01 00 42 45

SC input

modules) 3 to 8* --- 43 02 to 07 00 42 45

DO SC

(SC config-

--- 1 83 00 00 42 45

(SC config-

uration with

SC output

--- 2 83 01 00 42 45

SC output

modules) --- 3 to 8* 83 02 to 07 00 42 45

DI/DO SC 1 1 C2 00 00 42 45

(SC config-

uration with

1 2 C2 00 01 42 45

uration with

SC input 2 1 C2 01 00 42 45

input

and output

modules)

2 2 C2 01 01 42 45

modules) 3 to 8* 3 to 8* C2 02 to 07 02 to 07 42 45

Table C-6 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Analog ET 200L-SC Modules

Smart Con-

nect

Input

Word

Output

Word

Identifiers (Hexadecimal)

nect

Word

Word 0 1 2 3 4

DI SC

(SC config-

1 --- 43 40 00 42 45

(SC config-

uration with

SC input

2 --- 43 41 00 42 45

SC input

modules) 3 to 16 --- 43 42 to 4F 00 42 45

DO SC

(SC config-

--- 1 83 40 00 42 45

(SC config-

uration with

SC output

--- 2 83 41 00 42 45

SC output

modules) --- 3 to 16 83 42 to 4F 00 42 45

DI/DO SC 1 1 C2 40 40 42 45

(SC config-

uration with

1 2 C2 40 41 42 45

uration with

SC input 2 1 C2 41 40 42 45

input

and output

modules)

2 2 C2 41 41 42 45

modules) 3 to 16 3 to 16 C2 42 to 4F 42 to 4F 42 45

Identifiers for the

Smart Connect

with Digital

Modules

Identifiers for the

Smart Connect

with Analog

Modules

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-8 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Note

The

byte size in the DP identifiers “1” and “2” becomes the word size when

the Smart Connect is analog. The word size begins with the value 40

H (for

1 word) and ends at 4F

(16 words).

If only input modules or only output modules are connected to the Smart

Connect, the byte and word size is in the DP identifier “1”.

If input and output modules are connected to the Smart Connect, the byte

and word size of the outputs is in the DP identifier “1” and the byte and

word size of the inputs is in the DP identifier “2”.

For the Smart Connect with digital and analog modules, the total length of

the input and output range is a maximum of 32 bytes in each case.

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-9

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.3.2 Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Table C-7 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with Digital ET 200L-SC

IM-SC Modules

Smart

Connect

Input

Byte

Output

Byte

Identifiers (Hexadecimal)

Connect

Byte

Byte 0 1 2 3 4

DI SC

(SC struc-

1 --- 43 00 00 42 4A

(SC struc-

ture with SC

input mod

2 --- 43 01 00 42 4A

input mod-

ules) 3 to 16 --- 43 02 to 0F 00 42 4A

DO SC

(SC struc-

--- 1 83 00 00 42 4A

(SC struc-

ture with SC

output mod

--- 2 83 01 00 42 4A

output mod-

ules) --- 3 to 16 83 02 to 0F 00 42 4A

DI/DO SC 1 1 C2 00 00 42 4A

(SC struc-

ture with SC

1 2 C2 00 01 42 4A

ture with SC

input and 2 1 C2 01 00 42 4A

input

and

output mod-

ules)

2 2 C2 01 01 42 4A

ules) 3 to 16 3 to 16 C2 02 to 0F 02 to 0F 42 4A

Table C-8 Identifiers for the Smart Connect with ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Analog Modules

Smart

Connect

Input

Word

Output

Word

Identifiers (Hexadecimal)

Connect

Word

Word 0 1 2 3 4

AI SC

(SC struc-

1 --- 43 40 00 42 4A

(SC struc-

ture with SC

input mod

2 --- 43 41 00 42 4A

input mod-

ules) 3 to 32 --- 43 42 to 5F 00 42 4A

AO SC

(SC struc-

--- 1 83 40 00 42 4A

(SC struc-

ture with SC

output mod

--- 2 83 41 00 42 4A

output mod-

ules) --- 3 to 32 83 42 to 5F 00 42 4A

AI/AO SC 1 1 C2 40 40 42 4A

(SC struc-

ture with SC

1 2 C2 40 41 42 4A

ture with SC

input and 2 1 C2 41 40 42 4A

input

and

output mod-

ules)

2 2 C2 41 41 42 4A

ules) 3 to 32 3 to 32 C2 42 to 5F 42 to 5F 42 4A

Identifiers for the

Smart Connect

with Digital

Modules

Identifiers for the

Smart Connect

with Analog

Modules

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-10 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Note

The

byte size in the DP identifiers “1” and “2” becomes the word size when

the Smart Connect is analog. The word size begins with the value 40

H (for

1 word) and ends at 5F

(32 words).

If only input modules or only output modules are connected to the Smart

Connect, the byte and word size is in the DP identifier “1”.

If input and output modules are connected to the Smart Connect, the byte

and word size of the outputs is in the DP identifier “1” and the byte and

word size of the inputs is in the DP identifier “2”.

For the Smart Connect with digital and analog modules, the total length of

the input and output range is a maximum of 64 bytes in each case.

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-11

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.3.3 Configuration Frame Example

The

following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an

ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24V/0.5A with:



2 bytes DO



A Smart Connect with 2 electronic modules (SC): 2DI and 2DO

The configuration frame thus consists of the 25 bytes described below:

Configuration

Frame Slot Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

83-01-00-AF-48 4 2 bytes DO

C2-00-00-42-45 5 Smart

Connect with electronic modules (SC): 2DI, 2DO.

The inputs and outputs of the 2DI/2DO are distributed

over 1 input and 1 output byte.

The

following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an

ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24V/0.5A with:



2 bytes DI, 2 bytes DO



A Smart Connect with 4 digital electronic modules: 2



2DI and 2

2DO

and with 3 analog electronic modules: 1



2AI, 1



1AI and 1

1AO

The configuration frame thus consists of the following 30 bytes:

Configuration

Frame Slot Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

C2-01-01-AF-48 4 2 bytes DO / 2 bytes DI

C2-01-01-42-45 5 SC with digital electronic modules: 22DI and

22DO. The inputs and outputs of the 22DI/22DO

are distributed over 2 input and 2 output bytes.

C2-40-42-42-45 6 SC

with analog electronic modules: 1



2AI, 1



1AI and

11AO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over 3

input words and 1 output word.

1st

Example

Configuration

Frame for

Example 1

2nd Example

Configuration

Frame for

Example 2

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-12 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an

ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24V with:



4 bytes DI



No Smart Connect

The configuration frame thus consists of the 20 bytes described below:

Configuration

Frame Slot Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-AF-C0 3

43-03-00-9F-41 4 4 bytes DI

Note

You

must always transfer the complete configuration frame to the

200L-SC.



If you have not inserted a Smart Connect module, a configuration frame

is not sent for the SC section (slots 5 and 6).

The following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an

ET 200L-SC IM-SC with:



A Smart Connect with 7 digital electronic modules: 4



2DI and 3

2DO

and with 6 analog electronic modules: 1



2AI, 2



1AI and 3

1AO

The configuration frame thus consists of the 25 bytes described below:

Configuration

Frame Slot Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

C2-04-03-42-4A 4 SC with digital electronic modules: 42DI and

32DO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over

4 input and 5 output bytes.

C2-48-44-42-4A 5 SC

with analog electronic modules: 1



2AI, 2



1AI and

31AO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over

5 input and 9 output words.

3rd

Example

Configuration

Frame for

Example 3

4th Example

Configuration

Frame for

Example 4

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-13

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

following example describes the structure of a configuration frame of an

ET 200L-SC IM-SC with:



A Smart Connect with 3 digital electronic modules: 2



2DI and 1

2DO

and with 2 analog electronic modules: 1



2AI and 1



1AI

and with one counter module (3 words I and O)

The configuration frame thus consists of the following 25 bytes:

Configuration

Frame Slot Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-AF-C0 3

C2-00-01-42-4A 4 SC with digital electronic modules: 22DI and

12DO. The inputs and outputs are distributed over

2 input and 1 output byte.

C2-42-45-42-4A 5 SC

with analog electronic modules: 1



2AI, 1



1AI and

11COUNT40kHz. The inputs and outputs are distrib-

uted over 6 input nad 3 output words.

5th

Example

Configuration

Frame for

Example 5

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-14 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4 Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L-SC or

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

All

the parameterizable values of the ET 200-SC are stored in the parameter

ization frame. The maximum length of the parameterization frame is 185 by

tes.

The maximum length is required for the following Smart Connect module

combination:

82AI

The structure of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC parameterization frame is identical

to that of the ET 200L-SC. In the case of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC you can

parameterize up to 16 SC modules. Y

ou must not exceed the maximum

length of the parameterization frame, which is 244 bytes (see Section 2.4).

The following figure shows the basic structure of the parameterization frame

of the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC:

Parameters for the ET 200L-SC (21 to 185 bytes)

Parameters for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC (21 to 244 bytes)

Parameters for the status (3 bytes)

See Figure C-3

Standard section (7 bytes)

See Figure C-2

See Section C.4.2

Figure C-1 Structure of the Parameterization Frame of the ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC

ET 200L-SC

Parameterization

Frame

ET 200L-SC

IM-SC

Parameterization

Frame

Structure of the

Parameterization

Frame

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-15

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

This

section contains all the information you require on the structure of the

parameterization frame.

Section Topic Page

C.4.1 Standard Section and Parameters for the Status C-16

C.4.2 Parameters for the Smart Connect Section C-17

C.4.3 Data Record 0 C-19

C.4.4 Data Record 128 C-20

C.4.5 Data Record 130 C-22

C.4.6 Parameterization Frame Example C-27

Contents of the

Section

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-16 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4.1 Standard Section and Parameters for the Status

The

standard section is identical for all ET 200L modules. The parameters

for the status have an identical structure for all ET

200L-SC and

200L-SC IM-SC modules.

The first 7 bytes of the parameterization frame are standardized in accor

dance with EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS and contain the following, for

example:

Byte 3

atchdog factor 1

Response delay T

RDY

Station status

atchdog factor 2

Manufacturer ID, high-byte

Byte

Byte 2

Byte 4

01H

0BH

88H

06H

80H

Byte 5

Manufacturer ID, low-byte

Group ID

Byte 6

27H

00H

Figure C-2 Standard Section of the Parameterization Frame

The

next 5 bytes contain the status bytes for the ET 200L. The default assign

ment for these 5 bytes is: 00

00H

The next 3 bytes are the status bytes. The default assignment for these 3 by

tes is: 40

. The meaning of the parameters is given in Figure C-3:

Byte 7

Bit no.

0: Other DP master

1: DP master on SIMA

TIC S7/M7

Byte 8

Diagnostic interrupt enable

Byte 9

Start bit monitoring on

Stop bit monitoring on

atchdog basis

0: 10 ms

1: 1 ms

0001

000000

0000000

000

Failsafe mode

Bit no.

Figure C-3 Parameters for the Status

Overview

Standard

Section

ET 200L:

Parameters for

Status

ET 200L-SC and

ET 200L-SC IM-SC:

Parameters for

Status

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-17

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4.2 Parameters for the Smart Connect Section

The

parameters for the Smart Connect section are stored in various data re

cords. T

able 5-4 shows the composition of the records.

The data records for the ET

200L-SC are arranged in the following order:

Table C-9 Data Records for the ET 200L-SC

Parameter

Record

Slot Length Meaning

Record Digital SC

Modules

Only

Analog SC

Modules

Only

Digital and

Analog SC

Modules

DS0

SC digital 5 5 7 bytes Diagnostic

interrupt for

the

digital Smart Connect

modules

DS128

SC digital 5 5 7 bytes

+ 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the

digital Smart Connect

modules

DS0

SC analog 5 6 7 bytes Diagnostic

interrupt for

the

analog Smart Connect

modules

DS128

SC analog 5 6 7 bytes

+ 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the

analog Smart Connect

modules

DS130

SC analog 5 6 7 bytes

+ 2 bytes per SC module

+ 5 bytes per channel

Parameters for the analog

Smart Connect modules

Overview

Configuration

ET 200L-SC

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-18 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

data records for the ET

200L-SC IM-SC are arranged in the following

order:

Table C-10 Data Records for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

Parameter

Record

Slot Length Meaning

Record Digital SC

Modules

Only

Analog SC

Modules

Only

Digital and

Analog SC

Modules

DS0

SC digital 4 4 7 bytes Diagnostic

interrupt for

the

digital Smart Connect

modules

DS128

SC digital 4 4 7 bytes

+ 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the

digital Smart Connect

modules

DS0

SC analog 4 5 7 bytes Diagnostic

interrupt for

the

analog Smart Connect

modules

DS128

SC analog 4 5 7 bytes

+ 7 bytes per SC module Configuration data for the

analog Smart Connect

modules

DS130

SC analog 4 5 7 bytes

+ 2 bytes per analog SC

module

+ 5 bytes per channel

+ 11 bytes per counter

module

Parameters for the analog

Smart Connect modules

Parameters for the counter

module

Note

You

must always transfer the complete parameterization frame for the con

figuration of the ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC.

The information in records DS128 and DS130 for the analog Smart Connect

modules must correspond.

Configuration

ET 200L-SC

IM-SC

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-19

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4.3 Data Record 0

Record 0

consists of 7 bytes (byte 0 to byte 6) and is generated separately for

digital and analog Smart Connect modules. Record 0 has the same content

for both modules.

The following figure describes the structure of DS0 for the ET

200L-SC:

Byte 5

Diagnostics enabling blocked

Diagnostics enabling

0000100

Byte 3

S7 constant

Record number

Block length

Slot

Record length

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 4

5FH

00H

07H

04H/05H/06H

02H

Not applicable

Byte 6

00H

ET 200L-SC

: For analog modules when analog

and digital modules are connected to the SC

ET 200L-SC

: For digital modules and analog mod

ules when only analog modules are connected to

the SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

: For analog modules when ana

log modules and digital modules are connected to

the SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

: For digital modules and for ana

log modules when only analog modules are con

nected to the SC

Figure C-4 Structure of Data Record 0

Data

Record 0

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-20 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4.4 Data Record 128

Data

record 128 consists of a header with a length of 7 bytes and an addi

tional 7 bytes per Smart Connect module. These are described below

Figure C-5 describes the header of data record 128.

Byte 3

S7 constant

Data record number

Block length: 7 bytes + 7 bytes / SC mod.

Slot

Data record length: 7 bytes / SC mod. +2

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 4

5FH

80H

Variable

Variable V

ersion identifier

Byte 5

00H

Additional identifier/device type assign

ment

Byte 6

50H

04H/05H/06H

ET 200L-SC

: For analog modules when analog

and digital modules are connected to the SC

ET 200L-SC

: For digital modules and ana

log modules when only analog modules are

connected to the SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

: For analog modules when ana

log and digital modules are connected to the SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

: For digital modules and for ana

log modules when only analog modules are con

nected to the SC

Figure C-5 Structure of the Header of Data Record 128

Overview

Data

Record 128,

Header

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-21

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Figure C-6 describes the contents of data record 128. These bytes are re

peated for each Smart Connect electronic module that is connected.

Channel module-specific identifier of

the Smart Connect electronic module

Channel module address of the Smart

Connect electronic module

Byte of

fset, input range of the SC

section (see T

able C-5)

Byte 7, 14 to 56

Byte 8, 15 to 57

Byte 9, 16 to 58

01H

00H

or 3F

FFH

input

Byte of

fset 31 (ET

200L-SC) or 63 (ET

200L-SC IM-SC)

Byte of

fset 0

Byte 10, 17 to 59

1765432

Bit of

fsets 0 to 7: Determine the position within

the byte in the input range (not applicable if the

byte of

fset is FFH)

Number of channels of the Smart Connect electronic module:

0 - single-channel; 1 - two-channel; 2 - three-channel

Byte 1

1, 18 to 60

Byte 12, 19 to 61

Byte 13, 20 to 62

00H

Length requirements of channels

00 - 1 bit; 10 - 2 bytes

Byte of

fset, input range of the SC

section (see T

able C-5)

No input

Byte of

fset 31 (ET

200L-SC) bzw

. 63 (ET

200L-SC IM-SC)

Byte of

fset 0

1765432

Bit of

fsets 0 to 7: Determine the position within

the bytes in the input range (not applicable if the

byte of

fset is FFH)

Number of channels of the Smart Connect electronic module:

0 - single-channel; 1 - two-channel; 2 - three-channel

Length requirements of channels

00 - 1 bit; 10 - 2 bytes

Channel-module specific parameters

01H:

2DIDC24V or 1DIAC120/230V

02H:

2DODC24V0.5A; 2DODC24V2A; 1DOAC120/230V1A or

1DORel.AC230V

C5H

AI R

TD; 2AI U; 2AI I or 2AI TC

D5H:

Fast 2AI U or 2AI I

E6H:

1AO U or 1AO I (double module width)

D9H: 1COUNT40kHz

00H

or 3F

FFH

Figure C-6 Structure of Data Record 128, Bytes 7 to 62

Data

Record 128,

Contents

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-22 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4.5 Data Record 130

Data

record 130 consists of a header with a length of 7 bytes, an additional

2 bytes per SC module and 5 bytes per channel. They are described below

Figure C-7 describes the header of data record 130.

Byte 3

S7 constant

Data record number

Block length: 7 bytes + 2 bytes per SC

module + 5 bytes per channel

Slot

Data record length: 2 bytes + 2 bytes per

SC module + 5 bytes per channel

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 4

5FH

82H

Variable

ersion identifier

Byte 5

00H

Additional identifier/device type assignment

Byte 6

50H

04H/05H/06H

ET 200L-SC

: For analog modules when analog

and digital modules are connected to the SC

ET 200L-SC

: For digital modules and analog mod

ules when only analog modules are connected to

the SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

: For analog modules when analog

and digital modules are connected to the SC

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

: For digital modules and for analog

modules when only analog modules are connected to

the SC

Figure C-7 Structure of the Header of Data Record 128

Figures C-8 and C-9 describe the contents of data record 130. A distinction is

drawn between single- and two-channel modules.

Overview

Data

Record 130,

Header

Data Record 130,

Contents

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-23

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

ou will find the contents of data record 130 for single-channel modules in

the following figure.

Byte 10

Module address

Channel address

otal block length for a module

Block length for a channel

Channel-specific parameters

Byte 7

Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 1

01H

to 08

00H

07H

Byte 12

Byte 13

05H

00H

Figure C-8 Structure of Data Record 130 for Single-Channel Modules

ou will find the contents of data record 130 for two-channel modules in the

following figure.

Byte 10

Channel module address

Channel address

otal block length for a channel module

Block length for a channel

Byte 7

Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 1

01H

to 08

00H

0CH

Byte 12

Byte 13

05H

Byte 15

Channel address

Block length for a channel

Byte 14

Byte 16

01H

Byte 17

Byte 18

05H

00H

Channel-specific parameters

Figure C-9 Structure of Data Record 130 for Two-Channel Modules

The

channel-specific parameters comprise 3 bytes. The third byte (byte 13 or

byte 18) is reserved and preset with the value 00

The remaining two bytes of the channel-specific parameters are assigned dif

ferently depending on the Smart Connect module. The assignment depends

on whether the module is an input or output module.

Data

Record 130,

Single-Channel

Data Record 130,

Two-Channel

Channel-Specific

Parameters

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-24 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

contents of the data record for the 1COUNT40kHz counter module are

shown in the following figure:

Byte 10

Channel module address

Channel address

otal block length for a module

Block length for a channel

Byte 7

Byte 8

Byte 9

Byte 1

01H

to 08

00H

0BH

Byte 12

Byte 13

09H

Byte 15

Byte 14

Byte 16

Byte 17

Channel-specific parameters

Figure C-10 Structure of Data Record 130 for the 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module

The

purpose of bytes 1

1 and 16 of data record 130 for analog input modules

is indicated in T

able C-1

Table C-11 AI Parameters in Byte 11 and 16 of DS130

Smart Connect

Module

Measurement Type Measurement Range Bit1

Module

7 ... 4 3 ... 0

– Deactivated 0000 0000

2AI U Voltage measurement 1 ... 5 V 0001 0111

+/– 10 V 1001

2AI I Current measurement, 4-wire connection 0 ... 20 mA 0010 0010

4 ... 20 mA 0011

+/– 20 mA 0100

Current measurement, 2-wire connection 4 ... 20 mA 0011 0011

1AI RTD Resistance measurement, 4-wire connection 0 ... 600 Ω0100 0110

Thermal resistance measurement with lineariza-

tion and 4 wire connection

Pt100

Kl (climatic range)

1000 0000

tion and 4-wire connection Pt100 0010

NI100 1011

2AI TC Voltage measurement +/– 80 mV 0001 0001

Temperature measurement with thermocouple Type R 1011 0011

Type J 0101

Type K 1000

1No other values or combinations are permissible

Data

Record 130,

1COUNT40kHz

AI Module –

Byte 1

1 or Byte 16

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-25

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

purpose of bytes 12 and 17 of data record 130 for analog input modules

is indicated in Figure C-1

1765432

Interference suppression

00 – 50 Hz; 01 – 60 Hz

Smoothing

00 – none; 01 – weak

10 – medium; 1

1 – strong

emperature reference junction

000 – none; 01

1 – dynamic reference temperature;

Number format

0 – S7 format; 1 – S5 format

Figure C-11 AI Parameters in Byte 12 or 17 of DS130

The

third byte (byte 13 or byte 18) of the channel-specific parameters is al

ways assigned the value 00

for input modules.

The purpose of bits 0 to 5 in bytes 1

1 and 16 of data record 130 for analog

output modules is indicated in T

able C-12.

Bit 6 is always assigned the value “0”.

Bit 7 specifies the number format:



Bit 7 = “0”: S7 format



Bit 7 = “1”: S5 format

Table C-12 AO Parameters in Byte 11 or 16 of DS130

Smart Connect

Module

Output Measurement Range Bit1

Module

5, 4 3 ... 0

– Deactivated 00 0000

1AO U Voltage output 1 ... 5 V 01 0111

+/– 10 V 1001

1AO I Current output 0 ... 20 mA 10 0010

4 ... 20 mA 0011

1No other values or combinations are permissible

The

second and third bytes (bytes 12 and 13 or bytes 17 and 18) of the chan

nel-specific parameters are always assigned the value 00

for output mod

ules.

AI Module –

Byte 12 or Byte 17

AI Module –

Byte 13 or Byte 18

AO Module – Byte

1 or Byte 16

AO Module – Bytes

12 and 13 or Bytes

17 and 18

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-26 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

purpose of bytes 1

1 to 17 of data record 130 for the 1COUNT40kHz

counter module indicated in Figure C-12.

Byte 15

1765432

Mode

00: Continuous

01: Single-pass

10: Periodic

Bit no.

Count mode

0: Upward

1: Upward/downward

Comparison value enabling

0: Disable

1: Enable

Digital output: activate at

000: Dispable

001: Comparison value to overflow

010: Comparison value to underflow

1: Comparison value reached as pulse counting upward

100: Comparison value reached as pulse counting downward

101: Comparison value reached as pulse counting upward or downward

Digital output: logic

0: Not inverted

1: Inverted

Byte 14

Upper count limit

Lower count limit

Byte 1

Byte 12

Byte 13

Lower count limit (low byte)

Upper count limit(low byte)

Upper count limit (high byte)

Lower count limit (high byte)

Activate hysteresis of count pulses at output

Pulse duration in steps of 100 ms

Byte 16

Byte 17

Hysteresis [0 to 255]

Pulse duration [0 to 30]

Figure C-12 1COUNT40kHz Counter Module – Purpose of Bytes 11 to 17 of Data Record 130

Counter Module –

Bytes 1

1 to 17

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-27

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.4.6 Parameterization Frame Example

The

example below describes the parameterization of an

200L-SC IM-SC.

The Smart Connect contains the following electronic modules:



2DIDC24V (slot A)



2DODC24V0.5A (slot B)



2AI U (slot C)



1AO I (slot D)



1COUNT40kHz (slot F)

able C-13 below shows the contents of the associated parameterization

frame:

Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example

Byte Value Meaning

0 to 6 See Figure

C-2 Standard section

7 40HStatus byte 0 Status bytes

8 20HStatus byte 1; diagnostic interrupt enable: 21H

9 00HStatus byte 2

10 07HBlock length Data record 0

(digital)

11 5FHS7 constant (digital)

12 04HSlot

13 00HData record number

14 02HData record length

15 00HDiagnostics enable: 0

16 00HNot applicable

17 15HBlock length Data record 128

(digital)

18 5FHS7 constant (digital)

19 04HSlot

20 80HData record number

21 10HData record length

22 00HVersion identifier

23 50HAdditional identifier/device type assignment

Example

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-28 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example, continued

Byte MeaningValue

24 01HChannel module address: slot A Data record 128

(digital)

25 01HChannel module-specific identifier: 01H

(digital)

26 00HByte offset, input range: 0 Smart Connect

2DIDC24V on

27 0AHBit offset: 2; number of channels: 1 (two-chan-

nel); input range

2DIDC24V on

slot A

28 FFHByte offset, output range: no output

29 FFHBit offset: 0; number of channels: 0; output

range

30 00HChannel module-specific parameters

31 02HChannel module address: slot B

32 02HChannel module-specific identifier: 02H

33 FFHByte offset, input range: no input Smart Connect

2DODC24V0.5A

34 FFHBit offset: 0; number of channels: 0 ; input

range

2DODC24V0.

on slot B

35 00HByte offset, output range: 0

36 0CHBit offset: 4; number of channels 1 (two- chan-

nel); output range

37 00HChannel module-specific parameters

38 07HBlock length Data record 0

(analog)

39 5FHS7 constant (analog)

40 05HSlot

41 00HData record number

42 02HData record length

43 00HDiagnostics enable: 0 (as DS0 digital)

44 00HNot applicable

45 1CHBlock length Data record 128

(analog)

46 17HS7 constant (analog)

47 05HSlot

48 80HData record number

49 17HData record length

50 00HVersion identifier

51 50HAdditional identifier/device type assignment

52 03HChannel module address: slot C Smart Connect

2AIU+/ 10V

53 C5HChannel module-specific identifier: C5H2AI U +/– 10 V

in slot C

54 00HByte offset input range 0

n s

55 88HBit offset: 0; channel number: 1 (two-channel);

channel length: 2 bytes

56 FFHByte offset output range: no output

57 FFHBit offset: 0; channel number: 0; output range

58 00HChannel module-specific parameters

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-29

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example, continued

Byte MeaningValue

59 04HChannel module address: slot D Smart Connect

1AO

I 0 20 mA

Data record 128

(analog)

60 E6HChannel module-specific identifier: E6H1AO

I 0 ... 20 mA

in slot D (analog)

61 FFHByte offset input range: no input

n s

62 FFHBit offset: 0; channel number: 0; input range

63 00HByte offset output range: 0

64 80HBit offset: 0; channel number: 0 (single-chan-

nel); length of the output channel: 2 bytes

65 00HChannel module-specific parameter

66 06HChannel module address: slot F Smart Connect

1COUNT40kHz

Data record 128

(analog)

67 D9HChannel module-specific identifier: D9H1COUNT40kHz

counter

module in

(analog)

68 04HByte offset input range: 4 coun

slot F

69 98HBit

fset: 0; channel

number: 2 (three-channel);

input channel length: 2 bytes

slot F

70 02HByte offset output range: 2

71 98HBit

fset: 0; channel

number: 2 (three-channel);

length of the output channels: 2 bytes

72 00HChannel module-specific parameters

73 25HBlock length Data record 130

(analog)

74 5FHS7 constant (analog)

75 05HSlot

76 82HData record number

77 1FHData record length

78 00HVersion identifier

79 50HAdditional identifier/device type assignment

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-30 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Table C-13 ET 200L-SC IM-SC Example, continued

Byte MeaningValue

80 0CHBlock length for channel module Smart Connect

2AIU+/ 10V

Data record 130

(analog)

81 03HChannel module address: slot C 2AI U +/– 10 V

in slot C (analog)

82 05HBlock length for channel

n s

83 00HChannel address: 0 (one)

84 19HVoltage input: +/– 10 V

85 80HS5 format; interference frequency suppression:

50 Hz; no smoothing

86 00HNot relevant

87 05HBlock length for channel

88 01HChannel address: 1 (two)

89 19HVoltage input: +/– 10 V

90 80HS5 format; interference frequency suppression:

50 Hz; no smoothing

91 00HNot relevant

92 07HBlock length for channel module Smart Connect

1AO

I 0 20 mA

93 04HChannel module address: slot D 1AO

I 0 ... 20 mA

in slot D

94 05HBlock length for channel

n s

95 00HChannel address: 0 (one)

96 A3HPower output: 0 ... 20 mA, S5 format

97 00HNot relevant

98 00HNot relvant

99 0BHBlock length for channel module Smart Connect

1COUNT40kHz

100 06HChannel module address: slot F 1COUNT40kHz

in slot F

101 09HBlock length for channel

n s

102 00HChannel address: 0 (one)

103 00HLower count limit: 11

104 0BH

105 08HUpper count limit: 2222

106 AEH

107 38HMode: continuous; count mode: upward;

comparison value enabling: enable; activate

digital output at: comparison value counting

upward as pulse; digital output logic: 0;

108 07HDigital output pulse duration: 700 ms

109 14HHysteresis: 20 pulses

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-31

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.5 Default Start-up

The

ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC can carry out a default start-up.

When it does this, the ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC works with a de

fault configuration.

The ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC also runs with the digital default

configuration when there are no SC modules connected.

The default configuration frame corresponds to the message of the

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC when you read the configuration.

!Warning

If an SC module fails, in a default start-up the addresses are read in such a

way that the failed SC is not included.

A device master file provides security here. Y

ou can create this with

COM PROFIBUS.

This section contains all the information you require on the default start-up.

Section Topic Page

C.5.1 Default Start-up with Digital Smart Connect Modules C-32

C.5.2 Default Start-up with Analog Smart Connect Modules C-36

Introduction

Contents of the

Section

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-32 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.5.1 Default Start-up with Digital Smart Connect Modules

number of type files are available for the default start-up. Y

ou can obtain

these via modem (dial +49 (91

1) 737972) or in CompuServe in AUTFORUM

(GO AUTFORUM

) in the SINEC library

Table C-14 Type Files for the ET 200L-SC Default Start-up with Digital SC Mod-

ules

Electronics Block ET 200L-SC Name of the Type File

L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V SI8027ZX.200

L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V SI8029ZX.200

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A SI8028ZX.200

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A SI802CZX.200

L-SC IM-SC SI802BZX.200

The

following configuration frames are required for the default start-up of the

ET 200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC with digital Smart Connect modules:

Note

When an ET 200L-SC or ET 200L-SC IM-SC receives a default configura

tion frame with 2/4 bytes DI and DO, the module still starts up when there

are no SC modules connected.

Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

Configuration Frame Slots Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

43-01-00-9F-42 4 2 bytes DI

C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart

Connect with electronic

mod

ules (SC): 2 input and 2 output by-

tes

Type

Files

Configuration

Frame

L-SC 16 DI

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-33

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Configuration

frame for the ET 200L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

Configuration Frame Slots Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

43-03-00-9F-43 4 4 bytes DI

C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart

Connect with electronic

mod

ules (SC): 2 input and 2 output by-

tes

Configuration

frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

Configuration Frame Slots Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

83-01-00-AF-50 4 2 bytes DO

C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart

Connect with electronic

mod

ules (SC): 2 input and 2 output by-

tes

Configuration

frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/ 0.5 A:

Configuration Frame Slots Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

C2-01-01-BF-D2 4 2 bytes DO/2 bytes DI

C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart

Connect with electronic

mod

ules (SC): 2 input and 2 output by-

tes

L-SC

32 DI

L-SC 16 DO

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-34 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC:

Configuration Frame Slots Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

C2-01-01-42-4A 4 4 input and 4 output bytes

The

ET 200L-SC requires the following parameterization frame for the de

fault start-up:

Parameters for the status (3 bytes)

Standard section (7 bytes)

See Figure C-2

Byte

Byte 9

00H

Figure C-13 Structure of the Parameterization Frame

Note

A

diagnostic interrupt enable is not possible in byte 1 (BIT 5).



If you use a DP master for the default start-up that sends only the stan

dard section of the parameterization frame, the start-up is carried out

without status bytes (bytes 7 to 9).

For the default setting of the ET 200L-SC, 2 bytes each are set in the process

image for the digital Smart Connect modules for the input and output of the

Smart Connect electronic modules.

0ABCDEFGH

12345670123 45 6 7

567012 3 4567

Byte 0 Byte 1

SC modules

Input bytes

Output bytes

Slot

Figure C-14 Default Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC

L-SC

IM-SC

Parameterization

Frame

Default Setting for

Digital Smart

Connect Modules

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-35

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

For the default setting of the ET 200L-SC IM-SC, 4 bytes each are set in the

process image for the digital Smart Connect modules for the input and output

of the Smart Connect electronics modules.

SC modules

Input bytes

Output bytes

01234567

ABCDEFGHABCDEFGH

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3

Slots

TB 16IM-SC

TB 16SC

Figure C-15 Default Setting for Digital SC Modules with the ET 200L-SC IM-SC

default start-up is carried out with the following configuration:



ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5A and Smart Connect:

Smart Connect

Output word 64

Input word 70

Output word 80

ET 200L-SC

16 DO DC 24 V/0,5A

A B C D E F G H

2DI 2DI 2DO 2DO 1DI 1DI 1DO

Rel 1DO

Rel

Address assignment for the ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect



ET 200L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A

–

On-board I/O device outputs 1 to 8: output byte 64.0 to 64.7

–

On-board I/O device outputs 9 to 16: output byte 65.0 to 65.7



Smart Connect:

Slot SC Module Address

A 2DIDC24V Input 70.0 and 70.1

B 2DIDC24V Input 70.2 and 70.3

C 2DODC24V0.5A Output 80.4 and 80.5

D 2DODC24V0.5A Output 80.6 and 80.7

E 1DIAC120/230V Input 71.0

F 1DIAC120/230V Input 71.2

G 1DORel.AC230V Output 81.4

H 1DORel.AC230V Output 81.6

Default Setting for

the ET 200L-SC

IM-SC

Example

Solution of the

Example

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-36 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

C.5.2 Default Start-Up with Analog Smart Connect Modules

There

are no type files for the default start-up of the ET

200L-SC or

200L-SC IM-SC with analog Smart Connect modules. This is because

there is such a wide range of configuration options.

Note

In the default start-up, the analog Smart Connect modules use the default

parameters stored in each module (see Chapter 12).

For the default start-up of the ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC with ana

log Smart Connect modules, an addition must be made to the configuration

frame of the ET

200L-SC with digital Smart Connect modules. Use the con

figuration frame extension shown in T

ables C-15 and C-16, and append it to

the configuration frame of the ET

200L-SC or ET

200L-SC IM-SC with digi

tal Smart Connect modules.

In addition to analog Smart Connect modules, at least one digital Smart Con

nect module must be plugged in.

Table C-15 ET 200L-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Modules

Configuration Frame Exten-

sion for the ET 200L-SC Slot Meaning

43-(40 to 4E)-00-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog input modules; 1 to 8 modules with 1 to

16 channels, depending on the configuration

83-(40 to 43)-00-42-45 6 Smart

Connect with analog output modules;

1 to 4 modules with 1 to

4 channels, depending on the configuration

C2-(40 to 43)-(40 to 4E)-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog output and input modules; 1 to 4 output

modules with 1 to 4 channels and 1 to 8 modules with 1 to 16 chan-

nels, depending on the configuration

Table C-16 ET 200L-SC IM-SC: Configuration Frame Extension for Analog Smart Connect Modules

Configuration Frame Extension

for the ET 200L-SC IM-SC Slot Meaning

43-(40 to 5D)-00-42-4A 5 Smart Connect with analog input modules; 1 to

16 modules with

1 to 32 channels, depending on the configuration

83-(40 to 48)-00-42-4A 5 Smart Connect with analog output modules; 1 to

8 modules with

1 to 8 channels, depending on the configuration

C2-(40 to 48)-(40 to 5D)-42-4A 5 Smart Connect with analog output and input modules; 1 to 8

output modules with 1 to 8 channels and 1 to 16 input modules

with 1 to 32 channels

Type

Files

Configuration

Frame

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-37

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

For

the default start-up, the ET 200L-SC requires the following parameteriza

tion frame. The analog Smart Connect modules work with their default pa

rameters:

Parameters for the status (3 bytes)

Standard section (7 Byte)

See Figure C-2

Byte

Byte 9

00H

Figure C-16 Structure of the Parameterization Frame

Note

A

diagnostic interrupt enable is not possible in byte 1 (BIT 5).



If you use a DP master for the default start-up that sends only the stan

dard section of the parameterization frame, the start-up is carried out

without status bytes (bytes 7 to 9).

Parameterization

Frame

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-38 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

For the default setting of the ET 200L-SC, 2 bytes each are set in the process

image for the digital Smart Connect modules for the input and output channel

of the Smart Connect electronic modules.

The identified analog channels are incorporated

seamlessly

in the slot se

quence in the process image. Figure C-17 shows the assignment of the bytes

in the process image to the individual channels.

Note

Unidentified analog channels are not inserted in the process image(because,

for example, the SC analog module has been removed or is defective). As a

result, the 3rd analog channel occupies bytes 2 and 3, for example.

The device master file gives you security about correct addressing. Y

ou can

create this file with COM PROFIBUS.

3rd AI chan.

2nd AI chan.

1st AI chan.

3rd AO chan

2nd AO chan.

1st AO chan. 543

Inputs

Outputs

Byte

ET 200L-SC,

ET 200L-SC IM-SC:

Figure C-17 Default Setting for Analog Smart Connect Modules

default start-up is carried out with the following configuration:



ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V and Smart Connect:

16 DI DC 24 V

Smart Connect

A B C D E F H

2DI 2DO 2AI 1AI 1AO 2DO

Input word 64

Input word

Digital: 70

Analog: 130

Output word

Digital: 80

Analog: 140

ET 200L-SC

1AI

Default Setting for

Analog Smart

Connect Modules

Example

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-39

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Configuration

frame for the ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

Configuration

Frame Slot Meaning

04-00-00-AD-C4 1 Virtual slots

04-00-00-9B-40 2

04-00-00-8F-C0 3

43-01-00-9F-42 4 2 bytes DI

C2-01-01-42-45 5 Smart Connect with digital electronic modules

(SC): 2 input and 2 output bytes

C2-40-44-42-45 6 Smart Connect with analog electronic modules

(SC): 1 input and 5 output words

Address

assignment for the ET 200L-SC and Smart Connect



ET 200L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

–

On-board I/O device outputs 1 to 8: input byte 64.0 to 64.7

–

On-board I/O device outputs 9 to 16: input byte 65.0 to 65.7



Smart Connect:

Slot SC Module Address

A 2DIDC24V Input 70.0 and 70.1

B 2DODC24V/0.5A Output 80.2 and 80.3

C2AI U +/– 10V Input word 130 and 132

D2AI RTD Input word 134

E1AO I4 ... 20 mA

(double module width)

Output word 140

F(double module width)

G2AI I4 ... 20 mA Input word 136 and 138

H 2DODC24V/2A Output word 81.6 and 81.7

Configuration

Frame of the

Example

Solution of the

Example

Configuration Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

C-40 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Configuration

Frame and Parameterization Frame for the ET 200L

D-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically

Sensitive Devices (ESD)

In Section You will find On Page

D.1 What is ESD? D-2

D.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons D-3

D.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic

Discharge Damage D-4

Summary of

Sections

D-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

D.1 What is ESD?

All

electronic modules are equipped with lar

ge-scale integrated ICs or com

ponents. Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to

overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic dischar

ge.

These

lectrostatically

ensitive

evices are commonly referred to by the

abbreviation

ESD.

Electrostatically sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:

!Caution

Electrostatically sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below

the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These volt

ages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a

module without previously being electrostatically dischar

ged. In most cases,

the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and re

sults in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation

Definition

Guidelines

for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

D-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

D.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons

Every

person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of

its surroundings can be electrostatically char

ged.

Figure D-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which

can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in

the figure. These values are in conformity with the specifications of

IEC 801-2.

oltage in kV

(kV)

51020 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Relative atmospheric

humidity in %

Synthetic material

2Wool

Antistatic material, such as

wood or concrete

Figure D-1 Electrostatic Voltages which can Build up on a Person

Charging

Guidelines

for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

D-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

D.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge

Damage

Make

sure the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are suf

ficiently

grounded when handling electrostatically sensitive devices.Y

ou can thus

avoid electrostatic char

ging.

ou should touch electrostatically sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable

(for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the

pins of components or printed conductors. In this way

, the dischar

ged ener

cannot af

fect the sensitive devices.

If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must dischar

ge your

body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts.

Use grounded measuring devices only

Ensure Sufficient

Grounding

void Direct

Contact

Guidelines for Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

Glossary-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Glossary

The

aggregate of the currents of all the output channels of a digital output

module.

The baud rate is the speed at which data is transmitted. It specifies the num

ber of bits transmitted per second (baud rate = bit rate).

Baud rates of 9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps are possible with the ET 200L.

The common transmission path to which all nodes are connected. It has two

defined ends.

In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire cable or a fiber

-optic cable.

The physical link between the bus nodes and the bus cable.

In the case of the ET 200, there is a bus connector with and without connec

tions for the programming unit and with IP 20 and IP 65 degrees of protec

tion.

The chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected inactive parts of a

piece of equipment that cannot carry hazardous contact voltage even in the

event of a fault.

This refers to the configuration of individual modules in a distributed I/O

system.

Aggregate

current

Baud rate

Bus

Bus connector

Chassis ground

Configuration

Glossary-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Data

that belongs together by content is referred to as consistent data.

The data must not be corrupted by being read at different times.

The default setting is a basic setting that applies unless another value is set

(i.e. parameterized).

All the properties of a DP slave are stored in a device master file. The format

of the device master file is stored in the EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS

standard.

These are input/output units that are installed in a distributed configuration at

some distance from the CPU rather than in the central rack. For example:

ET

200L



ET 200B



ET 200M



Other DP slaves manufactured by Siemens or another company

The distributed I/O devices are connected to the DP master via the

PROFIBUS-DP bus.

Diagnostics is the detection, localization, categorization, indication and anal

ysis of errors, faults, malfunctions and messages.

Diagnostics provides monitoring functions that run automatically while a

plant is operating. This enhances the availability of a plant by reducing setup

and stoppage times.

master whose behavior complies with EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS

is referred to as a DP master

slave that runs on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS-DP protocol

and whose behavior complies with EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS is re

ferred to as a DP slave.

The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system. It

complies with EN 50170 Volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Consistent data

Default setting

Device master file

Distributed I/O

devices

Diagnostics

DP master

DP slave

DP standard

Glossary

Glossary-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Electromagnetic

compatibility is the capacity of electrical equipment to work

correctly in a specified environment without negatively af

fecting the func

tioning of other equipment in the vicinity

An electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the

bodies of electrical apparatus and extraneous conductive bodies to the same

or approximately the same potential to prevent interfering or hazardous volt

ages between these bodies.

The ET 200 distributed I/O system with the PROFIBUS-DP protocol is a bus

for connecting distributed I/O devices to a CPU or an adequate DP master

. A

feature of ET

200 are its short response times, since only a small volume of

data (bytes) is transmitted.

ET 200 complies with the PROFIBUS standard, EN 50170 V

olume 2,

PROFIBUS.

ET 200 operates on the master/slave principle. The IM 308-C master inter

face module or the CPU 315-2 DP can be DP masters, for example.

The distributed I/O devices ET 200B, ET 200C, ET

200M, ET

200L or

200U can be DP slaves, as can other DP slaves made by Siemens or other

manufacturers.

In the case of input/output modules, the reference potentials of control and

load circuits are isolated (e.g. by means of an optocoupler

, a relay contact or

a transformer). Input/output circuits can be connected to common potential.

This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.

When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the cur

rent status of the

inputs

and transfers them at intervals to the DP master

The DP slave freezes the status of the

inputs

again after each subsequent

FREEZE control command.

The input data is not transmitted from the DP slave to the DP master at inter

vals again until the DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.

Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring that the electrical equipment

functions properly

. By means of function grounding, interference voltages

that would otherwise result in inadmissible interference to the equipment are

short-circuited.

Electromagnetic

compatibility

Equipotential

bonding

200

Floating

FREEZE

Function

grounding

Glossary

Glossary-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

The

conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set to zero at any

point.

Around grounding electrodes, the earth may have a potential other than zero.

The term ”reference ground” is frequently used in this connection.

Grounding means to connect an electrically conductive part to the grounding

electrode by means of a grounding system.

DIN 40050 degree of protection: Protection against finger contact and against

solid foreign matter more than 12 mm in diameter

A power supply unit for the ET

200L distributed I/O device and the process

devices connected to it.

When it is in possession of the token, a master can send data to other nodes

and request data from other nodes (synonymous with active node).

The CPU 315-2 DP and the IM 308-C can be

DP masters, for example.

A device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus (e.g. a DP master

DP slave, RS 485 repeater or active star coupler).

In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of

control and load circuits are electrically connected.

Ground

Grounding

Load power

supply unit

Master

Node

Non-isolated

Glossary

Glossary-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Parameterization

is the passing of slave parameters from the DP master to the

DP slave.

In contrast to static parameters, the dynamic parameters of modules can be

changed during operation by calling an SFC in the application program (e.g.

limit values of an analog signal input module).

In contrast to dynamic parameters, the static parameters of modules cannot

be changed by means of the application program; they can only by changed

by means of STEP

7 (not in RUN mode). An example is the input delay of a

digital signal input module.

A programmable logic controller consists of at least one CPU, a number of

input and output modules, and operating and monitoring equipment.

PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard defined in

the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS). It specifies

functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial field bus

system.

PROFIBUS is available with the following protocols: DP (= distributed I/O),

FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), P

A (= Process Automation) or TF

echnological Functions).

Each bus node must have a PROFIBUS address (station number) so that it

can be identified uniquely on the PROFIBUS.

PC/PG or the ET 200-Handheld have the PROFIBUS address ”0”.

The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 99 are permissible for the ET

200L distrib

uted I/O device.

A draft standard (EN 50170 V

olume 2, PROFIBUS) on which the ET 200

distributed I/O system is based.

The potential on the basis of which the voltages of the circuits involved can

be observed and/or measured.

Parameterization

Parameters,

dynamic

Parameters, static

Programmable

logic controller

PROFIBUS

address

PROFIBUS-DP

Reference

potential

Glossary

Glossary-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

slave cannot exchange data with a

master unless requested by the latter

to do so.

Examples of slaves are all DP slaves, such as ET 200B, ET 200L and

200M.

The Smart Connect SC enables the fine adjustment of input and output chan

nels to the process. The ET 200L-SC can be upgraded by means of a Smart

Connect.

SYNC is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.

By means of the SYNC control command, the DP master causes the DP slave

to freeze the statuses of the

outputs

at their current value. In the subsequent

frames, the DP slave saves the output data, but the statuses of the outputs

remain unchanged.

After each SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs it has

saved as output data.

The outputs are not periodically updated again until the DP master sends the

UNSYNC control command.

A file required by the configuration software (e.g. COM ET 200 W

indows)

for configuring a DP slave. The type file contains definitions of the slave-

specific properties, such as the number of inputs and outputs, the number of

diagnostic bytes, and SYNC capability

Not having a conductive connection to

ground.

Slave

Smart

Connect SC

SYNC

Type file

Ungrounded

Glossary

Index-1

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Index

Numbers

VDC supply

, 3-4

Actuators on the SC, connecting, 1

1-26

Address

for queries, v

for training, v

Aggregate current, Glossary-1

Analog value representation of the SC, 1

1-29

for input modules, 1

1-1–1

1-3, 1

1-32–11-54

for resistance thermometers, 1

1-35, 1

1-48

for thermocouples, 1

1-36–11-37,

11-49–11-50

Analog/digital conversion, 1

1-8

Applicability of the manual, iii

Applications, 1-3

Assignment, slot module, 2-9

Assignment of EB to TB, 8-1, 9-1

Baud rate,

B-3

, Glossary-1

, 5-2, 5-3

Block diagram, 1COUNT40kHz, 13-3

Block diagram of the analog modules

1 AI R

TD, 12-45

1 AO I, 12-55

1 AO U, 12-51

2 AI HS U, 12-9

2 AI U, 12-3

2AI HS I, 12-27, 12-33

2AI I, 12-15, 12-21

Block diagram, electronic module, SC

1DIAC120/230V

, 10-12

1DOAC120/230V1A, 10-15

1DORel.AC230V

, 10-18

2DIDC24V

, 10-3

2DODC24V0.5A, 10-6

2DODC24V2A, 10-9

Block I/O device, ET 200L, 1-3

Bridging voltage drops, 6-9

Bus, Glossary-1

Bus connector

, Glossary-1

clipping on, 3-12

Cable cross-sections, 3-9

Cables

insulation stripping length, 3-9

number

, 3-9

CE marking, 6-2

Certification, 6-2

Changes, since the previous versions of the

manual, iii

Characteristics

electronics block, 1-7

terminal block, 1-7

Chassis ground, Glossary-1

Circuit schematic, 2-13

Climatic environmental conditions, 6-7

COM ET 200 Windows, 4-2

COM PROFIBUS, 4-2

Compensating box, 1

1-12

Components of an ET 200L, 1-9

Components, SC, 1-10

Configuration, Glossary-1

Configuration frame, C-4

Configuration frame for the ET 200L-SC, struc

ture, C-4

Configuration software, 4-2

Connect, terminal block, 3-1

Connecting cables, tightening torque, 3-9

Connecting to the SC, loads/actuators, 1

1-26

Connection rules, SC, 2-13, 2-15

Consistent data, Glossary-2

Conversion time

analog input channel, 1

1-8

analog output channel, 1

1-24

Counter module, 13-1

functions, 13-4

parameters, 13-17

technical data, 13-25

wiring, 13-14

CSA certification, 6-3

Index-2 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Current

sensor

, 1

1-15

Customer Support, vi

Cycle time

in a module, 1

1-8, 1

1-24

of the system, 1

1-24

to the system, 1

1-8

Data exchange, 4-4

Default parameters, SC, 1

1-6

of the analog output module, 1

1-22

Default setting for the Smart Connect, C-34,

C-35, C-38

Default start-up, C-31

Definition

electromagnetic compatibility

, 6-4

grounded supply

, 3-5

manufacturer ID, 5-9

master PROFIBUS address, 5-9

ET 200L, 1-3

station status, 5-8

Degree of protection, 6-8

Device master file,

B-1

, Glossary-2

Diagnostics, 5-1, Glossary-2

default start-up for ET 200L-SC, 5-15

definition, 5-5

DP slave, 5-7

general remarks, 5-6

station for ET 200L-SC, 5-13

module for ET 200L-SC, 5-10

using LEDs, 5-2

Disassemble

electronics block, 2-6

supplementary terminal, 2-4

terminal block, 2-5

Display

LED, 5-2, 5-3

status, 5-2

Disposal, iv

Distributed I/O device, Glossary-2

DP master

, Glossary-2

DP slave, Glossary-2

DP standard, Glossary-2

DP identifier

, C-2

EB L 16 DI AC 120 V

, 8-18

block diagram, 8-19

characteristics, 8-18

technical data, 8-20

EB L 16 DI DC 24 V

, 8-3, 9-4

block diagram, 8-4

technical data, 8-5, 9-6

view

, 8-3

EB L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-15

block diagram, 8-16

technical data, 8-16

view

, 8-15

EB L 16 DO AC 120V/1.0A, 8-21

block diagram, 8-22

characteristics, 8-21

technical data, 8-23

EB L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-6

block diagram, 8-7

technical data, 8-7

view

, 8-6

EB L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120V/2.0 A, 8-24

EB L 32 DI DC 24 V

, 8-9

block diagram, 8-10

technical data, 8-1

view

, 8-9

EB L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-12

block diagram, 8-13

technical data, 8-13

view

, 8-12

EB L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A, 8-28

block diagram, 8-29

characteristics, 8-28

technical data, 8-29

EB L 8DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24V/AC

120V/2.0A, 8-31

EB L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-13

block diagram, 9-14

technical data, 9-14

view

, 9-13

EB L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

block diagram, 9-5

view

, 9-4

Index

Index-3

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-7

block diagram, 9-8

technical data, 9-8

view

, 9-7

EB L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

, 9-10

block diagram, 9-1

technical data, 9-12

view

, 9-10

Electrical installation, configuring, 3-5

Electrical phenomena, protection against, 3-4

Electromagnetic compatibility

, 6-4

Electronic module, SC, 1-1

1, 1-14

1 AI R

TD, 12-44

1 AO I, 12-54

1 AO U, 12-50

1COUNT40kHz, 13-1

1DIAC120/230V

, 10-1

1DOAC120/230V1A, 10-14

1DORel.AC230V

, 10-17

2 AI HS I, 12-26, 12-32

2 AI HS U, 12-8

2 AI I, 12-14, 12-20

2 AI TC, 12-38

2 AI U, 12-2

2DIDC24V

, 10-2

2DODC24V0.5A, 10-5

2DODC24V2A, 10-8

connecting additional, 4-5

installing, 2-13

Electronics block

characteristics, 1-7

disassembling, 2-6

L 16 DI AC 120 V

, 8-18

L 16 DI DC 24 V

, 8-3

L 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-15

L 16 DO AC 120V/1.0A, 8-21

L 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-6

L 16 DO DC 24 V/AC 120 V/2.0 A, 8-24

L 32 DI DC 24 V

, 8-9

L 32 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 8-12

L 8 DI AC 120V/8 DO DC 24 V/AC

120V/2.0A, 8-31

L 8 DI/8 DO AC 120 V/1.0 A, 8-28

L-SC 16 DI DC 24 V

, 9-4

L-SC 16 DI/16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-13

L-SC 32 DI DC 24 V

, 9-10

L-SC 16 DO DC 24 V/0.5 A, 9-7

EMC, 3-6

EMERGENCY ST

OP devices, 3-3

Emission of radio interference, 6-5

Equalizing circuit, 1

1-12

Equipotential bonding, Glossary-3

ET 200, Glossary-3

components, 1-2

incorporated modules, 1-8

what is the ET 200, 1-2

ET 200 distributed I/O system, 1-2

ET 200L

block I/O device, 1-3

characteristics

electronics block, 1-7

terminal block, 1-7

components, 1-9

definition, 1-3

view

, 1-8

wiring, 3-1

ET 200L and Smart Connect, what is the ET

200L and Smart Connect, 1-3

ET 200L terminal block, wiring, 3-16

ET 200L-SC

modular I/O device, 1-4

modules, 1-10

ET 200L-SC IM-SC

components, 1-14

features, 1-13

fine-step modular I/O device, 1-5

IM-SC interface module, 1-13

Expansion, 4-5

Fine-step modular I/O device, ET 200L-SC IM-

SC, 1-5

Floating, Glossary-3

FM approval, 6-3

FREEZE, Glossary-3

Function grounding, Glossary-3

Functioning, of thermocouples, 1

1-9

General technical data, ET 200L, 6-1

Ground, Glossary-4

Grounded supply

, 3-5

Grounding, Glossary-4

Hotline, vi

Index

Index-4 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Identifier,

C-6

Identifiers for the ET 200L, C-2

Identifiers for the ET 200L-SC, C-6

IEC 1

131, 6-2

IM-SC, 9-2

block diagram, 9-3

characteristics, 9-2

technical data, 9-3

view

, 9-2

IM-SC interface module, 1-13

installing on the terminal block, 2-17

wiring, 3-18

Input ranges, SC

bipolar

, 1

1-30, 1

1-43

life-zero, 1

1-31, 1

1-44

unipolar

, 1

1-30, 1

1-43

Installation, 2-1

electronics block, 2-6

requirements, 2-3

supplementary terminal, 2-4

terminal block, 2-4

Installation dimensions, SC, 2-7

Installation, ET 200L, sequence, 2-1

Installing

terminal block for the Smart Connect, 2-8

the IM-SC interface module, 2-17

Insulation stripping length, ET 200L, 3-9

Insulation test, 6-8

Interface module IM-SC, 9-2

Interference frequency suppression, SC, 1

1-5

Internet, vi

IP 20, Glossary-4

Label, 3-12

Labeling sheet, SC, 1-12, 1-15

Labeling strips, SC, 2-9, 2-15

LED, 5-2, 5-3

, 5-2, 5-3

ON, 5-2, 5-3

LEDs on the ET 200L-SC, 5-3

Load circuit, 3-6

Load current power supply

, characteristics, 3-6

Load power supply unit, Glossary-4

Loads on the SC, connecting, 1

1-26

Local ground, 3-14

Mailbox, vi

Maintenance, 4-5

Manual

aids to using, v

electronic, iv

other

, iv

purpose of, iii

Manufacturer ID, C-2

definition, 5-9

structure, 5-9

Master

, Glossary-4

Master PROFIBUS address

definition, 5-9

structure, 5-9

Measurement type/measurement range, 1

1-4

Measuring sensor

, floating, 1

1-18

Mechanical environmental conditions, 6-7

Modular I/O device, ET 200L-SC, 1-4

Modules of the ET 200L-SC, 1-10

Node, Glossary-4

Non-isolated, Glossary-4

ON, 5-2, 5-3

Operating regulations, 3-3

Output ranges, SC

bipolar

, 1

1-37, 1

1-50

life-zero, 1

1-38, 1

1-51

unipolar

, 1

1-37, 1

1-50

Output type/output range, 1

1-21

Overall installation in TN system, 3-7

Parameterization, Glossary-5

tool for

, 1

1-2, 1

1-20

Parameterization frame, C-14

Parameters for the Smart Connect, C-17

Plug-in rules, SC, 2-14

Power supply

, 1-6

connecting, 3-17

Preface, iii

Index

Index-5

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

version, of the manual, iii

Product overview

, 1-1

PROFIBUS, Glossary-5

address, Glossary-5

location of rotary switch, 2-18

address modifying, 2-18

address validity

, 2-18

PROFIBUS address, setting, 2-18

PROFIBUS-DP terminal connection, 3-13

PROFIBUS-DP

1-2

, Glossary-5

Programmable logic controller

, Glossary-5

Protection against electrical phenomena, 3-4

Protective measures, 3-5

PS.

See

Power supply

Pulse-shaped interference, 6-4

Queries, v

Rail, 1-6

Rated voltage, 6-9

Recycling, iv

Reference junction, 1

1-5, 1

1-12

Reference potential, Glossary-5

Reference temperature, 1

1-5

Resistance thermometer

, 1

1-17

Resistors, 1

1-17

Resolution, 1

1-29

Response time of the SC, analog output, 1

1-25

Rotary switch, 2-18

Rules

for electronic modules, 2-13

general, 3-3

Safety class, 6-8

Safety regulations, 3-3

Settling time, SC, analog output, 1

1-25

Shield terminal, SC, 1-12, 1-15

Shipping conditions, 6-6

SIMA

TIC Customer Support, vi

Sine-shaped interference, 6-5

Slave, 5-5, Glossary-6

diagnosis, structure, 5-7

requesting, 5-7

Slot, SC, 2-13

Smart Connect

connecting, 3-24

connecting cable, 1-1

wiring, 3-14

Smart Connect SC, 1-10

Smoothing, SC, 1

1-5

Standards, 6-2

Standards and certification, 6-2

Start-up, 4-4

of plant, 3-3

Start-up types, C-3

Static parameters, of the analog output modules,

11-20

Station diagnosis, 5-13

Station status

definition, 5-8

structure

Part 1, 5-8

Part 2, 5-9

Part 3, 5-9

STEP 7, 4-2

Storage conditions, 6-6

Structure, of thermocouples, 1

1-9

Structure of the slave diagnosis, 5-7

Supplementary terminal, 7-18

dimension drawing, 7-19, 7-20

disassembling, 2-4

for TB 16SC and TB 16IM-SC, 7-20

installing, 2-4

versions supplied, 7-18, 7-20

Supplementary terminal ET 200L, SC, 1-15

Supplementary terminal, ET 200L, SC

securing, 2-19

using, 3-22

Supplementary terminal, SC, 1-1

Supply isolating switch, 3-3

Supply voltage, 3-3

SYNC, Glossary-6

System designation, note on labeling strip, 2-12

TB 16IM-SC, 7-14

block diagram, 7-17

characteristics, 7-14

dimension drawing, 7-16

terminal designation, 3-17

wiring, 3-16

Index

Index-6 ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

16L, 7-2

dimension drawing, 7-2

pinout, 7-3

technical data, 7-3, 7-13, 7-17

TB 16L AC, 7-7

dimension drawing, 7-8

pinout, 7-9

technical data, 7-9

TB 16SC, 7-10

dimension drawing, 7-12

wiring, 3-14

TB 32L, 7-4

dimension drawing, 7-5

pinout, 7-6

technical data, 7-6

echnical data

1AI R

TD, 12-48

1AO I, 12-57

1AO U, 12-53

1COUNT40kHz, 13-25

1DIAC120/230V

, 10-13

1DOAC120/230V1A, 10-16

1DORel.AC230V

, 10-19

2AI I , 12-18, 12-24

2AI HS I, 12-30, 12-36

2AI TC, 12-42

2AI HS U, 12-12

2AI U , 12-6

2DIDC24V , 10-4

2DODC24V0.5A, 10-7

2DODC24V2A, 10-10

climatic environmental conditions, 6-7

data of the individual components, 8-1, 9-1

electromagnetic compatibility

, 6-4

general, ET 200L, 6-1

mechanical environmental conditions, 6-7

transport and storage conditions, 6-6

emperature measurement, 1

1-9

erminal block

(spring terminal) wiring, 3-10

characteristics, 1-7

connecting, 3-1

disassembling, 2-5

installing, 2-4

snapping onto, SC, 2-8

TB 16IM-SC, 1-14, 7-14

TB 16L, 7-2

TB 16L AC, 7-7

TB 16SC, 7-10

TB 32L, 7-4

TB16-SC, 1-1

erminal connection model, 3-12

erminal designation, TB 16SC, TB 16IM-SC,

3-17

est voltage, 6-8

Thermocouple types, 1

1-9

Thermocouple, SC, 1

1-9

how it works, 1

1-9

structure, 1

1-9

with compensating box, 1

1-13

ightening torque, connecting cables, 3-9

TN system, 3-7

raining, v

ype file,

B-1

, Glossary-6

ype files for the default start-up, C-32

ype files, device master files, B-1

UL recognition, 6-3

Ungrounded, Glossary-6

iew of ET 200L, 1-8

oltage drop, 6-9

oltage sensor

, non-isolated, 1

1-14

Wiring

ET 200L and Smart Connect, 3-1

ET 200L terminal block, 3-16

IM-SC interface module, 3-18

Smart Connect, 3-14

TB 16IM-SC, 3-16

TB 16SC, 3-14

terminal block (spring terminal), 3-10

iring rules, SC, 3-9

Index

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c



Siemens AG

A&D AS E 148

Postfach 1963

D–92209 Amberg

Federal Republic of Germany

From:

Your Name: _______________________________

Your Title: ______________________________

Company Name: ______________________________

Street: _______________________________

City, Zip Code: _____________________________

Country: ______________________________

Phone: ______________________________

Please check any industry that applies to you:

Automotive

Chemical

Electrical Machinery

Food

Instrument and Control

Nonelectrical Machinery

Petrochemical

Pharmaceutical

Plastic

Pulp and Paper

Textiles

Transportation

Other _____________

2ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Additional comments:

_____________________________________

Remarks Form

Your

comments and recommendations

will help us to improve the quality and usefulness

our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire

and return it to Siemens.

Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range

from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).

1. Do the contents meet your requirements?

2. Is the information you need easy to find?

3. Is the text easy to understand?

4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?

5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c



Siemens AG

A&D AS E 148

Postfach 1963

D–92209 Amberg

Federal Republic of Germany

From:

Your Name: _______________________________

Your Title: ______________________________

Company Name: ______________________________

Street: _______________________________

City, Zip Code: _____________________________

Country: ______________________________

Phone: ______________________________

Please check any industry that applies to you:

Automotive

Chemical

Electrical Machinery

Food

Instrument and Control

Nonelectrical Machinery

Petrochemical

Pharmaceutical

Plastic

Pulp and Paper

Textiles

Transportation

Other _____________

2ET

200L, ET 200L-SC and ET 200L-SC IM-SC Distributed I/O Device

A 4NEB 780 6009-02c

Additional comments:

_____________________________________

Remarks Form

Your

comments and recommendations

will help us to improve the quality and usefulness

our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire

and return it to Siemens.

Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range

from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).

1. Do the contents meet your requirements?

2. Is the information you need easy to find?

3. Is the text easy to understand?

4. Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?

5. Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables: